© 44 175-00) 6.05 9 & 0. 4,0-Goe: & 4 0) S 9.09, S Got 1146 9-t0Gr 8 So eeel Deeg a Ee et he Od 244 EF ewe tite e Med th bth Se niyarey etn i error eh repairer ye reir et precio ey © o6-00@, OM: RO etd tettrtae ee SEIT) ty ear Fade ba Aa me ho Sane a AONE ae bode te pak be bets te eC Ot erty irate hr wy RLU hoa taser | Ae 60 be ok Rredeg Cet Atte b Pee PCN) re ears eed eed ae ee errors ‘ A eee hate vhbhe Ong MCA #aaelletnawaaeds: bs sas > * ‘ ‘ HO-404 A AHN 4 ate ater * bbs fe Sites iss ae De etry * ° ae eine On Omer aCe Went) a) a ey Wales OW ep NYE ei . ‘ an ‘ eh) . i - ‘ val Vervpeay } eee Nea wrtrack Dian tei » pista nebe ea aed tie * Ps ace Uhebetee oe ie i ; Dek baron aay edt S Alba . Pybate eare’ achaeth oA perk ee ep a dete dbp aaah a . mee i Une aA | Ap reetedy h-fd eek ethos wehre dee atl aia abet Coe tease eww eect rect Wy Wis Hecerata toledsorerarise oath : oy) feyrety' ’ i Comanpotnr ie =) New sve visy Sete eee rik ie DA attr ars mn Hy hay ieldea ce Renralsnene cataloging ee Meiteeeae eth beateinckcioen uke ; paras ‘ Aa : ieeentie Hiscthne rirecaits eeoae econ maa bctere : nore end atte poe eae ‘ . si ieasbiarns Nb de { . + + ee a x nae reas ra J . Seay seievaces bem tested - yh eae nk dea tae 3 ee ie Reiohe : . mm ‘ ‘ ON ERE eRe eee wire ee yt sty mit Pom ar rh? , had wea ee Papueenr new erie Viet sande ke 21a SNe tied peaces ietetoabil pebonibds SRM TE eye , Shen 7 see WA Mehl tiene they War Wa fet ete Ay debts De iothed AI dod the Dotty ioe) permed raat Detet8 wa de: yoy) Se iat a ich aig eng. Gearhead sv pete Piven bi dete beg titel A Es lt eect baer peas muta Ba 0 Pe Ky PP eriien ers nih SON Net ei UA bie tek and deb as 4b tain Ladebedy babsbed tehnel en teks bets tabebe seven tice yeaelty “ . aint s are ba ed araldeate aera ick beter reba Haken aw dian ih 9 02d Pub tidsaiiantg eras | Bib ha beleoak isthe Nor tet Dads t abv he tic tym radill Wa dastohy se beded nel 404 badd cad Me eehe bet vb) if wht beh Mek ded os Seow itis UO ORIEL MOL MOS Tere ener Mat YY o Bath Hele tty aadnrnes et , « Wegre Pom Pater WV bebe ’ Wa dtd sedes sheodselerah trdeteh ied wohteeerhe betiact SAN Coren Ne OAD ALTE bee bet hat ote Bey pi Mia lica Amt 086 0 Lot ye beam tha é URI iaatebeasteard A, 1 laa ais be debated ns beh ab atsteded cap ee eTestokews fot: head i Daan wi anh Eta nba pr ONG ’ Maehp ascete hs hae empmibeey roelem Crna Hart bebe Pn aroEe Tn nt tet be tib 4 esa . Pew boris 1a it ep Bek ’ dateatetne Vieng in pebca brads btn rete ade lip ante . « +h ve rely + hn de tee ohh get Bi i Nohdess fete tetaniee pee a: nt Ar) od Tet Siastots trast S cate : : ree * 7 Deh ok th Soe ini: ubicsbai hed en Weve med Facet ve ‘ einen ik seen et ek Pari ane NS veeterieon a) fee é ane 4 ‘ ‘ ’ 4: Cee hod hed ed BF Bet Dede oh Mts tt O18 Oro po ierehntes : fiale NTeee anes sya ie ay) Ue padars ot Fe therm oir ’ Avoervad bis digdeny wat Ceadanbe sich bad de teuntebs destin aig . a ren) Rey ee) i fiiniatahtie ey Madhu elt be Tech \adurty s aulineaye Waeidaieeckcataieeedan a beletetad GrAlaee bad ete a iyi ‘alge ole i ernie Hy eye) Sa ede 25 ae F ; Say rent : mes ere eM Regan ae A ny eter ten Gar \ de tetnaes ) aed aha nts ia : DIMM Dar nce OR sruenitede nya Teddies We seugerdt ° eat ee afacaty Se ei eareed meaonteerarneteg Nes ra Re RRR NT Phe Aad epietianonnana Soothe ita Fh bi ede es Dede a Uadlen vas nan hat ade Qs Poa NEE Metirte hopes Bae Ira Shea Biren: betewe Mensteesat von botnet reas eed Ponies 1 Dada tad wile Hisar arbre . bet eae wes : , tte \ 4, oe Lodide ih bnee ila hevis nade tee tla mre ag he we wate ie heen jescitbaebariautieaheta ss: m : , Saat, : if Aor 7 tare tere int tehetrde beds Bot be AG heard oh dered) Be test, - : - ; asele say tredst AB “i we Msihptea tthe hele a aw ia sted 1 Folate erty vets se te pes aNd: otarded hoe ase Ho ashes sey, aici rate tf Prin ish BoP Orbis dear pate debe We todphy ds dele Ooh ee Prieta ARN AR Peete eR AT A riety sea ebenee Wee bene Se be hated book be eee dy > y - erty Farka es seek Oodle Toh AObE edeOr vem ban joie deine hadron ted Otey bag Ie ott ‘ acai a ed rx} 4t$s Preariciue dems hee Wie eh eee Sh treeice ane ook Hpseot-3 ‘vebet + det va De dsbiaacath isaelaiashesehsrsgey du Avare bbe bemiees ten eraekeoobetetee & erbctees hy iene 5 opekea eV Pabir be Meas fea ae ne fe deen i Ueda a satatatstetiea tet a Fraridtacten. oe ADM otra thnd ta ae de ia alee Ista kesh ay ti Patedek dyed Tad Leite aed : are! ay nar heday P Shotehan et) On mn SD weap) Maik Cl megs araieae ah dsieted death Bfeniryy) ry eistcaeths Oithalt ttn jet dst sdouehcledee sesatee berecy pen Uehara ca it acdediae snared aa trans hatindesy® bed Bataan Srtheare schyacegaedgint Waitin tai arnt Seta ees ea neete te ate hereon oak bot 4 Ve ey A ates Id yet ree ath phe ducbeah oe sbidsted 9) 4 Peete ete tates: fats eS leine draire dee oa aT sorted a weed pNoorattceties sith te bt SS Whe rien Ta ata od: ooh Thies Wet eeargehieed ke hods ; 3 Bobet ode et oe be teb be be She A Basil ansetiiey be ieee vit Mey bebe cartener pay reeae oe . shes SS ehintls teaser’ bopete eae es Py sae eebadt bet eah gates Rarveds gee Att ini RN PUR RIOR et ned Ra RET Ses trai eae be bepth Rel habe dt had teh Le rae odd E-Fed DM Bea Det 8H ey bgtucsadad std leas & fede detee Ged Ae DO he Ra Ble eA ey Bisaee ae lets wr a i edi ko bed tee Puss Senet WOOT Ta POP eM RN tS ind tesa peaeg hs ttbug ay Vedeilodetbe ds dsgradeg. oi Was ted a ated ge dote fobtdepedede dcdded HW te Rae Mae ae sot nehtiaee eam einai he : A PRG Wei tovea ae debe ert he ‘ Vals YF Gbeeehedeh dds d ae bed ob deed g Sh vadi hs apes Orne een it ees Uhcteammten ea Hiab ~ ha lesa Mae tus Yo beta aes : ETE hgh he sobs g eye idee G9 tid dea Ba a pen rereceMys ir aye ia. ee Pabbegh St ae! mite Seyedsai tant Oe ty HURL Abs wih idueiiee tinct etek mies phetey beans iabtesteineeee mata , tions er - peathertrc ss mevereneie: ute nt scene Mente eticaates tite PN Ser abe rbiyesent Mir nore | Shak ae Heh rrtives Aterteamraeteinn: stctebepety ee ioocle hoe tocar temas yoo Sieb Daas duet ENTS eandd Perit yt 28 one VEE didnt bk pat erin r) ot Ae Sot v4 Dedhady Os dod ede to Pla Soke entrar itd Hepes Reey eerie) eee iE ey ob ad, ete Saray Dodane an he ek a dias bet be rare A beempebten wat lige Ga ty pe persons ete tery erat eea aes Dire nents et Exifrer ir: btdeyd Ara Te Setanta tokens reat ey SOUR TE be ans Gadel beige we cndnsededt i i co 4 yi Jn ahi ie tobe era He ; cena eae oie nishaeaeanie Arto fiabede de ds paarar deta) BYith ees a dea ed 1 PW dedew rae wearer vey Coates Veahobdagits ced anegbe ds anes agen Sah desi b Us rabat do pb ert prraririer suereenent ryt! wi Letange a dea Cee reiterates rd bed aebed desde ded pity merely tse ar) wid oleate ae TATA Gave G0 opt eed natu BE amo Fae gre : tre be panera’ wit vig re f Saetes oboe aes nieareed Mer sos itis gee vp! sh Te atgened ayety > ebée teat Ban te bot pe S Tere: (ad sake wee Reeser, hatvonend nd ee ee ere ie Wate ts Granta eed ngubdodjes.arpede eee he ella fue 8s e santas Meets sich aah phe uaesotes pw dey obi lett be ret i Pee eter eas SraceeAbea eect tds ie spo) Pa Hse Ualerineee tphtty ey tienen berating is ae Svak ines ieee inal orb od ay Eat ar ig Leg apie fy tex SSeS etety See Cereg aa Berane amt tetyeer ay Monnaie tate aie Pea we bese bastrtnd ean prn set soccerei aes tee ae Wee ye ae & a eared sey oa Waye seers by ridhshrw eshieecstary ieee hina eicgvangrecasaresachynteradire, sures iehrawisbedy aera oiectoumtane ~ ceewlon i iate seectteecenate dis ied (hist Wane FR bk a eth ECR TUR La Penn tiT by eM TED iy Wo bt Heed Ure ter 6 8: Bee Ooh a Snares PeMrete ewer a Y were Sit Pasrrrny sees Neleye seqssnecprerts Seoy eet He tee a Aided a eed pba 28 8 2 Undead Pies pa lava eedvunvesh bods alate atu seth ieben orosts nate Swi toget tats Reve henety aoe ten pasie de earn eke ns Obl te pedede Wtrbotse ame gebed Cnern i hist saaoorstten Wad fad Sov ari 4 bated bead eo Bek ages Bow Meh Or BE Snes Sib alas ( nana s pha orients #veom ees | Pict conten were ret Sigh 7 CAG ork U Apt tsa roearots Ud deep aie bee nosed ae pene + vere ih owagtany VW eset eopaleahtoraetennenee tet per rcriewen te tical Ft oeeh @ ind ea drprd develo bode di gy ara gracded 9 8 Ard ahah ea Wat bed aart dea Ueda wedrd shee dea sg OH 4 4y9 oath ae EER ta seule dd d6 9) peantia day deena Pamuarhent a Sai rararas seveaor wide ebacbraslt dora ty aie nays i Pane Gee ded been HN werd | deo e tetra eieved @ VMs ded oe ee bey aint ae e. ats Mahescary hee re Ratcters = seaiaaat Sore) tet tat wh Weed Uirsesae > RUC ere rani ins rare ees coer orit Seer een jtovssoreraeaee ‘damned teeeedeers ( a] | } ee ee Seen neta ‘ eas mao THE PHILIPPINE JOURNAL OF SCIENCE PAUL C. FREER, M.D., Pu. D. SUCCEEDED BY ALVIN J. COX, M.A., Pu. D. GENERAL EDITOR WITH THE COOPERATION OF DEAN C. WORCESTER, A.B.; MERTON L. MILLER, Pu. D. LAURENCE E. GRIFFIN, Pu. D.; CHARLES S. BANKS, M. S. ALVIN SEALH, A.B.; RICHARD C. McGREGOR, A.B. PUBLISHED BY THE BUREAU OF SCIENCE OF THE GOVERNMENT OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS SECTION D @ GENERAL BIOLOGY, ETHNOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY VOLUME VII 1912 WITH 35 PLATES AND 16 TEXT FIGURES MANILA BUREAU OF PRINTING 1912 221884 DATES OF ISSUE. No. 1, May 9, 1912. No. 2, July 9, 1912. 3, October 17, 1912. No. 4, November 13, 1912. No. 5, December 28, 1912. 6, March 10, 1913. CONTENTS. No. 1, February, 1912. HouuisterR, N. A list of the mammals of the Philippine Islands, EXGHIISIV Cm tem U Mem COCEACE cease reece eer ee ee ea No. 2, April, 1912. GRIFFIN, LAWRENCE EDMONDS. The anatomy of Aclesia freeri new RD ECIOS sees tee ere oe ee he ca SU eet oie: og Re ee Plates Ito VI. Text figures 1 to 5. Pearse, A. S. A new Philippine fiddler-crab -.......22.20222- eee Text figure 1. FELSCHE, CARL. Zwei neue Lucaniden der Philippinen —. Tafel I. WAGNER, HANS. Hin neues Apion von den Philippinen ...............-.....- Textfiguren 1 und 2. HELLER, K. M. Eine neue Gattung der Discolomidae (Coleoptera) EHUISEC CERO TION CANT Ch CTI EY COT © 11 seem eae tse a one ren eee een enn een Text figure 1. PERE V EEA WV auoescr ee oc See te cee ae ce a connate cae Se ae a ES SS ae Se eS No. 3, June, 1912. IPWARSES PAG Os oecheshabitssor nddler-craps:. ese Text figures 1 to 6. MILLER, Merton L. The Mangyans of Mindoro........... Plates I to X. SCHNEIDER, E. E. Notes on the Mangyan language... BEDDARD, FRANK E. The Oligocheta terricole of the Philippines. an Gag eer Ces OT USO NOLO DLIM Arcane seein see a Ng eel Socrne Plate I. FESS WU igre ease recs Ce ute A Meu eee die Oe Sod eh CO oe SEP No. 4, August, 1912. CHRISTIE, EMPRSON BREWER. The stone industry at San Esteban, EDR 20 SSeS dine ae EET ees ee eS cee oe ae aad Oe i AG eS oe Plates I to V. CHRISTIE, EMERSON BREWER. Notes on the wood-working industry of SAM VAICENIU GA MUL OKO Se Ur irae ee meee cates a ate oa en ee eae Plates I to IV. Page. 1 65 91 Nr 101 105 111 231 iv CONTENTS. OsHiIMA, MASAMITSu. Description of a new gecko from Botel Tobago TSVeamnd weiss oie eee nee ena ce Cree ae Goo sear ee Plates I and II. BERNHAUER, Max. Neue Staphyliniden der Philippinen... Ouaus, Fr. Nachtrage und Berichtigungen zu: ,,Die Ruteliden der PhilippinischenInselnj ee eee Tafel I. SEALE, ALVIN. Notes on Philippine edible mollusks..........0000000..... Plates I and I. SEALE, ALVIN. Description of a new Acanthocybium from the Phil- ippine ‘slands:s< 220.0. ee Plate I. SEALE, ALVIN. Editorial: Some poisonous Philippine fishes... Text figure 1. No. 5, October, 1912. HELLER, K. M. Philippinische Riisselkafer___........02 No. 6, December, 1912. HELLER, K. M. Philippinische Rtisselkafer___........ 2. Tafeln I und II. Memorial Number, July, 1912. Frontispiece. EGAN, Martin. The life and career of Doctor Freer... BRENT, CHARLES H. Paul Caspar Freer, his influence upon other STRONG, RicHARD P. Doctor Freer and his general influence upon scientific work in the Philippine Islands.............0.2022220.-...- WoRCESTER, DEAN C. Doctor Freer and the Bureau of Science............ MUSGRAVE, WILLIAM EVERETT. Professor Freer and the University of the’ Philippines! ...222<..0..2-2 $2.5... o ee BARTLETT, Murray. Doctor Freer as an organizer and an adminis- ERTL eo eae CALDERON, FERNANDO. Doctor Freer as a friend of the Filipinos........ Gines, H. D> UPaull'C. PreersChemist= ee 283 289 295 347 ix sf THE PHILIPPINE JOURNAL OF SCIENCE D. GENERAL BIOLOGY, ETHNOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY Vot. VII FEBRUARY, 1912 No. 1 A LIST OF THE MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS, EXCLUSIVE OF THE CETACEA. By N. HOLuIsTER. (Assistant Curator, Division of Mammals, United States National Museum, Washington, D. C.*) INTRODUCTION. This list is based almost wholly on the published literature of the subject. Although the large collection of Philippine mam- mails in the United States National Museum has been of constant service, there has been no attempt at monographic or revision- ary work on the specimens themselves. The: list was first planned by Mr. Dean C. Worcester, who requested Mr. Gerrit S. Miller, curator of mammals, United States National Museum, to carry it out. Owing to more pressing work, it was impos- sible for Mr. Miller to take it up at present, and it was turned over to me. As the work progressed it seemed important to add several features not primarily planned, and as completed it forms several distinct parts. The work is intended chiefly as a stimulus and help to collect- * Published here by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. 104911 2 HOLLISTER. ors and travelers in the Islands, that they may be able to collect intelligently and to know the important species to be sought for or saved in certain localities. Doubtless hundreds of valuable specimens are annually lost to science through a lack of proper appreciation of the immense value of certain specimens from many localities. This is especially true of the larger mammals, the skulls alone of which, carefully labeled as to locality, are often of the greatest importance, and might be readily saved by sports- men, even though it were impossible at the time to preserve the skins. The key to the families is purely artificial, and is based on Philippine species only. Easily discerned characters, chiefly external, or at least conspicuous in freshly-killed examples, are used whenever possible. It has been the chief aim to avoid technicalities as much as possible without destroying the work- ing value of the key, that it may be serviceable to sportsmen and travelers, without special study of mammalian structure. The key refers to the pages in the list proper where the genera and species of the family are listed; and under each genus is given a brief synopsis of characters common to all the Philippine species. To make them more serviceable, by the use of the most conspicuous characters, these generic diagnoses, like the key itself, are based solely on Philippine species and are not intended for use outside the Islands. Many characters used will fail in species from other regions. The list proper is supposed to contain all the species described from or reported from the Islands, with a reference to the original description, the present generic combination, and all synonyms with type-localities in the Philippines. After this, is given the type-locality of the recog- nized form and a list of the islands from which it has been recorded in literature, with an authority for each record. After the list proper is a “Hypothetical list’ of species apparently erroneously reported from the Islands by Casto de Elera, a list of type-localities in the Philippines, and a bibliography of papers dealing with Philippine mammalogy. The time has not yet come to write more than a preliminary list of Philippine mammal names; and not until a thorough sur- vey of the Islands is made, topotypes of all described forms assembled, and general collecting carried on in all localities, will it be possible to prepare a real manual of Philippine mammals. U. S. NATIONAL MusEuUM, July 1, 1911. MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 3 LIST OF PHILIPPINE MAMMALS. Artificial key to the families of Philippine mammals. Posterior limbs absent (dugong) .............-..-2--.--.-:--ceeeeeeeeee Dugongide, p. 45. Posterior limbs present. Toes furnished with hoofs. Both sexes without horns. Upper incisors present (pigss) -........2..-..------ceceeeneeeeeeeeeeeee Suide, p. 38. Upper incisors wanting (mouse-deer) ..............-.-.--.. Tragulide, p. 39. Males with horns. : Solid bony horns (antlers) in male only (deer) Cervide, p. 40. Hollow horns in both sexes (caribao) ........-.-.-.-.22--------- Bovide, p. 45. Toes furnished with claws or nails. . Upper parts covered with scales; teeth absent (pangolin). Manide, p. 35. Upper parts without scales; teeth present. Fore and hind limbs connected by a membrane for flying or “sailing.” Fingers not greatly elongated for support of flight membrane (parachute). Feet webbed to nails (flying-lemur) ............ Galeopteride, p. 7. Feet not webbed (flying-squirrels) .................. Petauristide, p. 25. Fingers greatly elongated for support of flight membrane (true wing). Index finger with three phalanges (fruit-bats).. Pteropide,p. 7. Index finger with less than three phalanges (bats). Wppereincisors; absent. er ee Megadermids, p. 18. Upper incisors present. Tail not contained entirely within interfemoral membrane. Tail extending beyond posterior end of the interfemoral membrane Aces sc ey Ue Molosside, p. 20. Tail perforating upper surface of interfemoral mem- JO TeATI roe eg ee UREN EN Ce Emballonuride, p. 12. Tail contained entirely within interfemoral membrane. Bla yawalt best re Ou Sie cee eee Vespertilionide, p. 16. Ear without tragus. Toes with two phalanges each ...... Hipposideride, p. 15. Toes (except hallux) with three phalanges each. Rhinolophide, p. 13. Fore and hind limbs not connected by a membrane for flying or “sailing.” Front teeth chisel-shaped, separated from grinding teeth by a wide space (no canine teeth; gnawing animals). Back furnished with long quills (porcupine) .... Hystricide, p. 34. Back without quills. With four or more grinding teeth in each jaw (squirrels). Sciuride, p. 24. With two or three grinding teeth in each jaw (rats, etc.). Muride, p. 26. A HOLLISTER. Front teeth not chisel-shaped, tooth row essentially continuous (canine teeth present). Size small; length of head and body (to root of tail) less than 215 millimeters (8.5 inches). Total length (nose to end of tail) under 250 millimeters (or 10 inches). Fur short; color uniform unmixed brownish—or blackish- gray (truevshrews) ea ee Soricide,p. 5. Fur long; color variegated; slate gray mixed with reddish- OO WT te ree asst re Ee eee Erinaceide,p. 4. Total length (nose to end of tail) over 250 millimeters (or 10 inches). Tail well haired (tree shrews)..............-.....---- Tupaiide,p. 6. Tail nearly naked (tarsier) ........-..2.-2...-.0-0-- Tarsiide, p. 36. Size large; length of head and body (to root of tail) over 215 millimeters (or 8.5 inches). Upper incisors four. No external tail. Size small; head and body less than 300 millimeters (or LELOOL) i GSLOWw;LetaattTy) yee nee eee Lemuride, p. 35. Size large; head and body over 400 millimeters (or 16 inches) (cibbon)) yee Hylobatide, p. 38. With external tail, very short or very long (maccaque). Cercopithecide, p. 36. Upper incisors six. Hind foot with four toes (cats) -...-..-..-.--.--------- Felide, p. 23. Hind foot with five toes. Upper molar-premolar row (all teeth back of the long canine tooth) of six teeth (civets and mon- POOSC)) reese eee eee ee ee Viverride, p. 22. Upper molar-premolar row of less than six teeth. Upper molar-premolar row of four teeth (otter, CS tg b Fell gah) =] Wes) Vi aatie rr ee Mustelide, p. 20. Upper molar-premolar row of five teeth. Ears tufted; throat and breast blackish (binturong ors bear=cat) ye Viverride, p. 22. Ears not tufted; throat and breast yellowish (marten) ee ee ae Mustelide, p. 20. Order INSECTIVORA. Family ERINACEIDA. Genus PODOGYMNURA Mearns. 1905. Podogymnura MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 28, 436. Type.—Podogymnura truei MEARNS. A small, rat-like wood-shrew; pelage long, full, and soft. Up- per parts slate-gray mixed with coarse reddish-brown hairs; under parts, hoary, slightly mixed with brown hairs. Head and body, 148 millimeters; tail, 62; hind foot, 36. Only one specimen known. MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 5 Podogymnura truei Mearns. 1905. Podogymnura truei MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 437. Type locality—Mount Apo, Mindanao; 1,829 meters. Min- danao (Mearns). Family SORICIDA. Genus PACHYURA Sélys-Longchamps. 1839. Pachyura SELYS-LONGCHAMPS, Etudes de micro-mammalogie, 32. Type.—Crocidura etrusca BONAPARTE (= Sorex etruscus SAVI). Mouse-like shrews, with short, uniformly colored brownish- gray coat. Four small conical teeth behind each anterior upper incisor. Length of head and body, in Philippine species, over 110 millimeters. Pachyura edwardsiana (Trouessart). 1880. Crocidura edwardsiana TROUESSART, Le Naturaliste, No. 42, 330, December 15. Type locality.—Sulu. Sulu (Trouessart) . Pachyura luzoniensis (Peters). 1871. Crocidura (P.) luzoniensis PETERS, Monatsb. Konigl. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin (1870), 595. Type locality—Luzon. Cebu (Giinther) ; Luzon (Peters). Genus CROCIDURA Wagler. 1832. Crocidura WAGLER, Isis von Oken, 275. Type.—Sorex leucodon HERMANN. Small mouse-like shrews; usually darker colored than Pach- yura, dark brownish-black. Three small conical teeth behind each anterior upper incisor. Length of head and body less than 100 millimeters. Crocidura beatus Miller. 1910. Crocidura beatus Miuner, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 38, 392, August 19. Type locality—Mount Bliss, Mindanao; 1,753 meters. Min- danao (Miller). Crocidura grandis Miller. 1910. Crocidura grandis Minurr, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 38, 393, August 19. Type locality—Grand Malindang Mountain, Mindanao; 1,753 meters. Mindanao (Miller). Crocidura grayi Dobson. 1890. Crocidura grayi Dogpson, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 6, 494. Type locality—Philippine Islands. Luzon (Miller). 6 HOLLISTER. Crocidura halconus Miller. 1910. Crocidura halconus Minter, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 38, 391, August 19. Type locality—Mount Halcon, Mindoro; 1,920 meters. Min- doro (Miller). Crocidura mindorus Miller. 1910. Crocidura mindorus MILLER, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 38, 392, August 19. Type locality—Mount Halcon, Mindoro; 1,920 meters. Min- doro (Miller). 7 Family TUPAIIDA. Genus TUPAIA Raffles. 1822. Tupaia RAFFLES, Trans. Linn. Soc. London, 13, pt. 1, 256. Type—Tupaia ferruginea RAFFLES. Tree-shrews with general appearance of small squirrels, but muzzle without whiskers; tail long-haired and flattened; head pointed; ears rounded. Coloration variegated reddish, grayish, or buffy. Head and body about 155 millimeters; tail about 166. Tupaia cuyonis Miller. 1910. Tupaia cuyonis MituerR, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 38, 693, August 19. Type locality—Cuyo. Cuyo (Miller). Tupaia ferruginea palawanensis Thomas. 1894. Tupaia ferruginea palawanensis THOMAS, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 13, 367. Type locality—Palawan. Palawan (Thomas). Tupaia mollendorffi Matschie. 1898. Tupaja méllendorfii MATSCHIE, Sitz.-ber. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin (1898), No. 5, 39, May. Type locality—Culion. Culion (Matschie). Genus UROGALE Mearns. 1905. Urogale MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 28, 435. Type.— Urogale cylindrura MEARNS. Like Tupaia but larger, with tail short-haired and more cyl- indrical. Colors dark brown, usually with an indistinct fer- ruginous stripe over each shoulder. Head and body about 200 millimeters; tail about 100. MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. if: Urogale cylindrura Mearns. 1905. Urogale cylindrura MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 435. Type locality—vVillage of Todaya, Mount Apo, Mindanao; 1,219 meters. Mindanao (Mearns). Urogale everetti (Thomas). 1892. Tupaia everetti THoMAS, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. VI, 9, 250, March. 1905. Urogale everetti MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 435. Type locality Zamboanga, Mindanao. Mindanao (Thomas). Order DERMOPTERA. Family GALEOPTERID:. Genus CYNOCEPHALUS Boddaért. 1768. Cynocephalus BopDAERT, Dierk. Meng., 2, 8, footnote 1. Type.— Cynocephalus volans=Lemur volans LINNAEUS. “Flying-lemur.” Fore and hind limbs and tail connected by a broad expansion of skin forming a parachute; feet fully webbed. Colors marbled gray and brown. Size of a small do- mestic cat; head and body about 400 millimeters. Cynocephalus volans (Linneus). 1758. Lemur volans LINNZUS, Syst. Nat., 10 ed., 1, 30. 1768. Cynocephalus volans BopDAERT, Dierk. Meng., 2, 8, footnote 1. 1838. Galeopithecus philippinensis WATERHOUSE, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 119. (South of Manila, Luzon.) Type locality —Pampanga, southern Luzon [see Thomas, Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1911), 130]. Basilan (Steere) ; Bohol (Thomas) ; Dinagat (Giinther); Leyte (Thomas); Mindanao (Steere) ; Samar (Thomas). Order CHIROPTERA. Family PTEROPID. Genus CYNOPTERUS F. Cuvier. 1825. Cynopterus F. Cuvier, Des Dents des Mammiféres, 248. Type.—Pteropus marginatus GEOFFROY. Rather small fruit-bats with very short tails, the terminal half free from interfemoral membrane; second finger with well devel- oped claw; nostrils prominent, almost tubular; upper lip divided by a deep, narrow, vertical groove. Color variable. Head and body: about 110 millimeters. 8 HOLLISTER. Cynopterus luzoniensis (Peters). 1862. Pachysoma luzoniense PETERS, Monatsb. Konigl. Preuss. Akad. (1861), 708. 1870. Cynopterus marginatus var. philippensis GRAY, Cat. Monk., Lemurs, and Fruit-eat. Bats, 128. (Philippines.) 1870. Cynopterus marginatus var. cumingii GRAY, Cat. Monk., Lemurs, and Fruit-eat. Bats, 128. ( Philippines.) 1899. Cynopterus luzoniensis MATSCHIE, Megachiroptera des Berliner Mus., 76. Type locality—East slope of Voleano Yriga, Camarines, Lu- zon. Luzon (Peters). Genus THOOPTERUS Matschie. 1899. Thoopterus MATSCHIE, Flederm. des Berliner Mus. fiir Naturk., 77. Type.—Cynopterus marginatus var. nigrescens GRAY. Like Cynopterus, but with cheek teeth greatly enlarged, the crowns almost square; tail shorter, concealed in the fur. Gen- eral color dark brown. Thoopterus nigrescens (Gray). 1870. Cynopterus marginatus var. nigrescens GRAY, Cat. Monk., Lemurs, and Fruit-eat. Bats, 123. 1878. Cynopterus latidens DOBSON, Cat. Chiropt., 86. 1895. Cynopterus latidens ELERA, Cat. Syst. Faun. Filipinas, 1, 7. 1907. Thoopterus nigrescens MILLER, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 57, 50. Type locality—Morty Island, Malay Archipelago. Luzon (Elera). Genus PTENOCHIRUS Peters. 1862. Ptenochirus PETERS, Monatsb. Konigl. Preuss. Akad. (1861), 707. Type.—Pachysoma (Ptenochirus) jagorii PETERS. Like Cynopterus, but with inner pair of lower incisors absent (incisors 4/2) ; outer upper incisors shorter than middle ones. Color above dark brown, below paler. Head and body, 103 milli- meters. Ptenochirus jagorii (Peters). 1862. Pachysoma (Ptenochirus) jagoriti PETERS, Monatsh. Koénigl. Preuss. Akad. (1861), 707. 1899. Ptenochirus jagori MAtTscHIE, Megachiroptera des Berliner Mus., 79. Type locality —Daraga, Albay, Luzon. Luzon (Peters) ; Min- danao (Trouessart) ; Mindoro (Trouessart). i Genus ROUSETTUS Gray. 1821. Rousettus GRAY, London Med. Rep., 15, 299, April 1. Type.— Pieropus aegyptiacus GEOFFROY. Medium sized fruit-bats (Philippine species, head and body about 127 millimeters). Muzzle long; second finger with well MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 9 developed claw; tail about 16 millimeters long. Color varying from dark brown to yellowish-brown. Rousettus amplexicaudatus (Geoffroy). 1810. Pteropus amplexicaudatus GEOFFROY, Ann. Mus. d’Hist. Nat. 15, 96. 1870. Hleutherura philippinensis GRAY, Cat. Monk., Lemurs, and Fruit-eat. Bats, 119. (Manila, Luzon.) 1904. Rousettus amplexicaudatus TROUESSART, Cat. Mamm., Suppl., 60. Type locality—Timor Island. Guimaras (Steere); Luzon (Thomas) ; Negros (Elliot) ; Samar (Peters). Genus PTEROPUS Brisson. 1762. Pteropus BRISSON, Regn. Anim., 2 ed., 18. Type.—Vespertilio vampyrus LINNUS. Large fruit-bats (one species the largest bat known). Tail absent; interfemoral membrane narrow; calcar well developed; well developed claw on index finger. Fur of nape of neck and shoulders differing in color or quality from that of back. Pteropus cagayanus Mearns. 1905. Pteropus cagayanus Meena! Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 433. Type locality—Cagayan Sulu. Cagayan Sulu (Mearns). Pteropus hypomelanus hypomelanus Temminck. 1853. Pteropus hypomelanus TEMMINCK, Hsquiss. Zool. sur la Cote de Guiné, 61. Type locality—Ternate. Dinagat (Giinther); Guimaras (Elliot) ; Leyte (Steere) ; Mindanao (Giinther) ; Panay (Steere). Pteropus leucopterus Temminck. 1853. Pteropus leucopterus TEMMINCK, Esquiss. Zool. sur la Céte de Guinée, 60. 1870. Pteropus chinensis GRAY, Cat. Monk., Lemurs, and Fruit-eat. Bats, 111. [Probably Luzon, see Andersen, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1909), VIII, 3, 218, footnote.] Type locality.—Philippine Islands. Cagayan (Hlera) ; Luzon (Andersen). Pteropus pumilus Miller. 1910. Pteropus pumilus Miter, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 38, 394, August 19. Type locality—Palmas Island, southeast of Mindanao. Pal- mas (Miller). Pteropus speciosus Andersen. 1908. Pteropus speciosus ANDERSEN, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VIII, 2, 364, October. Type locality.—Malanipa Island, off Zamboanga. Malanipa (Andersen) ; Sibutu (Andersen). 10 HOLLISTER. Pteropus vampyrus lanensis Mearns. 1905. Pteropus lanensig MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 482. 1908. Ptieropus vampyrus lanensis ANDERSEN, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Nat. Hist., VIII, 2, 368, October. Type locality—Pantar, near Lake Lanao, Mindanao; 581 me- ters. Catanduanes (Thomas); Cebu (Hlera); Dinagat (Giin- ther) ; Leyte (Elliot) ; Luzon (Matschie) ; Mindanao (Mearns) ; Negros (Steere) ; Palawan (U.S. N. M.); Panay (Steere) ; Ra- sal (Giinther) ; Samar (Peters). Genus ACERODON Jourdan. 18387. Acerodon JOURDAN, L’Echo du Monde Savant et l’Hermés, 4, No. 275, 156, October 14. Type.—Pteropus jubatus ESCHSCHOLTZ. Large fruit-bats; like Pteropus, but with smaller canines and larger, more complex molariform teeth. Middle pair of lower in- cisors much smaller than the outer incisors. Forearm from 165 to 205 millimeters. Acerodon jubatus jubatus (Eschscholtz). 1831. Pteropus jubatus ESCHSCHOLTZ, Zool. Atlas, 4, 1, pl. 16. 1833. Pteropus pyrrhocephalus MEYEN, N. Act. Acad. Czs. Leop.-Car., 16, pt. 2, 604, pls. 45-46. (Manila, Luzon.) 1896. Pteropus auri-nuchalis ELLIOT, Field Col. Mus. Pub. Zool., 1, No. 3, 77, May. (Leyte.) 1896. Acerodon jubatus HEUDE, Mém. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 3, 177. Type locality—Manila, Luzon. Dinagat (Andersen); Leyte (Andersen); Luzon (Andersen); Negros (Andersen); Panay (Billiot). Acerodon jubatus mindanensis Andersen. 1909. Acerodon jubatus mindanensis ANDERSEN, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VIII, 3, 26. Type locality—Mindanao. Mindanao (Andersen). Acerodon lucifer (Elliot). 1896. Pteropus lucifer ELLIOT, Field Col. Mus. Pub. Zool., 1, No. 3, 78, May. 1909. Acerodon lucifer ANDERSEN, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VIII, 3, 24, January. Type locality—Concepcion, Panay. Panay (Elliot). Genus HYPODERMIS Blythe. 1828. Hypoderma GEOFFROY, Dict. Class. Hist. Nat., 14, 706, (not Hypoderma LATREILLE, 1825). ~ 1840. Hypodermis BLYTHE, Cuvier’s Anim. Kingd., 69. Type—Cepha- lotes peronit GEOFFROY. 1898. Dobsonia PALMER, Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., 12, 114, April 30. Medium sized fruit-bats. No claw on index finger; tail well developed; two upper and two lower incisors only. Head and MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 10! shoulders well clothed with blackish fur; posterior half of body nearly naked. Head and body about 165 milimeters. Hypodermis peronii (Geoffroy). 1810. Cephalotes peronit Grorrroy, Ann. Mus. d’Hist. Nat. 15, 104. Type locality — Timor Island. Samar (Trouessart). Genus MACROGLOSSUS Schinz. 1824. Macroglossus SCHINZ, Naturgesch. und Abbild. Saugeth., 71. Type.——Pteropus rostratus HORSFIELD=Macroglossus minimus (GEOFFROY). Small reddish-brown fruit-bats; body entirely furred; well de- veloped claw on index finger; no external tail. Head and body less than 100 millimeters. Macroglossus lagochilus Matschie. 1899. Macroglossus lagochilus MATSCHIE, Megachiroptera des Berliner Mus., 97. Type locality—Buru. Cuyo (Hlera) ; Negros (Thomas) ; Pa; nay (Hlera) ; Samar (Elera) ; Tablas (Matschie). Genus ODONTONYCTERIS Jentink. 1902. Odontonycteris JENTINK, Notes from Leyden Mus., 23, No. 38, 140, July 15. Type.—Odontonycteris meyerit JENTINK. Like Macroglossus in external characters, but upper and lower molar-premolar rows of six teeth (an additional upper molar over Macroglossus) . Odontonycteris meyeri Jentink. 1902. Odontonycteris meyeri JENTINK, Notes from Leyden Mus., 23, No. 3, 140, July 15. Type locality. Great Sangi Island. Cagayan Sulu (Miller). Genus HARPYIONYCTERIS Thomas. 1896. Harpyionycteris THomAS, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 18, 243, September. Type.—Harpyionycteris whiteheadi THOMAS. Medium sized fruit-bats (head and body 140 millimeters). No tail; claw on index finger present; legs unusually short. General color above and below uniform chocolate-brown. Only one speci- men known. Harpyionycteris whiteheadi Thomas. 1896. Harpyionycteris whiteheadi THOMAS, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 18, 244, September. Type locality—Mindoro. Mindoro (Thomas). 12 HOLLISTER. Family EMBALLONURIDA:. Genus EMBALLONURA Temminck. 1838. Emballonura TEMMINCK, Van der Hoven’s Tijdschrift Nat. Gesch. en Physiol., 5,22. Type.—Emballonura monticola TEMMINCK. Small insectivorous bats; proximal phalanx of third finger flexed on dorsal surface of metacarpal when at rest; muzzle with- out special cutaneous outgrowths; tragus present; eyes large, rather prominent. Tail perforates the interfemoral membrane and appears on its upper surface distinctly back from edge. Up- per incisors four. Head and body about 38 millimeters. Emballonura monticola Temminck. 1838. Emballonura monticola TEMMINCK, Van der Hoven’s Tijdschrift Nat. Gesch. en Physiol., 5, 25. 1839. Vespertilio (Nycticeus) alecto EypoOUX AND GERVAIS, Voyage autour du Monde, 5, pt. 2, 7. (Manila, Luzon.) 1862. Emballonura discolor PETERS, Monatsb. Konigl. Preuss. Akad. (1861), 711. (Paracali, Luzon.) Type locality—Java. Luzon (Dobson). Genus TAPHOZOUS Geoffroy. 1813. Taphozous GEOFFROY, Descr. de l’Egypte, 2, 118. Type.—Tap- hozous perforatus GEOFFROY. Philippine species larger than Emballonura, with short muzzle, deep hollow between eyes, and tail perforating interfemoral membrane, free for at least 10 millimeters. Colors brown or black, frequently marbled with lighter. Upper incisors two. Proximal phalanx of third finger flexed on dorsal surface of me- tacarpal when at rest, as in Emballonura. Taphozous philippinensis Waterhouse. 1845. Taphozous philippinensis WATERHOUSE, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, Jan. 14, (1845), 9, April. Type locality.—Philippine Islands. Luzon (Matschie); Min- danao (Hoffman). Taphozous pluto Miller. 1910. Taphozous pluto MILLER, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 38, 396, August 19. Type locality.—Mercedes, 15 kilometers east of Zamboanga, Mindanao. Mindanao (Miller); Luzon (Miller). MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 18 Family MEGADERMIDZ. Genus MEGADERMA Geoffroy. 1810. Megaderma GrEorrroy, Ann. Mus. d’Hist. Nat., 15,187. Type.— Vespertilio spasma LINNUS. Bats with long, erect nose-leaf, very short tails, and large ears with bifid tragus; no upper incisor teeth. Color brownish-gray or slaty. Head and body about 87 millimeters. Megaderma spasma spasma (Linnzus). 1758. Vespertilio spasma LINN/US, Syst. Nat. 10 ed., 1, 32. 1810. Megaderma spasma GEOFFROY, Ann. Mus. d’Hist. Nat., 15, 195. 1848. Megaderma philippinensis WATERHOUSE, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 69. (Philippine Islands.) Type locality—Ternate [See Andersen and Wroughton, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1907), VII, 19, 182]. Luzon (Sanchez) ; Mindanao (Dobson). Family RHINOLOPHIDA. Genus RHINOLOPHUS Lacépéde. 1799. Rhinolophus LAcKPEDE, Tabl. des Div. Sousdiv. Ordres et Gen- res Mamm., 15. YType.—Vespertilio ferrum-equinum SCHREBER. Small bats with conspicuous nose-leaves; large ears without tragus. Tail well developed, contained entirely within the inter- femoral membrane. Rhinolophus anderseni Cabrera. 1909. Rhinolophus anderseni CABRERA, Bol. de la Real Soc. Espaiola de Hist. Nat., 305 (306 in separate), June. Type locality—Philippines, probably Luzon. (?) Luzon (Cabrera). Rhinolophus virgo Andersen. 1905. Rhinolophus virgo ANDERSEN, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, May 16, (1905), 88, October. ~ Type locality—South Camarines, Luzon. Luzon (Andersen). Rhinolophus philippinensis Waterhouse. 1843. Rhinolophus philippinensis WATERHOUSE, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lon- don, 68. Type locality —Luzon [see Anderson, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1905), 16, 254]. Luzon (Peters) ; Mindanao (Hoffman). 14 HOLLISTER. Rhinolophus luctus Temminck. 1841. Rhinolophus luctus TEMMINCK, Monog. des Mamm., 2, 24. Type locality—Tapos, Java. Palawan (Hlera). Recorded by Elera from various islands in the Philippine group. Andersen, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1905), VII, 16, 252, says that he has seen no bats of the luctus style from the Philippines. As this form is found in Borneo, Elera’s record from Palawan seems worth retaining for the present. Rhinolophus rufus Hydoux and Gervais. 1839. Rhinolophus luctus varietas rufa EyDouUxX AND GERVAIS, Voyage autour du Monde, 5, pt. 2, 9. 1870. Aquias eudouxit FITZINGER, Sitz.-ber. Akad. Wien, 61, 194, February. (New name for Rh. luctus rufus EYDOUX AND GERVAIS.) Type locality Manila, Luzon. Luzon (Eydoux and Gervais). Usually placed in the synonymy of FR. luctus. Andersen, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1905), 16, 252, says that it is possibly an earlier name for R. philippinensis, and he has seen no bats of the luctus style from the Philippines. Until more Rhinolephi from Luzon are examined, it seems best to retain it in the list. Rhinolophus hirsutus Andersen. 1905. Rhinolophus hirsutus ANDERSEN, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. VII, 16, 289, September. Type locality—Guimaras Island, P. I. Guimaras (Ander- sen). Rhinolophus arcuatus arcuatus Peters. 1872. Rhinolophus arcuatus PETERS, Monatsb. Kénigl. Preuss. Akad., June, (1871), 305. Type locality—Luzon. Luzon (Andersen). Rhinolophus arcuatus exiguus Andersen. 1905. Rhinolophus arcuatus exiguus ANDERSEN, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VII, 16, 283, September. Type locality. Zamboanga, Mindanao. Guimaras (Ander- sen) ; Mindanao (Andersen). Rhinolophus subrufus Andersen. 1862. Rhinolophus rufus PETERS, Monatsb. Konig]. Preuss. Akad. (1861), 710. (Paracali, Luzon.) Not Rhinolophus luctus varietas rufa EYDOUX AND GERVAIS 1839. 1905. Rhinolophus subrufus ANDERSEN, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VII, 16, 288, September. Type locality—Manila, Luzon. Luzon (Andersen) ; Minda- nao (Andersen) ; Tablas (Matschie). MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 15 Rhinolophus inops Andersen. 1905. Rhinolophus inops ANDERSEN, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VII, 16, 284, September. Type locality—Mount Apo, at Todaya, Mindanao; 1,219 me- ters. Mindanao (Andersen). Family HIPPOSIDERIDA. Genus HIPPOSIDEROS Gray. 1831. Hipposideros GRAY, Zool. Misc., 37. Type.——Vespertilio speoris SCHREBER. Small bats, with well developed tail and ears; resembling Rhinolophus, but toes with two phalanges each and lower molar- premolar series of five teeth, instead of six as in Rhinolophus (third lower premolar absent). Hipposideros antricola (Peters). 1862. Phyllorhina antricola PETERS, Monatsb. Kénigl. Preuss. Akad. (1861), 709. i 1898. Hipposideros antricola MAtTScHIn, Sitz.-ber. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin, No. 5, 39, May. Type locality.—Payracali, Luzon. Luzon, (Matschie). Hipposideros bicolor (Temminck). 1841. Rhinolophus bicolor TEMMINCK, Monog. des Mamm., 2, 18. 1904. Hipposiderus bicolor TROUESSART, Cat. Mamm., Suppl., 72. Type locality—Java, Amboina, and Timor. Luzon (Peters) ; Palawan (Hlera). Hipposideros coronatus (Peters). 1872. Phyllorhina coronata PETERS, Monatsb. Kénigl. Preuss. Akad., June, (1871), 327. 1904. Hipposiderus coronata TROUESSART, Cat. Mamm., Suppl., 72. Type locality Mainit, Mindanao. Mindanao (Peters) ; Pala- wan (Hlera) ; Samar (Elera). Hipposideros diadema griseus (Meyen). 1833. Rhinolophus griseus MEYEN, Nov. Act. Ac. Ces. Leop.-car., 16, pt. 2, 608, pl. 46. 1905. Hipposiderus diadema griseus ANDERSEN, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VII, 16, 497, November. Type localityx—S. Matheo Cave, Luzon [Andersen, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1905), VII, 16, 497]. Catanduanes (An- dersen); Guimaras (Andersen); Leyte (Andersen); Luzon (Andersen) ; Mindanao (Andersen). 16 HOLLISTER. Hipposideros obscurus (Peters). 1862. Phyllorhina obscura PETERS, Monatsb. Konig]. Preuss. Akad. (1861), 709. 1904. Hipposiderus obscura TROUESSART, Cat. Mamm., Suppl., 72. Type locality.—Paracali, Luzon. Dinagat (Giinther) ; Luzon (Peters) ; Mindanao (Elera). Hipposideros pygmzeus Waterhouse. 1843. Rhinolophus pygmzus WATERHOUSE, Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1848), 67. 1904. Hipposiderus pygmzxa TROUESSART, Cat. Mamm., Suppl., 71. Type locality.—Philippine Islands. Luzon (Elera; specimens also in United States National Museum). Genus CHILOPHYLLA Miller. 1910. Chilophylla Miuuer, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 38, 395, August 19. Type.—Chilophylla hirsuta MILLER. A small bat with very large, funnel-shaped ears and unusually long soft fur. Nose-leaf inconspicuous except for the two lap- pets projecting over upper lip. Tail very short. General color light brown. Head and body, 33 millimeters. Only one speci- men known. x Chilophylla hirsuta Miller. : 1910. Chilophylla hirsuta Mititer, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 38, 395, August 19. Type locality—Alag River, opposite mouth of Egbert River, Mindoro. Mindoro (Miller). Family VESPERTILIONIDA. Genus MYOTIS Kaup. 1829. Myotis KauP, Skizzirte Entw.-Gesch. u. Natiirl. Syst. d. Europ. Thierw., 1, 106. Type.—Vespertilio myotis BECHSTEIN. Small bats with simple muzzles and lips. Tail long; ear well developed with slender tragus. Interfemoral membrane large, its surface furred at extreme base below. ‘Teeth, 38. Myotis formosus (Hodgson). 1835. Vespertilio formosa HopGson, Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, 4, 700. 1845. Vespertilio rufo-pictus WATERHOUSE, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, Jan. 14, (1845), 8, April. (Philippine Islands.) 1904. Myotis formosus TROUESSART, Cat. Mamm., Suppl., 91. Type locality.—Central Nipal. Luzon (Elera). MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. ily Myotis macrotarsus (Waterhouse). 1845. Vespertilio macrotarsus WATERHOUSE, Proc. Zool. Soc. London. (1845), 3, April. 1904. Myotis macrotarsus THOMAS, Trans. Zool. Soc. London, 14, pt. 6, 385. Type locality—Philippine Islands. Luzon (Thomas); Min- doro (Elera). Genus PIPISTRELLUS Kaup. 1829. Pipistrellus Kaup, Skizzirte Entwick.-Gesch. u. Natiirl. Syst. d. Europ. Thierw., 1, 98. Type.—Vespertilio pipistrellus SCHREBER. Externally much as in Myotis; ear usually shorter and broader, and tragus less acutely pointed; teeth, 34 (38 in Myotis). Size small; head and body, 40 to 45 millimeters. Pipistrellus imbricatus (Horsfield). 1824. Vespertilio imbricatus HORSFIELD, Zool. Res. in Java (pages not numbered). 1898. Pipistrellus imbricatus THOMAS, Trans. Zool. Soc. London, 14, pt. 6, 385. Type locality—Java. Luzon (Thomas). Pipistrellus irretitus (Cantor). 1842. Vespertilio irretitus CANTOR, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 9, 481. 1845. Vespertilio meyeni WATERHOUSE, Proc. Zool Soc. London, Jan. 14, (1845), 8, April. (Philippine Islands.) Type locality—Chusan Island, China. Luzon (Hlera). Pipistrellus tenuis (Temminck). 1841. Vespertilio tenwis TEMMINCK, Monog. des Mamm., 2, 229. Type locality—Java and Sumatra. (?) Mindanao (Hoffman). Genus TYLONYCTERIS Peters. 1872. Tylonycteris PETERS, Monatsb. Konig]. Preuss. Akad. Wiss., 703. Type.—Vespertilio pachypus TEMMINCK. Very small bats (head and body about 40 millimeters; tail about 25) with head greatly flattened (depth of braincase barely one-half of mastoid width); ears normal, with small tragus; color golden-brown. Tylonycteris pachypus (Temminck). 1841. Vespertilio pachypus TEMMINCK, Monog. de Mamm., 2, 217. 1872. Tylonycteris pachypus PETERS, Monatsb. Kénig]l. Preuss. Akad. Wiss., 704. Type locality—Java and Sumatra. Cebu (Elera); Luzon (Dobson) ; Mindanao (Hoffman) ; Negros (Elera). 104911——2 18 HOLLISTER. Genus SCOTOPHILUS Leach. 1821. Scotophilus LEacH, Trans. Linn. Soc. London, 13, 69. Type.— Scotophilus kuhlit LEACH. Medium-sized bats (single Philippine species with head and body about 75 millimeters; tail about 50) varying in color from olive-brown.to rich chestnut. Ears rather small with long, sharply-pointed tragus. Wing membrane attached to side of foot near base. of toes. Wing and interfemoral membrane en- tirely naked above. Scotophilus temminckii (Horsfield). 1824. Vespertilio temminckii HORSFIELD, Zool. Res. in Java (pages not numbered). 1838. Scotophilus temminckit GRAY, Mag. Zool. and Bot., 2, 497. Type locality.—Java. Luzon (Peters) ; Negros (Elera) ; Pa- nay (Elliot). Genus MINIOPTERUS Bonaparte. 1837. Miniopterus BONAPARTE, Iconagr. della Fauna Italica, 1, fase. XX. Type—Vespertilio ursiniti BONAPARTE=V. schreiberstii KUHL. Tail as long as head and body, wholly contained within the in- terfemoral membrane; ears small; tragus high, slender, slightly curved forward at tip; nostrils simple. Color variable. Head and body 45 to 60 millimeters. Miniopterus australis Tomes. 1858. Miniopterus australis TOMES, Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1858), 125. Type locality— Australia. Luzon (Peters). Miniopterus pusillus Dobson. 1876. Miniopterus pusillus Dopson, Monog. Asiatic Chiropt., 162. Type locality.—India or Philippine Islands. Luzon (Thomas) ; Mindanao (Hoffman). Miniopterus schreibersii (Kuhl). 1819. Vespertilio schreibersit KUHL, Neue Ann. der Gesell. Wetterau., 1, pt. 2, 185. 1840. Miniopterus schreibersii, KEYSERLING AND BLASIUS, Wirbelth. Europ., 45. 1845. Vespertilio eschscholtzii WATERHOUSE, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, Jan 14, (1845), 8, April. (Philippine Islands.) Type locality—Hungary. Luzon (Peters) ; Samar (Sanchez). Miniopterus tibialis (Tomes). 1858. Vesp[ertilio] tibialis Tomes, Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1888), 126. 1878. Miniopterus tibialis Brea Cat. Chiropt. Brit. Mus., 348, in synonymy. Type locality—Amboyna. Luzon (Matschie). MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 19 Miniopterus tristis (Waterhouse). 1845. Vespertilio tristis WATERHOUSE, Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1845), 8, April. 1858. Miniopterus tristis TOMES, Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1858), 124. Type locality—Philippine Islands. Cebu (Elera); Luzon (Peters) ; Samar (Elera). Genus MURINA Gray. 1842. Murina GRAY, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 10, 258, December. Type.—Vespertilio suillus TEMMINCK. . Ears nearly circular; tragus long, tapering to a fine point. Wing membrane attached along the whole length of outer toe to the base of claw, extreme tip of tail free; upper surface of inter- femoral membrane covered with hair. Head and body about 43 millimeters; tail about 37. Murina cyclotis Dobson. 1872. Murina cyclotis DoBson, Proc. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, Dec. (1872), 210. Type locality —Darjeeling, N. E. Bengal. Mindanao (Hoff- man). Genus KERIVOULA Gray. 1842. Kerivoula Gray, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 10, 258, December. Type.——Vespertilio hardwickii HORSFIELD. Small, delicately-formed bats; ears extending slightly beyond nostrils when laid forward, distinctly funnel-shaped, with long slender tragi; muzzle simple. Fur long and soft. Kerivoula hardwickii (Horsfield). 1824. Vespertilio hardwickiit HORSFIELD, Zool. Res. in Java, (pages not numbered). 1842. Kerivoula hardwickii Gray, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 10, 258. Type locality— Java. Mindanao (Thomas) ; Samar (Peters). Kerivoula jagorii (Peters). 1867. Vespertilio (Kerivoula) jagorii PETERS, Monatsb. K6nigl. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin (1866), 399. 1878. Kerivoula jagorii DoBsoNn, Cat. Chiropt. Brit. Mus., 338. Type locality.—Samar Island. Samar (Peters). Kerivoula pellucida (Waterhouse). 1845. Vespertilio pellucidus WATERHOUSE, Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1845), 3, April. 1876. Kerivoula pellucida DoBsoNn, Monogr. Asiatic Chirop., 149. Type localityx—Philippine Islands. Luzon (Elera) ; Mindanao (Elera). i 20 HOLLISTER. Kerivoula whiteheadi Thomas. 1894. Kerivoula whiteheadi THomas, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 14, 460. Type locality—Isabela, N. E. Luzon. Luzon (Thomas). Family MOLOSSIDA. Genus CHAZ:REPHON Dobson. 1874. Cherephon Dopson, Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, 43, pt. 2, 144. Type.—Nyctinomus johorensis DOBSON. Bats with ears connected by a low band across crown; tragus very small; tail long, free from interfemoral membrane about half its length. Upper lip thick, deeply grooved by vertical wrinkles. Wing membrane from the lower end of tibia. Fur short; color dark blackish-brown above, marbled below. Head and body about 75 millimeters. Chzrephon plicatus (Buchannan). 1800. Vespertilio plicatus BUCHANNAN, Trans. Linn. Soc., 5, 261. 1907. Chzrephon plicatus ANDERSEN, Ann. Mus. Civ. di Storia Nat. di Genova, III, 3, 37, April. Type locality.—Puttahaut, Bengal. Philippine Islands (Dob- son) ; Luzon (Elera). Order CARNIVORA. Family MUSTELIDA. Genus MARTES Pinel. 1792. Martes PINEL, Actes Soc. Hist. Nat., Paris, 1, 55, footnote. Type—Martes domestica PINEL=Martes foina (ERXLEBEN). Martens, the single supposed Philippine species about the size of a domestic cat; head and body of male 458 millimeters; tail, 840. Body long and slender; tail long, but less than length of body. Color somewhat variable, but ordinarily with head brown, shoulders lighter, and rump, legs, feet, and tail black; sides of neck and throat yellowish. Martes henricii (Westerman). 1848. Mustela (Martes) henricii WESTERMAN, Bijdragen tot de Dier- kunde, 1, 13. Type locality—Java. Sulu (Trouessart). -Sanchez, Los Mamiferos de Filipinas, does not allow this spe- cies a place in his list on this authority. Possibly it should be dropped from Philippine lists. MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 21 Genus MUSTELA Linnezus. 1758. Mustela Linnasus, Syst. Nat., 10 ed., 1, 45. Type——Mustela erminea LINNSUS. Weasels, the single supposed Philippine species bright tawny, with whitish head. Fur long and coarse, tail bushy. Head and body about 365 millimeters; tail about 220. Mustela nudipes Desmarest. 1822. Mustela nudipes DESMAREST, Mammalogie, pt. 2, 537. Type locality—Java. Calamianes (Trouessart); Palawan (Trouessart) ; Sulu (Trouessart). Sanchez, Los Mamiferos de Filipinas, does not allow this spe- cies a place in his list on this authority. Possibly it should be dropped from Philippine lists. Genus MYDAUS F. Cuvier. 1821. Mydaus F. Cuvier, Hist. Nat. Mamm., 3, livr. 27, April. Type.— Mydaus meliceps F. CUVIER. “Javan skunk.” Black, with more or less white on head, nape, and back. Tail very short. Muzzle pointed, nose pig-like. Front claws very long and little curved. Anal glands emitting an odor like that of the American skunks. Head and body about 460 millimeters. Mydaus marchei Huet. 1887. Mydaus marchei Huet, Le Naturaliste, II, 9 ann., No. 13, 149, September 15. Type locality—Palawan. Balabac (Sanchez); Palawan (Huet). Mydaus schadenbergii Jentink. 1895. Mydaus schadenbergii JENTINK, Notes from Leyden Mus., 17 No. IX, 46, August. Type locality—Calamianes Islands. Calamianes (Jentink). Genus AONYX Lesson. 1827. Aonyx LESSON, Man. Mammalogie, 157. Type—Aonyzx delalandi LEsson=Lutra capensis SCHINZ. “Clawless” otters. Color brown; feet webbed, claws rudimen- tary. Head and body about 470 millimeters, tail about 290. Aonyx cinerea (Illiger). 1815. Lutra cinerea ILLIGER, Abh. Ak. Berlin (1811), 99. 1909. Aonyx cinerea LYON, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 36, 485, June 1. Type localityNear Batavia, Java. Palawan (Allen). 22 HOLLISTER. Family VIVERRIDA. Genus VIVERRA Linnezus. 1758. Viverra LINNA&US, Syst. Nat., 10 ed. 1, 48. Type.—Viverra zibetha LINNAUS. : Civets; the form found in the Philippine Islands with ground color of gray, spotted and striped with black. Tail about half the length of head and body, black and whitish. Head and body about 600 millimeters; tail about 300. Viverra tangalunga Gray. 1832. Viverra tangalunga GRAY, Proc. Zool Soc. London, 63. Type locality.—Indian Archipelago. Calamianes (Bourns & Worcester) ; Luzon (Thomas); Mindanao (Bourns & Worces- ter); Mindoro (Bourns & Worcester); Palawan (Thomas) ; Panay (Bourns & Worcester) ; Siquijor (Bourns & Worcester). Genus PARADOXURUS. F. Cuvier. 1821. Paradoxurus F. Cuvier, Hist. Nat. Mamm., 3, livr. 24, pl. with text (under ‘la marte des palmiers’), January. Type.—Paradoxurus typus F. CUVIER=Viverra niger DESMAREST. Palm civets. Less strikingly marked than Viverra, with long- er tail. General color blackish brown, with five or six indistinct stripes of black along back. Top of head, feet, and tail blackish. Head and body about 440 millimeters; tail about 360. Paradoxurus minax Thomas. 1909. Paradoxurus minax THOMAS, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VIII, 3, 275, April. Type locality—Davao, South Mindanao. Camiguin (Tho- mas) ; Mindanao (Thomas). Paradoxurus philippinensis Jourdan. 1837. Paradoxurus philippinensis JOURDAN, Compt. rend. Acad. Sci. Paris, 5, 523. Type locality —Luzon. Basilan (Bourns & Worcester) ; Ley- te (Elera) ; Luzon (Thomas); Marinduque (Steere) ; Mindoro (Bourns & Worcester) ; Negros (Steere) ; Palawan (Thomas) ; Panay (Bourns & Worcester) ; Siquijor (Sanchez). Paradoxurus torvus Thomas. 1909. Paradoxurus torvus THoMAS, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VIII, 3, 375, April. Type locality. Bongao, Tawi Tawi Group. Bongao (Thomas). MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 93 Genus ARCTICTIS Temminck. 1824. Arctictis TEMMINCK, Prosp. de Monog. des Mamm. [Palmer, Index. Gen. Mamm. (1904), 117.] Type.—Viverra (?) binturong RAFFLES. The binturong. Size large, with tail about as long as head and body. Ears with long tufts of hair. General color black, more or less washed with fulvous. Head and body of Palawan form, 700 millimeters; tail, 710. Arctictis whitei Allen. 1910. Arctitis (sic.) whitei ALLEN, Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 28, 15, January 29. Type locality—Iwahig, Palawan. Palawan (Allen). Genus MUNGOS Geoffroy and Cuvier. 1795. Mungos GEOFFROY AND CUVIER, Mag. Encycl., 2, 184. Type.— Viverra mungos GMELIN. Mongooses. The Philippine species, above yellowish-red, marked with black; head paler and grayer than body; under parts reddish-brown. Head and body, 395 millimeters; tail, 190. Mungos palawanus Allen. 1910. Mungos palawanus ALLEN, Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 28, 17, January 29. Type locality—tIwahig, Palawan. Palawan (Allen). Mungos parvus (Jentink). 1895. Herpestes parvus JENTINK, Notes from Leyden Mus., 17, No. 9, 48, August. Type locality——Calamianes Islands. Calamianes (Jentink). Family FELIDA. Genus FELIS Linnzus. 1758. Felis LINN@uS, Syst. Nat., 10 ed., 1, 41. Type—Felis catus LINNAUS. Cats. Hind feet with only four toes; claws completely re- tractile. Two species wild in Philippines, one native species and the feral domestic cat. The single known native species is about the size of a well-grown domestic cat, but with relatively longer legs. Markings variable; yellowish-gray to yellow, with dark brown markings. ‘Tail long and spotted. 24 HOLLISTER. Felis catus Linnzus. 1758. Felis catus LiINN2uS, Syst. Nat., 10 ed., 1, 42." Type locality—Sweden. Luzon, feral (Thomas). Felis minuta Temminck. 1827. Felis minuta TEMMINCK, Monogr. des Mamm., 1, 130. Type locality—ZJava. Calamianes (Sanchez); Cebu (Tho- mas); Negros (Thomas) ; Palawan (Allen); Panay (Thomas). Order RODENTIA. Family SCIURID. Genus NANNOSCIURUS Trouessart. 1880. Nannosciurus TROUESSART, Le Naturaliste, 2, No. 37, 292, Oc- tober 1. Type.—Sciurus melanotis MULLER AND SCHLEGEL. Very small squirrels; not much larger than mice. Head and body about 115 millimeters, tail vertebrze about 72. General color brownish. Nannosciurus concinnus (Thomas). 1888. Sciurus concinnus THoMAS, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 2, 407. 1893. Nannosciurus concinnus Magor, Proc. Zool. Soe. London, (1893), 189. Type locality—Isabela, Basilan. Basilan (Thomas); Min- danao (Bourns & Worcester). Nannosciurus samaricus Thomas. 1897. Nannosciurus samaricus THOMAS, Minutes Proc. Zool. Soc. Lon- don, for June 15, 1897, June 19. Type locality—Samar. Samar (Thomas). Genus SCIURUS Linnzus. 1758. Sciurus LInNzus, Syst. Nat., 10 ed., 1, 63. Type—Sciurus vulgaris LINNAUS. Squirrels. Philippine species all relatively small. Coloration variable, some plain brownish-gray, not conspicuously marked, others with brilliant tails and bellies. Sciurus albicauda Matschie. 1898. Sciurus albicauda MATSCHIE, Sitz.-ber. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin (1898), No. 5, 42, May. Type locality.—Culion. Culion (Matschie). * For use of the name Felis catus for the domestic cat see Pocock, Proc. Zool Soc. London (1907), 149. MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 25 Sclurus juvencus Thomas. 1908. Sciurus juvencus THOMAS, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VIII, 2, 498, December. Type locality—Palawan. Palawan (Thomas). Sciurus mindanensis Steere. 1890. Sciurus mindanensis STEERE, List Birds and Mamm. Steere. Exp. Philippines, 29, July 14. 1890. Sciurus cagsi M®yER, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 600. (Davao, South Mindanao.) Type locality—Mindanao. Basilan (Bourns & Worcester) ; Mindanao (Steere). Sciurus moéllendorffi Matschie. f 1898. Sciurus méllendorffi MATSCHIE, Sitz.-Ber. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin (1898), No. 5, 41, May. Type locality—Culion. Culion (Matschie). Sciurus philippinensis Waterhouse. ‘ 1839. Sciurus philippinensis WATERHOUSE, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 745 alia Type locality—Mindanao. Balabac (Elera); Basilan (Tho- mas) ; Mindanao (Waterhouse). Sciurus samarensis Steere. 1890. Sciurus samarensis STEERE, List Birds and Mamm. Steere Exp. Philippines, 30, July 14. Type locality—Samar. Leyte (Steere) ; Samar (Steere). Sciurus steerii Gtinther. 1876. Sciurus steerii GUNTHER, Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1876), 735. Type locality. Balabae (Giinther). Family PETAURISTIDA. Genus SCIUROPTERUS F. Cuvier. 1825. Sciuropterus F. Cuvier, Dents Mammiféres, 255. Type.— Sciurus volans LINN2/US=Sciuropterus russicus (TIEDEMANN). Flying-squirrels; fore and hind limbs connected by a mem- brane, forming a parachute. Philippine forms large; fur long and soft; general color brownish above, paler below. Head and body over 300 millimeters; tail over 260. Sciuropterus crinitus Hollister. 1911. Sciuropterus crinitus HOLLISTER, Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash. (1911), 24, 185, June 23. Type locality.—Basilan Island. Basilan (Hollister). 26 HOLLISTER. Sciuropterus nigripes Thomas. 1893. Sciuropterus nigripes THOMAS, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 12, 30, July. Type locality—Puerta Princesa, Palawan. Palawan (Tho- mas). Family MURIDA. Genus CELAZ:ANOMYS Thomas. 1898. Celenomys THomas, Trans. Zool. Soc. London, 14, pt. VI, 390, June. Type.—Xeromys (?) silaceus THOMAS. Size of a common rat. Fur soft and velvety. General color uniform slate-gray. Ears short. Upper and lower cheek teeth two only on each side. Head and body, 195 millimeters; tail, 110; hind foot, 33. Celzenomys silaceus (Thomas). 1895. Xeromys (?) silaceus THOMAS, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 16, 161. 1898. Celeznomys silaceus THOMAS, Trans. Zool. Soc. London, 14, pt. VI, 390, June. Type locality—Highlands of northern Luzon. Luzon (Tho- mas). Genus CRUNOMYS Thomas. 1898. Crunomys THOMAS, Trans. Zool. Soc. London, 14, pt. VI, 398, June. Type.—Crunomys fallax THOMAS. Fur short and close, mixed with flattened spines. General color pale grayish, lined with yellowish on the back; dorsal spines white, black at tips. Ears short. Molars 3/3. Head and body, 105 millimeters; tail, 79; hind foot, 23. Crunomys fallax Thomas. 1897. Crunomys fallax THOMAS, Minutes Proc. Zool. Soc. London for June 15, 1897, June 19, 1897.° Type locality.—Isabella, Luzon. Luzon (Thomas). Crunomys melanius Thomas. 1907. Crunomys melanius THomAS, Abstract Proc. Zool. Soc. London, No. 39, 5. February 12. Type locality—Mount Apo, Mindanao; 914 meters. Minda- nao (Thomas). ® Reference not verified; from Thomas, Trans. Zool. Soc. London (1898), 14, 394, June. Possibly not first described in genus Crunomys, which ap- parently was first diagnosed in June, 1898. MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 27 Genus CHROTOMYS Thomas. 1895. Chrotomys Tuomas, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 16, 161. Type.—Chrotomys whiteheadi THOMAS. About the size of the common rat, with much shorter tail. Back prominently marked with one buff and two blackish stripes, extending from between eyes to rump. Head and body, 196 millimeters; tail, 111; hind foot, 35. Chrotomys whiteheadi Thomas. 1895. Chrotomys whiteheadi THomas, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 16, 161. Type locality—Highlands of northern Luzon. Luzon (Tho- mas). Genus RHYNCHOMYS Thomas. 1895. Rhynchomys THomas, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 16, 160. Type—Rhynchomys soricoides THOMAS. Size of common rat; fur thick, close, and velvety; muzzle greatly elongated; tail shorter than head and body, rat-like, scaly and thinly-haired; general color dark olivaceous-gray, ex- treme tip of tail usually white. Teeth very small; molars 2/2. Rhynchomys soricoides Thomas. 1895. Rhynchomys soricoides THOMAS, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 16, 160. Type locality—Highlands of northern Luzon. Luzon (Tho- mas). Genus PHLCEOMYS Waterhouse. 1839. Phlaeomys WATERHOUSE, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 7,108. Type.— Mus cumingi WATERHOUSE. Size large (head and body about 440 millimeters; tail about 850). Muzzle blunt; ears hairy externally; tail thickly haired. Incisor teeth very broad. Colors black, or black and white. Phlceomys cumingi (Waterhouse). 1839. Mus (Phleomys) cumingi WATERHOUSE, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lon- don, 7, 108. 1843. Phleomys cumingi GRAY, List. Mamm. British Mus., 115. 1895. ? Phleomys albayensis ELERA, Cat. Sist. Fauna Filip., 1, 21. (Nomen nudum.) Type locality—Luzon. Luzon (Waterhouse); Marinduque (Steere) ; Mindoro (Trouessart). Phlceomys pallidus Nehring. 1890. Phleomys pallidus NEHRING, Sitz.-ber. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin, No. 6, 106, June 17. Type lecality Luzon. Luzon (Thomas) ; Marinduque (Tho- mas). 28 HOLLISTER. Genus EPIMYS Trouessart. 1881. Epimys TROUESSART, Bull. Soc. d’Etudes Sci. d’Angers, 10, 117. Type.—Mus rattus LINNAUS. True rats. Size and appearance variable, from small soft- haired mouse-like species to large coarse-furred rats, larger than the Norway rat. Several species have spines, mixed with the fur of the back, in certain pelages. Tail usually little furred, sealy and relatively long. Molars 3/3, slightly graduated in size from first to third. Epimys albigularis (Mearns). 1905. Mus albigularis MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 440. Type locality—Mount Apo, Mindanao; 2,316 meters. Min- danao (Mearns). Epimys calcis Hollister. 1911. Epimys calcis HOLLISTER, Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., 24, 89, May 15, 1911. Type locality.—Limestone Hills, near Lime Kiln, Baguio, Ben- guet, Luzon. Luzon (Hollister). Epimys datae (Meyer). j 1899. Mus datae MryrER, Abhandl. und Berichte des K6nigl. Zool. Mus. Dresden, (1898-99), 7, No. 7, p. 25. Type locality—Mount Data, northern Luzon. Luzon (Me- yer). Epimys ephippium (Jentink). 1880. Mus ephippium JENTINK, Notes from Leyden Mus., 2, 15. 1911. Epimys ephippium LYON, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 40, 98, April 25. Type locality.—Sumatra. Palawan (Trouessart). Epimys everetti (Gtinther). 1879. Mus everetti GUNTHER, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 75. 1910. Epimys everetti MituErR, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 38, 398, August 19. Type localityx—Philippine Islands. Luzon (Trouessart) ; Min- danao (Hlera). Epimys gala Miller. 1910. Epimys gala MiuuER, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 38, 398, August 19. _Type locality——Alag River, Mindoro. Mindoro (Miller). Epimys kelleri (Mearns). 1905. Mus kelleri MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 444. Type locality—Davao, Mindanao. Mindanao (Mearns). MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 29 Epimys luteiventris (Allen). 1910. Mus luteiventris ALLEN, Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 28, 14, January 29. Type locality—tIwahig, Palawan. Palawan (Allen). Epimys luzonicus (Thomas). 1895. Mus luzonicus THomas, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 16, 163. Type locality—Highlands of northern Luzon. Luzon (Tho- mas). Epimys magnirostris (Mearns). 1905. Mus magnirostris MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 441. Type locality—Zamboanga, Mindanao. Mindanao (Mearns). Epimys mindanensis (Mearns). 1905. Mus mindanensis MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 442. Type locality —Todaya, Mount Apo, Mindanao; 1,219 meters. Mindanao (Mearns). Epimys mindorensis (Thomas). 1897. Mus mindorensis THOMAS, Minutes Proc. Zool. Soc. London for June 15, 1897, June 19. Type locality—Mount Dulangan, Mindoro. Mindoro (Tho- mas). Epimys neglectus (Jentink). 1880. Mus neglectus JENTINK, Notes from Leyden Mus., 2, 14 January. 1911. Epimys neglectus LYON, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 40, 98, April 25. Type locality— Borneo. Mindoro (Thomas). . ? Epimys negrinus (Thomas). 1898. Mus ephippium negrinus THOMAS, Trans. Zool. Soc. London, 14, pt. 6, p. 403, June. 1911. Epimys negrinus HOLLISTER, Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., 24, 90, May 15. Type locality—Negros Island; 2,011 meters. Negros (Tho- mas). Epimys norvegicus (Erxleben). 1777. Mus norvegicus ERXLEBEN, Syst. Regn. Anim., Class I, Mamm., 381. 1908. Epimys norwegicus SATUNIN, Mitt. Kaukas. Mus., Tiflis, 4, 59. Type locality—Norway. Luzon (Thomas); Samar (San- chez) ; Masbate (Sanchez) ; Mindoro (Sanchez). Epimys pantarensis (Mearns). 1905. Mus pantarensis MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 448. Type locality—Pantar, Mindanao; 581 meters. Mindanao (Mearns). 30 HOLLISTER. Epimys querceti Hollister. Y 1911. Epimys quercett HOLLISTER, Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., 24, 90, May 15, 1911. Type locality—Haights-in-the-Oaks, Benguet, Luzon. Luzon (Hollister). Epimys rattus (Linnzus). 1758. Mus rattus LINNZUS, Syst. Nat., 10 ed., 1, 61. 1908. Epimys rattus SATUNIN, Mitt. Kaukas. Mus., Tiflis, 4, 60. Type localityk—Upsala, Sweden. Luzon (Sanchez) ; Masbate (Sanchez); Mindoro (Thomas); Negros (Thomas); Samar (Sanchez). Epimys tagulayensis (Mearns). 1905. Mus tagulayensis MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 439. Type locality.—Tagulaya, Gulf of Davao, Mindanao. Minda- nao (Mearns). Epimys todayensis (Mearns). 1905. Mus todayensis MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 445. Type locality—Todaya, Mount Apo, Mindanao; 1,219 meters. Mindanao (Mearns). Epimys tyrannus Miller. 1910. Epimys tyrannus MILLER, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 38, 397, August 19. Type locality.—Ticao Island. Ticao (Miller). Epimys vulcani vulcani (Mearns). 1905. Mus vulcani MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 446. 1911. Epimys vulcani HOuuIsTER, Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., 24, 89, May 15. Type locality—Mount Apo, Mindanao; 2,316 meters. Min- danao (Mearns). Epimys vulcani apicis (Mearns). 1905. Mus vulcani apicis MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 447. Type locality—Summit of Mount Apo, Mindanao; 2,956 me- ters. Mindanao (Mearns). Epimys zamboangz (Mearns). 1905. Mus zamboangz MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 443. Type locality—Zamboanga, Mindanao. Mindanao (Mearns). Genus BULLIMUS Mearns. 1905. Bullimus MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 450. Type— Bullimus bagobus MEARNS. Similar to Epimys; size medium; muzzle long; pelage coarse, containing a mixture of ordinary coarse hair and slender spines MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 81 on upper surface. Color brown above, yellowish-white below. Molars with crowns much higher than in Epimys; mamme, 1-3=8. Regarded by Thomas, Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1907), 141, as a synonym of EHpimys. The peculiar mammary formula and the hypsodont molars seem sufficient characters to warrant its retention as a full genus. Bullimus bagobus Mearns. 1905. Bullimus bagobus MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 450. Type locality——Todaya, Mount Apo, Mindanao. Mindanao (Mearns). Genus LIMNOMYS Mearns. 1905. Limnomys MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 451. Type.— Limnomys sibuanus MEARNS. A small rat with long heavy fur; tail longer than head and body, thinly haired, annulations plainly visible except near end. General color above reddish-brown, below cream buff; upper sur- faces of feet seal brown. Head and body, 125 millimeters; tail, 150; hind foot, 30. Limnomys sibuanus Mearns. 1905. Limnomys sibuanus MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 452. Type locality—Mount Apo, Mindanao; 2,011 meters. Min- danao (Mearns). Genus TRYPHOMYS Miller. 1910. Tryphomys MILLER, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 38, 399, August 19. Type.—Tryphomys adustus MILLER. Size of a small common rat; fur of back coarse and harsh. Outer digits of hind foot short, neither extending beyond bases of three middle digits. Above mixed brown and black, under parts buffy white. Head and body, 174 millimeters; tail, 150; hind foot, 33. Tryphomys adustus Miller. 1910. Tryphomys adustus MILLER, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 38, 399, August 19. Type locality—Haights-in-the-Oaks, Benguet, Luzon. Luzon (Miller). Genus MUS Linnezus. 1758. Mus LINN@&uS, Syst. Nat., 10 ed., 1, 59. Type—Mus mus- culus LINNAEUS. Small mice like the common house mouse. Anterior upper molar longer than the two posterior upper molars combined. 32 HOLLISTER. Mus castaneus Waterhouse. 1848. Mus castaneus WATERHOUSE, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 12, 1384. Type locality—Philippine Islands. Cebu (Elera); Luzon (Elera). Mus corniesariis Mearns. 1905. Mus commissarius MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 449. Type locality Davao, Mindanao. Luzon (Miller) ; Mindanao (Mearns). Elera’s record of Mus musculus doubtless belongs here. It seems strange that Mus musculus should not occur in the Phil- ippine Islands; but all the specimens of true ‘Mus from the Islands, in the collection of the United States National Museum, prove to be Mus commissarius Mearns. Possibly M. commis- sarius=M. castaneus Waterhouse. Genus TARSOMYS Mearns. 1905. Tarsomys MEARNS, Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., 28, 453. Type.— Tarsomys apoensis MEARNS. Resembling Hypimys. Pelage long and rather coarse, some- times slightly spiny. Tail concolor, quite thickly haired; toes tufted at base of claws. General color rich brownish-slate, more yellowish-brown below. Head and body, 135 millimeters; tail, 120; hind foot, 32. Tarsomys apoensis Mearns. 1905. Tarsomys apoensis MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 4538. Type locality—Mount Apo, Mindanao; 2,057 meters. Min- danao (Mearns). Genus BATOMYS Thomas. 1895. Batomys THomas, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 16, 162. Type.—Batomys grantii THOMAS. Large, very heavily furred rats. Ears broad and rounded; tail slightly shorter than head and body. Upper parts dark, rich fulvous brown, below paler. Head and body about 200 millimeters; tail about 185; hind foot, 36. Batomys dentatus Miller. 1910. Batomys dentatus Minter, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 38, 400, August 19. Type locality—Haights-in-the-Oaks, Benguet, Luzon, 2,134 meters. Luzon (Miller). Batomys grantii Thomas. 1895. Batomys grantii THomMAS, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 16, 162. Type locality—Highlands of northern Luzon. Luzon (Tho- mas). MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 83 Genus CARPOMYS Thomas. 1895. Carpomys THomas, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 16, 161. Type.—Carpomys melanurus THOMAS. Externally somewhat similar to Batomys; fur thick and wooly; tail long, well haired, darker in color than body. General color deep fulvous, coarsely lined with black; under parts dull yellow- ish-white. Head and body about 197 millimeters; tail, 175 to 211; hind foot, 31 to 34. Carpomys melanurus Thomas. 1895. Carpomys melanurus THomAS, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 16, 162. Type locality—Highlands of northern Luzon. Luzon (Tho- mas). Carpomys phzeurus Thomas. 1895. Carpomys phzeurus THoMAS, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 16, 162. Type locality—Highlands of northern Luzon. Luzon (Tho- mas). Genus CRATEROMYS Thomas. 1895. Crateromys THOMAS, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 16, 163. Type.—Phleomys schadenbergi MEYER. Size very large; externally somewhat like Phleomys, but with more bushy tail and much smaller claws. Muzzle pointed. Nor- mal color black; some specimens are gray or black and gray. Head and body about 440 millimeters; tail about 425. Crateromys schadenbergi (Meyer). 1895. Phleomys schadenbergi Meyer, Abhandl. und Berichte des Konigl. Zool. Mus. Dresden (1894-95), No. 6, 1. 1896. Crateromys schadenbergi MryER, Abhandl. und Berichte Konig]. Zool. Mus. Dresden (1896-97), No. 6, 32. Type locality—Mount Data, Luzon. Luzon (Meyer). Genus APOMYS Mearns. 1905. Apomys MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 455. Type.— Apomys hylocwtes MEARNS. Smallish brown rats, much like the smaller species of E’pimys. Tail nearly bare of hairs; anterior upper molar about equal in length to posterior two, and posterior upper molar very small, as in Mus. 104911——8 34 HOLLISTER. Apomys bardus Miller. 1910. Apomys bardus MILLER, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 38, 402, August 19. Type locality—Mount Bliss, Mindanao; 1,753 meters. Min- danao (Miller). Apomys hyloccetes Mearns. 1905. Apomys hylocetes MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 456. Type locality—Mount Apo, Mindanao; 1,829 meters. Min- danao (Mearns). Apomys insignis Mearns. 1905. Apomys insignis MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 459, Type locality—Mount Apo, Mindanao; 1,829 meters. Min- danao (Mearns). Apomys major Miller. 1910. Apomys major MILLER, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 38, 402, August 19. Type locality—Haights-in-the-Oaks, Benguet, Luzon; 2,134 meters. Luzon (Miller). Apomys musculus Miller. 1910. Apomys musculus Mituer, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 38, 403, August 19. Type locality—Camp John Hay, Baguio, Benguet, Luzon; 1,524 meters. Luzon (Miller). Apomys petrzcus Mearns. 1905. Apomys petrzus MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 458. Type locality—Mount Apo, Mindanao; 2,316 meters. Min- danao (Mearns). Family HYSTRICIDA. Genus THECURUS Lyon. 1907. Thecurus LYON, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 32, 582, June 29. Type.—Thecurus sumatre LYON. Small porcupines, with short tail (less than one-fourth the length of head and body). Body covered with flattened spines, lower back with long, round quills. Thecurus pumilus (Ginther). 1879. Hystrix pumila GUNTHER, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., V, 4, 106. Type locality—Puerto Princesa, Palawan. Balabac (San- chez) ; Calamianes (Bourns & Worcester) ; Palawan (Giinther). MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 35 Order PHOLIDOTA. Family MANIDA. Genus MANIS Linnezus. 1758. Manis LINN2&US, Syst. Nat., 10 ed., 1, 36. Type—Manis penta- dactyla LINN®US. Pangolins or scaly anteaters. Upper parts of body, and tail above and below, covered with horny scales. Three middle claws long and curved. No teeth. Manis javanica Desmarest. 1822. Manis javanica DESMAREST, Mammalogie 2, 377. Type locality—Java. Culion (Elera); Palawan (Bourns & Worcester). Order PRIMATES. Family LEMURIDA. Genus NYCTICEBUS Geoffroy. 1812. Nycticebus GEOFFROY, Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat., Paris, 19, 163. Type.—Nycticebus bengalensis GEOFFROY—Tardigradus coucang BODDAERT. Slow lemurs. Small nocturnal lorises with no external tail. A white streak between eyes and a dark stripe from head down back. Head and body about 285 millimeters; hind foot, 66. Nycticebus menagensis (Lydekker). 1898. Lemur menagensis LYDEKKER, Zool. Rec. (1892), 29, 25. 1908. Nycticebus philippinus CABRERA, Bol. Real. Soc. Esp. Hist. Nat. 8, No. 3, p. 137, March. (Mindanao ?) 1908. Nycticebus menagensis THomMAS, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VIII, 1, 469, June. Type localityBongao and Tawi Tawi. Bongao (Bourns & Worcester) ; Bohol (Elera) ; Mindanao ? (Cabrera) ; Tawi Tawi (Bourns & Worcester). Should the slow lemur prove to inhabit Mindanao, and the specimens agree with Cabrera’s type of N. philippinus, and dif- fer from the form found in Bongao and Tawi Tawi, both names will stand, though philippinus was proposed chiefly to replace menagensis, which Cabrera supposed to be without standing in nomenclature. 36 . HOLLISTER. Family TARSIIDA. Genus TARSIUS Storr. 1780. Tarsius Storr, Prodr. Meth. Mamm., 33, tab. A. Type.—lLemur tarsius ‘ERXLEBEN’ (=Lemur tarsier ERXLEBEN). Tarsiers. Small monkey-like animais with large eyes and ears, long fingers and toes, and long tail. Tail naked except at extreme base and tip. Head and body about 120 millimeters; tail about 210; hind foot about 60. Tarsius carbonarius Heude. 1899. Tarsius carbonarius HEuDE, Mém. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 4, pt. 4, 164, pl. 33, figs. 1, 2, and 3. Type locality—Gulf of Davao, Mindanao. Mindanao (Heude). Tarsius fraterculus Miller. 1910. Tarsius fraterculus MILLER, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 38, 404, August 19. Type locality—Sevilla, Bohol. Bohol (Miller). Tarsius philippensis Meyer. 1895. Tarsius philippensis MryER, Abhand. und Berichte des Konig]. ‘Zool. Mus. Dresden (1894-95), No. 1, 1. Type locality—Mindanao, Leyte, and Samar. Leyte (Me yer) ; Luzon (Trouessart) ; Mindanao (Meyer) ; Samar (Meyer). Family CHRCOPITHECIDA. Genus PITHECUS Geoffroy and Cuvier. 1795. Pithecus GEOFFROY AND CuVIER, Mag. Encycl., 3, 462. Type. Medium sized monkeys commonly known as macaques. Phil- ippine species with long tails, about as long as head and body. Pithecus cagayanus (Mearns). 1905. Cynomolgus cagayanus MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 481. Type locality—Cagayan Sulu Island, Sulu Sea. Cagayan Sulu (Mearns). “Thomas, Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1911), 125, shows that Simia Lin- nzus is the proper generic name of the Barbary macaque. If this monkey, Simia inuus Linnzus, be congeneric with the Malayan group of long-tailed macaques, lately called Pithecus, as seems very doubtful, the name Simia will stand for all the Philippine species. Without seeing the original publi- cation of Pithecus, I do not feel justified in selecting a type for the genus, which apparently has not yet been done. MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 37 Pithecus mindanensis mindanensis (Mearns). 1905. Cynomolgus mindanensis MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 428. Type locality—Pantar, Mindanao; 579 meters. Basilan (Mearns) ; Mindanao (Mearns). Pithecus mindanensis apoensis (Mearns). 1905. Cynomolgus mindanensis apoensis MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 429. Type locality—Mount Apo, Mindanao; 1,829 meters. Min- danao (Mearns). Pithecus suluensis (Mearns). 1905. Cynomolgus suluensis MEARNS, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 28, 430. Type locality—Crater Lake Mountain, Sulu. Sulu (Mearns). Pithecus syrichta (Linnszus). 1758. Simia syrichta LINN2ZUS, Syst. Nat., 10 ed., 1, 29. 1848. Macacus philippinensis I. Grorrroy, Archive du Mus. d’Hist. Nat., 2, 568, pl. XX XIII, 1841 (1848). (Manila, Luzon.) 1851. Macacus palpebrosus I. GEOFFROY, Cat. des Primates, 938. (Ma- nila, Luzon.) 1867. Macacus fur SLACK, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 19, 36, pl. 1. (Luzon.) 1870. Macacus cynomolgus var. cumingii GRAY, Cat. Monk., Lemurs, and Fruit-eating Bats, 30. (Philippine Islands.) Type locality—Luzon. Leyte (Steere); Luzon (Mearns) ; Mindoro (Thomas); Negros (Steere); Palawan (Steere); Sa- mar (Steere). Genus CYNOPITHECUS I. Geoffroy. 1835. Cynopithecus I. GEOFFROY, in Gervais’ Résumé Lecons de Mam- malogie au Muséum, 16. [Fide Palmer, Index Gen. Mamm., (1904), 212.] Type—Cynopithecus niger (DESMAREST). The black ape of Celebes. Size larger than Pithecus, tail very short; color black. Cynopithecus niger (Desmarest). 1822. Cynocephalus niger DESMAREST, Mammalogie, pt. 2, Suppl., 534. 1840. Cynopithecus niger LESSON, Spéc. des Mamm. Bimanes et Qua- drumanes, 101. Type locality—‘‘Indian Archipelago,” probably Celebes. Ne- gros (Elera); Sulu (EHlera). Probably introduced. Regarded by Sanchez as occurring only as a captive or escaped animal, and not admitted in his list. 38 HOLLISTER. Family HYLOBATIDZ2. Genus HYLOBATES Illiger. 1811. Hylobates InuiceR, Prodr. Syst. Mamm. et Avium, 67. Type.— Simia lar=Homo lar LINNUS. Gibbons. Size large, body and limbs slender, arms especially long, the hands reaching ground when animal walks upright. No tail. Hylobates funereus I. Geoffroy. 1850. Hylobates funereus I. GEOFFROY, Compt. rend. Acad. Sci., 31, 874. Type locahty—Sulu. Sulu (Geoffroy). Regarded by Sanchez as an introduced species, found only in captivity, and not admitted in his list, Los Mamiferos de Fili- pinas, 178. Order ARTIODACTYLA. Family SUIDA. Genus SUS Linnzus. 1758. Sus Linnaus, Syst. Nat., 10 ed., 1, 49. Type—Sus scrofa LINNZUS. Pigs. Size large; snout elongated. Hoofs of middle toes with inner surfaces flattened. Upper incisor teeth present. Sus ahoenobarbus Huet. 1888. Sus ahoenobarbus HUET, Le Naturaliste, II, No. 20, 5, January. Type locality—Palawan. Calamianes (Bourns & Worces- ter) ; Palawan (Huet). Sus barbatus balabacensis Major. 1897. Sus barbatus balabacensis Magor, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 19, 534. Type locality—Balabac Island. Balabac (Major). Sus barbatus palavensis Nehring. , 1889. Sus barbatus var. palavensis NEHRING, Abhandl. und Berichte des K6nigl. Zool. Mus. Dresden (1888-89) 22. Type locality—Puerto Princesa, Palawan. Palawan (Neh- ring). ; Sus calamianensis Heude. 1892. Sus calamianensis HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, 114, pl. XX B, fig. 3. Type locality—Calamianes Islands (Heude, 1. ¢c., p. 221). Culion (Nehring). Sus cebifrons (Heude). 1892. Neosus cebifrons HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, 106. 1897. Sus cebifrons Mason, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 19, 527. Type locality —Masbate (Heude, 1. c., p. 106) or Cebu (Heude, l. c., p. 218). Cebu (Heude) ; Masbate (Heude). MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 39 Sus inconstans Heude. 1892. Sus inconstans HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 2, 67. Type locality—Mindanao. Mindanao (Heude). Sus mindanensis Major. 1897. Sus verrucosus mindanensis Magor, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 19, 524. Type locality—Ayala, Mindanao. Mindanao (Major). : Sus minutus Heude. 1892: Sus minutus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, 114, pl. XXB, fig. 1. Type locality—lLa Laguna to Tarlac, Luzon [see Heude, I. c., (1899), 4, 127]. Luzon (Heude). Sus philippensis Nehring. 1886. Sus philippensis NEHRING, Sitz.-Ber. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin, No. 5, 83, May. 1888. Sus marchet HuET, Le Naturaliste, II, No. 20,6, January. (La- guna Province, Luzon.) 1892. Sus arietinus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, 114, pl. XX, fig. 1. (Manila (?) “Je dois une téte montée du sujet dont le crane a été dessiné 4 M. de la Guardia, de Manille,” 1. c., p. 114). 1892. Sus effrenus HEuDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, 114, pl. XXB, fig. 2. (Jala Jala, Laguna de Bay, Luzon.—Heude, 1. c., p. 215.) 1892. Sus microtis HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, 115, pl. 20B, fig. 6. (Jala Jala, Laguna de Bay, Luzon.—Heude, |. c., p. 216.) 1892. Sus frenatus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, 114, pl. 27, fig. 1, 2, 8, and 7. (Jala Jala, Laguna de Bay, Luzon.— Heude, 1. c., p. 216.) Type locality—Luzon. Basilan (Steere) ; Luzon (Nehring) ; Mindanao (Bourns & Worcester) ; Mindoro (Steere) ; Negros (Bourns & Worcester) ; Panay (Bourns & Worcester) ; Samar (Bourns & Worcester) ; Sibuyan (Bourns & Worcester) ; Sulu (Bourns & Worcester) ; Tawi Tawi (Bourns & Worcester). Family TRAGULIDA. Genus TRAGULUS Brisson. 1762. Tragulus BRISSON, Regn. Anim., 2 ed., 12. Type.—Tragulus indicus BRISSON. Mouse-deer. Pygmy deer-like ruminants without horns; toes provided with hoofs; no upper incisors; upper canines especially developed. Head and body about 575 millimeters. Tragulus nigricans Thomas. 1892. Tragulus nigricans THOMAS, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, 9, 250, March. Type locality—Balabac. Balabac (Thomas). 40 HOLLISTER. Family CHRVIDZ. Genus RUSA Smith. 1827. Rusa H. SMITH, Griffith’s Cuvier, 5,309. Type—Cervus equinus CUVIER. Deer of varying size, from small to large, with rounded ant- lers, only slightly curved, with brown-tine, and beam simple forked at extremity. Females without horns. Rusa alfredi (Sclater). 1870. Cervus alfredt SCLATER, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 381. Type locality—Philippines (received from Manila). Cebu (Elera) ; Guimaras (Sanchez); Leyte (Lydekker); Masbate (Sanchez); Negros (Elera); Panay (EHlera); Samar (Lydek- ker). Rusa culionensis (Hlliot). 1897. Cervus culionensis ELLIOT, Field Mus. Pub. Zool., 1, No. 7 (not paged), June. Type locality——Culion Island. Culion (Elliot). Rusa nigricans (Brooke). 1877. Cervus nigricans BROOKE, Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1877), part 1, 57, June 1. Type locality—Philippines. Basilan (Lydekker). Rusa philippinus (Smith). 1827. Cervus philippinus SMITH, Griffith’s Anim. Kingd., 4, 147. 1850. Rusa philippinus GRAY, Knowsley Menag., 63. Type locality—Philippine Islands, probably Luzon. Luzon (Lydekker). Believed by Lydekker, Deer of All Lands, 158, to be the same as Cervus mariannus Desmarest, 1820, described from Ladrone Islands. Rusa steerii (Hlliot). ‘ 1896. Cervus steerii ELLiot, Field Col. Mus. Pub. Zool., 1, No. 3, 72, May. Type locality—Basilan Island. Basilan (Elliot). [Rusa tavistocki (Lydekker). 1900. Cervus (Rusa) tavistocki LYDEKKER, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., VII, 6, 205. Type locality—Unknown; ‘‘probably Philippines.” Probably synonym of one of the following species described by Heude.] The following forty-one species of deer from the Philippine Islands have been named by P. M. Heude in the Mémoires con- cernant l’Histoire Naturelle de ?Empire Chinois. MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. Al Many of these names are surely synonyms, while a few are probably valid for species or subspecies of Philippine deer. Until series of deer skulls from all parts of the Philippine Islands, and especially from the type localities of all described forms, are assembled for study, it will be impossible satis- factorily to deal with these names. I have arranged them al- phabetically by species, regardless of the genus in which they have been described. As no complete list of these names, with references and type localities, has ever been published, and for general uniformity, the reference to each name is given in full as throughout the list. No attempt has been made to improve on the combination employed by the describer. USSA AMBROSIANUS Heude. 1888. Ussa ambrosianus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 27. Type locality—Nueva Ecija, Luzon. USSA ATHENEENSIS Heude. 1899. Ussa atheneensis HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 4, pt. 8, 188. Type locality—Luzon. USSA BARANDANUS Heude. 1888. Ussa barandanus HEuDE,‘Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 22. Type locality Mindoro. USSA BARYCEROS Heude. 1899. Ussa baryceros HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 4, pt. 8, 139. Type locality—La Laguna and Batangas, Luzon. MELANAXIS BASILANENSIS Heude. 1888. Melanaxis basilanensis HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 49. Type locality Basilan Island. USSA BRACHYCEROS Heude. 1888. Ussa brachyceros HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 36. Type locality.—Batangas, Luzon. MELANAXIS BREVICEPS Heude. 1888. Melanaxis breviceps HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 48. . Type locality—Masbate Island. HYELAPHUS CALAMIANENSIS Heude. 1888. Hyelaphus calamianensis HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 49. Type locality—Calamian, P. I. 42 HOLLISTER. USSA CHRYSOTRICHOS Heude. 1888. Ussa chrysotrichos HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 39. Type locality—lLa Laguna and Batangas, Luzon. USSA CINEREUS Heude. 1899. Ussa cinereus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 4, pt. 8, 140. Type locality.—Cebu Island. USSA CORTEANUS Heude. 1888. Ussa corteanus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 37. Type locality—Mariveles, Luzon. USSA CRASSICORNIS Heude. 1888. Ussa crassicornis HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 23. Type locality.—Cebu. USSA DAILLIARDIANUS Heude. 1888. Ussa dailliardianus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 32. Type locality—ZJala-Jala, Laguna, Luzon. MELANAXIS (?) ELEGANS Heude. 1888. Melanaxis (?) elegans, HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 49. Type locality.—Philippine Islands. USSA ELORZANUS Heude. 1888. Ussa elorzanus HrEuDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 28. Type locality.—Bataan Province, Luzon. USSA FRANCIANUS Heude. 1888. Ussa francianus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 24. Type locality— Mati, Mindanao. USSA GARCIANUS Heude. 1888. Ussa garcianus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 29. Type locality —Nueva Ecija, Luzon. USSA GONZALINUS Heude. 1888. Ussa gonzalinus HrEuDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 35. Type locality—Philippines, probably Luzon. USSA GORRICHANUS Heude. 1888. Ussa gorrichanus HruDE, Mem. Hist’ Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 21. Type locality Batangas, Luzon. MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 43 USSA GUEVARANUS Heude. 1888. Ussa guevaranus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 40. Type locality—Mariquina, Luzon. USSA GUIDOTEANUS Heude. 1888. Ussa guidoteanus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 29. Type locality—Batangas, Luzon. USSA HIPOLITIANUS Heude. 1888. Ussa hipolitianus HrupE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 39. Type locality—tLa Laguna and Batangas, Luzon. UssA LONGICUSPIS Heude. 1888. Ussa longicuspis HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 34. Type locality—Philippines, probably Luzon. USSA MACARIANUS Heude. 1888. Ussa macarianus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 28. Type locality—Nueva Ecija, Luzon. USSA MARAISIANUS Heude. 1888. Ussa maraisianus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, Tas Uy Gil, Type locality—Jala-Jala, Laguna de Bay, Luzon. USSA MARZANINUS Heude. 1888. Ussa marzaninus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 33. Type locality—Nueva Ecija and La Laguna, Luzon. MELANAXIS MASBATENSIS Heude. 1888. Melanaxis masbatensis HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 47. Type locality.—Masbate Island. USSA MICHAELINUS Heude. 1899. Ussa michaelinus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 4, pt. 3, 135. Type locality—San Miguel de Murcia, Tarlac, Luzon. USSA MICRODONTUS Heude. 1888. Ussa microdontus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 34. Type locality Batangas, Luzon. USSA NUBLANUS Heude. 1888. Ussa nublanus HEuDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 124: Type locality—La Laguna, Luzon. 44 HOLLISTER. USSA RAMOSIANUS Heude. 1888. Ussa ramosianus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 26. Type locality—Nueva Ecija, Luzon. USSA ROSARIANUS Heude. 1888. Ussa rosarianus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 30. Type locality—Nueva Ecija, Luzon. USSA ROXASIANUS Heude. 1888. Ussa roxasianus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 33. Type locality—Batangas, Luzon. USSA RUBIGINOSUS Heude. 1888. Ussa rubiginosus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 38. Type locality—Bataan and Nueva Ecija, Luzon. SIKELAPHUS SOLOENSIS Heude. 12894. Sikelaphus soloensis HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 3, 147. Type locality—Sulu. USSA SPATHARIUS Heude. 1888. Ussa spatharius HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 25. Type locality —La Laguna, Luzon. USSA TELESFORIANUS Heude. 1888. Ussa telesforianus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 36. Type locality—Batangas (?), Luzon. USSA TUASONINUS Heude. 1888. Ussa tuasoninus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, pt. 1, 25. Type locality — Batangas, Luzon. USSA VERZOSANUS Heude. 1888. Ussa verzosanus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, y pt. 1, 37. Type locality—Nueva Ecija, Luzon [Heude, 1. c. (1899), 4, pt. 3, 134]. USSA VIDALINUS Heude. 1899. Ussa vidalinus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 4, pt. 8, 136. Type locality—San Miguel de Murcia, Tarlac, Luzon. USSA VILLEMERIANUS Heude. 1899. Ussa villemerianus HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 4, pt. 8, 136. Type locality—San Miguel de Murcia, Tarlac, Luzon. °*Heude here gives an earlier reference for this name in “Catal. des Cerfs tachetés, 1885’; but this has not been seen by me. MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. A5 Family BOVIDA. Genus BUBALUS Smith, 1827. Bubalus H. SmitH, Griffith’s Cuvier, 5, 371. Type—Bos bubalus SmitH=Bos bubalis LINNZUS. Large buffaloes (carabao and tamarao) ; both sexes with hol- low horns. Bubalus bubalis (Linnzus). 1758. Bos bubalis LINNZuS, Syst. nat., 10 ed., 1, 72. 1894. Bubalus kerabau ferus NEHRING, Sitz.-Ber. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin, No. 8, 187, October 16. (Luzon.) Type locality—Rome, Italy (introduced from southern Asia). Luzon (Worcester) ; Masbate (Worcester) ; Mindoro (Worces- ter) ; Negros (Worcester). Bubalus mainitensis Heude. 1888. Bubalus mainitensis HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, 205. Type locality Lake Mainit, Mindanao (domesticated). Min- danao (Heude). Bubalus mindorensis Heude. 1888. Bubalus mindorensis HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 2, 50, August. 1888. Anoa mindorensis STEERE, in SCLATER, Nature, 38, 364, August, 16. 1888. Probubalus mindorensis STEERE, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 415, November 20. Type locality—Mindoro. Mindoro (Heude). Bubalus moellendorffi Nehring. 1894. Bubalus moellendorffi NEHRING, Sitz.-Ber. Ges. Nat. Freunde zu Berlin, No. 8, 185, October 16. Type locality—Busuanga Island, Calamianes. Busuanga (Nehring) ; Culion (Trouessart). Order SIRENIA. Family DUGONGIDA. Genus DUGONG Lacépéde. 1799. Dugong LACEPEDE, Tabl. Mamm., 17. Type—Dugong indicus= Trichecus dugon MULLER. Large marine mammals (adults about 2.5 meters long) ; no posterior limbs; no nails on fore limbs; tail flattened and hori- zontally expanded. 46 HOLLISTER. Dugong dugon Miller. 1776. Trichecus dugon MULLER, Natursyst., Suppl. und Reg., 21. Type locality—Cape of Good Hope to Philippine Islands, and further east toward the south pole and Straits of Magellan. Mindanao (Elera). SPECIES ERRONEOUSLY CREDITED TO THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS BY ELERA. In his Catalogo Sistematico de Toda la Fauna de Filipinas, Casto de Elera records from definite islands many species of mammals which simply do not and never have occurred there. These records are probably based on misidentified specimens, as nearly all are listed as represented in the collection of the Colegio-Universidad de Santo Tomas de Manila. Some of them obviously represent species since described from the Philippines, which he had confounded with Indian or Chinese forms and are thus accounted for in the present list. The records which I have ignored as quite impossible, or too improbable for serious consideration without better evidence, are listed below. Douhbt- less a few of these species, or their local representatives, espe- cially certain of the bats, will eventually prove to inhabit the Islands. CHIROPTERA. Phyllorhina larvata (Hipposideros) Luzon. Vesperugo noctula (Nyctalus) Luzon. Vesperugo maurus (Pipistrellus) Luzon. Vesperugo abramus (Pipistrellus) Luzon. Vesperugo tylopus (Glischropus) Palawan. Vespertilio chinensis (Myotis) Luzon. Vespertilio capaccini (Myotis) Luzon. Vespertilio muricola (Myotis) Sulu. CARNIVORA. Viverra zibetha Negros; Palawan; Panay. Viverricula malacensis Cagayan; Luzon. RODENTIA. Pteromys petaurista, Pt. philippensis, and Pt. innornatus (Petaurista) Palawan. Funambulus vittatus (Sciurus) Samar. Bandicota gigantea (Nesokia) Luzon. PRIMATES. Semnopithecus albipes (Presbytis) Sulu. Macacus speciosus (Pithecus) Sulu. Macacus nemestrinus (Pithecus) Luzon. MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. AT TYPE-LOCALITIES OF MAMMALS IN THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. Balabac. Squirrel; Sciurus steerii. Pig; Sus barbatus balabacensis. Mouse-deer; Tragulus nigricans. Basilan. Flying-squirrel; Sciwropterus crinitus. Deer; Rusa steerit. ISABELA. Pygmy Squirrel; Nannosciurus concinnus. Deer; Melanaxis basilanensis=Rusa (?). Bohol. SEVILLA. Tarsier; Tarsius fraterculus. Bongao. Palm civet; Paradoxurus torvus. Slow Lemur; Nycticebus menagensis (Bongao and Tawi-Tawi). Busuanga. Buffalo; Bubalus moellendor ffi. Cagayan Sulu. Fruit-bat; Pteropus cagayanus. Monkey; Pithecus cagayanus. Calamianes. Badger-skunk; Mydaus schadenbergii. Mongoose; Mungos parvus. Pig; Sus calamianensis. Deer; Hyelaphus calamianensis=Rusa (7). Cebu. Pig; Sus cebifrons (Masbate or Cebu). Deer; Ussa cinerus, and U. crassicornis=Rusa. Culion. Tree-shrew; Tupaia méllendorff. Squirrels; Sciurus albicaudus and S. méllendorffi. Deer; Rusa culionensis. Cuyo. Tree-shrew; Tupaia cuyonis. Guimaras. Bat; Rhinolophus hirsutus. Leyte. Fruit-bat; Pteropus aurinuchalis=Acerodon jubatus. Tarsier; Tarsius philippensis (Mindanao, Leyte, and Samar). Luzon. Shrew; Pachyura luzoniensis. Bats; Pteropus chinensis=Pt. leucopterus, Rhinolophus ander- seni (?), Rh. philippinensis, and Rh. arcuatus. Palm civet; Paradoxurus philippinensis. Rats, etc.; Phloeomys cumingi and Ph. pallidus. Monkey; Maccacus fur—Pithecus syrichta, and Pithecus syrichta. Pig; Sus philippensis. Deer; Rusa philippinus, Ussa atheneensis, and U. gonzalinus—Rusa. BAGUIO, BENGUET. Rat; Hpimys calcis. BATAAN PROVINCE. Deer; Ussa elorzanus and U. rubiginosa—Rusa. BATANGAS. Deer; Ussa baryceros, U. brachyceros, U. chrysotrichos, U. gorrichanus, U. guidoteanus, U. hipolitianus, U. microdontus, U. roxasianus, U. telesforianus, and U. tuasoninus=Rusa. Camp JOHN Hay, BENGUET. Rat; Apomys musculus. 48 HOLLISTER. Luzon—Continued. DaraGAa, ALBAY. Bat; Ptenochirus jagorii. HAIGHTS-IN-THE-OAKS, BENGUET. Rats; Epimys querceti, Tryphomys adustus, Batomys dentatus, and Apomys major. HIGHLANDS OF NORTHERN LUZON. Rats, etc.; Celenomys silaceus, Chrotomys whiteheadi, Rhyn- chomys soricoides, Epimys luzon- icus, Batomys granti, Carpomys melanurus, and C. phzurus. ISABELA. Bat; Kerivoula whiteheadi. Rats, etc.; Crunomys fallax. JALA JALA. Pigs; Sus microtis and S. frenatus. Deer; Ussa dailliardianus and U. marisianus=Rusa. La Lacuna. Pig; Sus marche. Deer; Ussa baryceros, U. chrysotrichos, U. hipolitianus, U. marzaninus, U. nublanus, and U. spatharius=Rusa. La LAGUNA and TaRLAc. Pig; Sus minutus. MANILA. Flying lemur; Galeopithecus philippinensis=Cynocephalus volans. Bats; Hleutherura philippinensis=Rousetius amplexicau- datus, Pteropus pyrrhocephalus=Acerodon jubatus, Ace- rodon jubatus, Vespertilio alecto=—Emballonura monticola, Rhinolophus rufus, and Rh. subrufus. Monkeys; Macacus philippinensis=Pithecus syrichta and Macacus palpebrosus=P. syrichta. Pig; Sus arietinus (7). MARIQUINA. Deer; Ussa guevaranus=Rusa. MARIVELES. Deer; Ussa corteanus=Rusa. Mount Data. Rats, etc.; Hpimys datae and Crateromys schadenbergi. NuEvA Ecigsa. Deer; Ussa ambrosianus, U. garcianus, U. macarianus, U. marzaninus, U. ramosianus, U. rosarianus, U. rubiginosus, and U. verzosanus=Rusa. PAMPANGA. Flying lemur; Cynocephalus volans. PARACALI. Bats; Emballonura discolor=E. monticola, Rhinolophus rufus=R. subrufus, Hipposideros antricola, and H. obscurus. SAN MIGUEL DE MurcIA, TARLAC. Deer; Ussa michaelinus, U. vida- linus, and U. villemerianus= Rusa. SouTH CAMARINES. Bat; Rhinolophus virgo. S. MATHEO CAVE. Bat; Hipposideros diadema griseus. VOLCANO YRIGA, CAMARINES. Bat; Cynopterus luzoniensis. MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 49 Malanipa. Fruit bat; Pteropus speciosus. Masbate. Pig; Sus cebifrons (Masbate or Cebu). Deer; Melanaxis breviceps and M. masbatensis=Rusa (7). Mindanao. Fruit bat; Acerodon jubatus mindanensis. Squirrels; Sciurus mindanensis and S. philippensis. Slow lemur; Nycticebus philippinus=N. menagensis. Tarsier; Tarsius philippensis (Mindanao, Leyte, and Samar). Pigs; Sus incostans. ALAYA. Pig; Sus mindanensis. Davao. Palm civet; Paradoxurus minax. Squirrel; Sciurus cagsi=S. mindanensis. Rats and mice; Hpimys kellert and Mus commissarius. Tarsier; Tarsius carbonarius. GRAND MALINDANG MOUNTAIN. Shrew; Crocidura grandis. LAKE MAINIT. Buffalo; Bubalus mainitensis. Bat; Hipposideros coronatus. Mati. Deer; Ussa francianus=Rusa. MERCEDES. Bat; Taphozous pluto. Mount Apo. Woodshrew; Podogymnura truet. Tree shrew; Urogale cylindrura. Bat; Rhinolophus inops. Rats, etc.; Crunomys fallax, Epimys albigularis, LE. mindanensis, EH. todayensis, E. vulcani, EH. v. apicis, Bullimus bagobus, Limnomys sibuanus, Tarsomys apoensis, Apomys hylocxetes, A. insignis, and A. petreus. Monkey; Pithecus mindanensis apoensis. Mount Buss. Shrew; Crocidura beatus. Rat; Apomys bardus. PANTAR. Fruit bat; Pteropus vampyrus lanensis. Rat; Epimys pantarensis. Monkey; Pithecus mindanensis. TAGULAYA. Rat; Hpimys tagulayensis. ZAMBOANGA. Tree shrew; Urogale everetti. Bat; Rhinolophus arcuatus exiguus. Rats; Hpimys magnirostris and EL. zamboangz. Mindoro. Bat; Harpyionycteris whiteheadi. Deer; Ussa barandanus=Rusa. Buffalo; Bubalus mindorensis. AwaG River. Bat; Chilophylla hirsuta. Rat; Hpimys gala. Mount DULANGAN. Rat; Epimys mindorensis. Mount Hatcon. Shrews; Crocidura halconus and C. mindorus. 104911—-4 50 HOLLISTER. Negros. Rat; Hpimys negrinus. Palawan. Tree shrew; Tupala ferruginea palawanensis. Badger-skunk; Mydaus marchei. ' Squirrel; Sciurus juvencus. Pig; Sus ahoenobarbus. IwaHic. Bear-cat; Arctictis whitei. Mongoose; Mungos palawanus. Rat; Hpimys luteiventris. PUERTO PRINCESA. Flying squirrel; Sciuropterus nigripes. Porcupine; Thecurus pumilus. Pig; Sus barbatus palavensis. Palmas. Fruit bat; Pteropus pumilus. Panay. CONCEPCION. Fruit bat; Acerodon lucifer. Philippine Islands. Shrews; Crocidura grayi. Bats; Cynopterus philippensis=C. luzoniensis, C. cu- mingui=C. luzoniensis, Pteropus leucopterus, Tapho- zous philippinensis, Megaderma philippinensis=M. spasma, Hipposideros pygmzxus, Vespertilio rufo- pictus=Myotis formosus, Myotis macrotarsus, Ves- pertilio meyeni=Pipistrellus irretitus, Vespertilio eschscholitzii=Miniopterus schreibersii, Miniopterus tristis, and Kerivoula pellucida. Rats and mice; Hpimys everetti and Mus castaneus. Monkey; Macacus cynomolgus cumingiti=Pithecus syr- ichta. Deer; Rusa alfredi, Rusa nigricans, Melanaxis (2), elegans, and Ussa longicuspis—Rusa. Samar. Bats; Kerivoula jagorii. Squirrels; Nannosciurus samaricus and Sciurus samariensis. Tarsier; Tarsius philippensis (Mindanao, Leyte, and Samar). Sulu. Shrew; Pachyura edwardsiana. Gibbon; Hylobates funereus. Deer; Sikelaphus soloensis—Rusa. CRATER LAKE MOUNTAIN. Monkey; Pithecus suluensis. Tawi Tawi. Slow lemur; Nycticebus menagensis (Tawi Tawi and Bongao). Ticao. Rat; Hpimys tyrannus. NOTE TO SPORTSMEN AND TRAVELERS ON THE PRESERVATION OF SPECIMENS. The average traveler little realizes what he may do for zo- ology. It is in the power of sportsmen, especially, to enrich museum collections, at little trouble to themselves, with the many valuable specimens which come into their hands, and for which they have no personal use. The skins and skulls of all animals killed should be carefully preserved and deposited, with full data, MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 51 in some institution of standing; it will surprise the average sportsman to find how gladly they are received and what scien- tific interest is attached to material he assumes to be worthless. The making of study skins of small mammals is really a very simple process and one of considerable interest; and the pleasures to be realized from trapping add greatly to a traveler’s expe- riences. A small pamphlet issued by the United States National Museum gives instructions for preparing specimens of mammals in the most approved styles for scientific study. To the sports- man, the greatest interest naturally lies in the medium sized and larger mammals, the skins of which, when intended chiefly for study, are easily prepared. A primary incision should be made from the breast to the tip of the tail, and other incisions from the sole of each foot up the leg to the main longitudinal cut. In horned mammals, an additional cut from the base of the head to between the horns, branching in a Y to around each horn is necessary; the skull in these being removed through this opening. The skin is then removed entire, special care being taken to skin out the feet, tail, ears, and lips. The skin should then be well salted, the salt rubbed in on the most fleshy parts and around the edges. It is a good plan to separate the skin of the ear from the cartilage and force salt to the tip, salting the feet well also. The skin may then be rolled up for a few hours, as over night, and afterward spread out in the shade to drain and dry. As the drying process advances, the skin may be folded, before too dry, into a convenient bundle for transporta- tion. The skull, which should always accompany the skin, may be disjointed from the vertebre, care being taken not to cut or otherwise injure its base. The flesh should be roughly cut off, the brain removed through the natural opening at back of skull with a folded and bent wire, and the skull dried in the sun or near a fire. The skin and skull of the same individual should always be tagged with the same number so that there wil] be no uncertainty as to what skull belongs with a particular skin when the specimens reach the museum. Even when it is not possible to save the skin, or when it is desired for other purposes, the skull of a medium sized or large mammal should always be saved. Large series of skulls from all localities are greatly desired for study and comparison. Where the sportsman wishes to retain the horns they may be sawed off, either alone or with a portion of the bone of the frontal region, and the specimen will still be of great service to the specialist, to whom the teeth and lower surface of the skull are more important than the horns. When this is done a pho- 52 HOLLISTER. tograph of the skull before the horns are removed should be taken, to accompany the specimen. Weathered skulls, partic- ularly when the full set of teeth is present, are often of great value when their exact locality is known. Specimens should be labeled with the exact locality where the animal was killed, the date, sex, and the collector’s name. The length of the animal before skinning, from nose to root of tail, the length of the tail vertebre, and length of hind foot are valu- able measurements and should be taken if the time and con- veniences are available. Bats are always important and may be preserved entire in spirits, or in a weak solution of formalin; a small incision in the belly will allow the fluid to enter the cavity and aid in pres- ervation. Alcohol and formalin must not be used at their full strength. Add to commercial alcohol (95 per cent) one-fifth its volume of water. Add to commercial formalin 15 times its volume of water. BIBLIOGRAPHY. ALLEN, J. A. Mammals from Palawan Island, Philippine Islands. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. (1910), 28, 13-17, January 29. Original descriptions of Epimys luteiventris, Arctictis whitei and Mungos palawanus. ANDERSEN, KNupD. On the Bats of the Rhinolophus philippinensis Group, with Descriptions of Five new Species. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1905), VII, 16, 248-257, August. Synopsis of the Rhinolophus philippinensis Group. IDEM. On the Bats of the Rhinolophus arcuatus Group, with Descriptions of Five new Forms. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1905), VII, 16, 281-288, September. Original descriptions of Rhinolophus subrufus, R. inops and R. ar- cuatus exiguus. IpEM. On the Bats of the Rhinolophus macrotis Group, with Descriptions of Two New Forms. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1905), VII, 16, 289-292, September. Original description of Rhinolophus hirsutus. IpEM. On some Bats of the Genus Rhinolophus, with Remarks on their Mutual Affinities, and Descriptions of Twenty-six New Forms. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, May 16, (1905), 75-145, pls. 3 and 4, October, 1905. Original description of Rhinolophus virgo. IpEM. On Hipposiderus diadema and its Closest Allies. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1905), VII, 16, 497-507, November. Synopsis of the H. diadema group. Revives the name H. d. griseus ' for the Philippine form. IpEM. A list of the Species and Subspecies of the Genus Rhinolophus, with some Notes on their Geographical Distribution. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1905), VII, 16, 648-662, December. Review of the entire genus. MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 53 IpEM. On Pterocyon, Rousettus, and Myonycteris. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1907), VII, 19, 501-515, June. Monographie revision of Rousettus. IpEM. Twenty new Forms of Pteropus. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1908), VIII, 2, 361-370, October. Original description of Pteropus speciosus. IpEM. Notes on the Genus Acerodon, with a Synopsis of its Species and Subspecies, and Descriptions of Four new Forms. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1909), VIII, 3, 21-29, January. Original description of Acerodon jubatus mindanensis. IpeM. On the Characters and Affinities of “Desmalopex” and Pteralopex. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1909), VIII, 3, 218-222, February. Considers Desmalopex a synonym of Pteropus and notes the prob- ability that the type of Gray’s Pteropus chinensis came from Luzon. IpEM. On the Fruit-Bats of the Genus Dobsonia. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1909), VIII, 4, 528-533, December. Synopsis of the forms of Hypodermis. IpEM. Six new Fruit-Bats of the Genera Macroglossus and Syconycteris. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1911), VIII, 7, 641-6438, June. Review of forms of Macroglossus. ANDERSEN, KNuUD, and WROUGHTON, R. C. On the Bats of the Family Megadermatidz. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1907), VII, 19, 129-145, February. Monograph of the genus Megaderma and other bats of the family. BALFOUR, EDWARD. Cyclopedia of India and of Eastern and Southern Asia, Commercial, Industrial, and Scientific. Madras, 2 ed. (1871-1878), 1-5. Many notes on Philippine mammals. Buasius, J. H. Beschreibung zweier neuer Deutscher Fledermausarten. Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte (1853), 35-57. Original description of Vesperugo maurus. BOoURNS, FRANK S., and WorcESTER, DEAN C. Preliminary Notes on the Birds and Mammals Collected by the Menage Scientific Expedition to the Philippine Islands. Occ. Papers, Minnesota Acad. Nat. Sci. (1894), 1, 1-64, December. List of species collected, with localities. BROOKE, Sir Victor. On the Deer of the Philippine Islands, with the De- scription of a New Species. Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1877), 51-60, pls. 8-10, June 1. Original description of Rusa nigricans. _ BUCHANAN, FRANcIs. Description of the Vespertilio plicatus. Trans. Linn. Soc. (1800), 5, 261-268, pl. 13. Original description of Cherephon plicatus. CABRERA, ANGEL. Sobre los Loris, y en Especial sobre la Forma Filipina. Bol. Real Soc. Espanola Hist. Nat. (1908), 8, 185-1389, March. Proposes name Nycticebus philipinus for the Philippine slow lemur, virtually renaming N. menagensis Lydekker, but designating a type specimen doubtfully from Mindanao. 5A HOLLISTER. IpEM. Un nuevo “Rhinolophus” filipino. Bol. Real Soc. Espanola Hist. Nat. (1909), 9, 304-806, June. Original description of Rhinolophus anderseni. CANTOR, THEODORE. General Features of Chusan, with remarks on the Flora and Fauna of that Island. Animals Observed at Chusan. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1842), 9, 481-493. Original description of Pipistrellus irretitus. Cuvier, F. Des dents des Mammiféres, Considérées comme Charactéres Zoologiques (1825), I-LV, 1-259. Original diagnosis of the genus Sciuropterus. DESMAREST, A. G. Mammalogie ou Description des Espéces de Mammiferes. Seconde partie. Paris (1822). Original descriptions of Manis javanica, Mustela nudipes, and Cyno- pithecus niger. Dogsson, G. E. Notes on some Bats collected by Captain W. G. Murray, in the Northwestern Himalaya, with Description of New Species. Proc. Asiatic Soc. Bengal (1872), 208-210. December. Original description of Murina cyclotis. IpEM. Descriptions of New or Little-known Species of Bats of the Genus Vesperugo. Proc. Zool Soc. London (1875), 470-474. June 15. Original description of Vesperugo tylopus. IpEM. Monograph of the Asiatic Chiroptera, and Catalogue of the Species of Bats in the Collection of the Indian Museum, Calcutta. London (1876). Original description of Miniopterus pusillus. IpEM. Descriptions of New Species of Crocidura. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1890), VI, 6, 494-497. Original description of Crocidura grayi. ELERA, CASTO DE. Catalogo Sistematico de Toda la Fauna de Filipinas Conocida hasta el Presente, y 4 la Vez el de la Coleccién Zoologica del Museo de P. P. Dominicos del Colegio-Universidad de Santo Tomas de Manila, Escrito con motivo de la Exposicién Regional Filipina. I, Ver- tibrados, 1-51, and 628, Mammiferos. Manila (1895). List of mammals in Santo Tomas Museum, with Philippine records; many of them questionable, and some glaringly erroneous. Several new names, but all of them nomina nuda or synonyms without descrip- tion other than references. EuioT, D. G. On Sundry Collections of Mammals. Field Col. Mus. Publ. Zool. (1896), 1, 67-82, May. Original descriptions of Acerodon lucifer, Pieropus aurinuchalis, and Rusa steerii. IpEM. Remarks upon Two Species of Deer of the Genus Cervus from the Philippine Archipelago. Field Col. Mus. Publ. Zool. (1897), (not paged), June. Names Cervus culionensis from Culion Island, based on a former description, May, 1896. MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 55 IpEM. Descriptions of Apparently New Species and Subspecies of Monkeys of the Genera Callicebus, Lagothrix, Papio, Pithecus, Cercopithecus, Erythrocebus, and Presbytis. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1909), VIII, 4, 244-274, September. Revives generic name Pithecus to replace Macaca. ELLIOT, WALTER. A Catalogue of the Species of Mammalia found in the Southern Mahratta Country; with their Synonyms in the Native Languages in use there. Madras Journ. Lit. and Sci. (18389), 10, 207-233, October. Original description of Pteromys philippensis, which proves to be not a Philippine animal. ERXLEBEN, J. C. P. Systema Regni Animalis. Classis I, Mammalia. Lip- siae (1777). Original description of Epimys norvegicus. ESCHSCHOLTZ, FRIEDR. Zoologischer Atlas, enthaltend Abbildungen und Beschreibungen Neuer Thierarten, wahrend des Flottencapitaéns von Kotzebue Zweiter Reise um die Welt, auf der Russisch-Kaiserlichen Kriegsschaluppe Predpriaetré in den Jahren 1823-1826. Berlin (1831), 1-19. Original description of Acerodon jubatus. EverRETT, A. H. Remarks on the Zoo-Geographical Relationships of the Island of Palawan and Some Adjacent Islands. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lon- don (1889), 220-228, map. List of mammals common to Borneo and Palawan. IpEM. A nominal List of the Mammals inhabiting the Bornean Group of Islands. Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1898), 492-496. Scattering notes on mammals of Palawan group. Eypoux, FORTUNE, and GERVAIS, PauL. Zoologie. Voyage autour du Monde par les Mers de l’Inde et de Chine exécuté sur la corvette de l’Etat la Favorite pendant les années 1830, 1831, et 1832, sous le commandement de M. Laplace captaine de Frégate. Paris (18389). Original description of Rhinolophus luctus var. rufa and Vespertilio (Nycticeus) alecto. GEOFFROY SAINT-HILAIRE, E. Description des Roussettes et des Céphalotes, deux nouveaux genres de la Famille des Chauve-souris. Ann. du Mus. d'Hist. Nat. (1810), 15, 86-108, pl. 4-7. Original descriptions of Rousettus amplexicaudatus, P. marginatus, and Hypodermis peronit. IpEM. Sur un Genre de Chauve-souris, sous le Nom de Rhinolophes. Ann. du Mus. d’Hist. Nat. (1818), 20, 254-266, pl. 5-6. Original description of Rhinolophus diadema. GEOFFROY SAINT-HILAIRE, ISIDORE. Description des Mammiféres nouveaux ou imparfaitement connus de la Collection du Musée d’Histoire Natu- relle, et Remarques sur la Classification et les Caractéres des Mam- miféres. Premier Mémoire. Famille des Singes. Archive du Musée dHist. Nat. 1841 (1848), 2, 485-592, pl. 29-34. Original description of Macacus philippinensis. 56 HOLLISTER. IpEM. Notes sur Plusieurs Espéces Nouvelles de Mammiféres, de l’Ordre des Primates. Compt. rend. Acad. Sci. (1850), 31, 878-876. Original description of Hylobates funereus. IpEM. Catalogue de la Collection des Mammiféres, de la Collection des Oiseaux et des Collections annexes. Premiére Partie-——Mammiféres. Catalogue des Primates. Paris (1851). Original description of Macacus palpebrosus. GRAY, J. EH. On the Family of Viverride and its Generic Subdivisions; with an Enumeration of the Species of Paradoxurus, and Characters of Several New Ones. Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1832), 63-68. Original description of Viverra tangalunga. IpEM. A Revision of the Genera of Bats (Vespertilionide), and the De- scription of Some New Genera and Species. Mag. Zool. and Bot. (1838), 2, 488-505. Revision of bats; many new combinations. IpEM. Catalogue of Monkeys, Lemurs, and Fruit-eating Bats in the Col- lection of the British Museum. London (1870). Original descriptions of Macacus cynomolgus var. cumingzi, Thoop- terus nigrescens, and Hleutherura philippinensis. GUNTHER, ALBERT. On a Collection from the Philippine Islands. Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1876), 735-736. Original description of Sciurus steerit. IpeM. List of the Mammals, Reptiles, and Batrachians sent by Mr. Everett from the Philippine Islands. Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1879), 74-79. Original description of E'pimys everetti. IpEM. Description of a New Species of Porcupine from the Philippine Is- lands. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1879), V, 4, 106-107. Original description of Thecurus pumilus. HEupDE, P. M. Cerfs des Philippines et de 1’Indo-Chine. Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois (1888), 2, pt. 1, 1-50, pl. 0-19. Original descriptions of Hyelaphus calamianensis, Ussa crassicornis, U. gorrichanus, U. barandanus, U. francianus, U. nublanus, U. tuaso- ninus, U. spatharius, U. ramosianus, U. ambrosianus, U. macarianus, U. elorzanus, U. garcianus, U. guidoteanus, U. rosarianus, U. marais- ianus, U. dailliardianus, U. roxasianus, U. microdontus, U. brachyceros, U. corteanus, U. rubiginosus, U. hipolitianus, U. chrysotrichos, U. guevaranus, U. marzaninus, U. longicuspis, U. gonzalinus, U. telesfor- ianus, U. verzosanus, Melanaxis basilanensis, M. masbatensis, M. breviceps, and M. elegans. IpeM. Note sur le Petit Buffle’Sauvage de l’Ile de Mindoro, (Philippines). Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois (1888), 2, 50-51, August. Original description of Bubalus mindorensis. IDEM. Etudes Odontologiques. Part 1, Chap. 1. Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois (1892), 2, 65-84. Original description of Sus inconstans. IpEM. Etude sur les Suilliens. Chap. Il. Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinovs (1892), 2, 85-115, pl. 19A-29 C. Original descriptions of Sus minutus, S. calamianensis, S. effrenus, S microtis, S. arietinus, S. frenatus, and S. cebifrons. MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 57 IpeM. Catalogue Révisé des Cerfs Tachetés (Sika) de la Chine Centrale. Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois (1894), 2, pt. 3, 146-163. Original description of Sikelaphus soloensis. IpEM. Etudes Odontologiques. Part 1, Chap. 1V. Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois (1894), 2, 170-211. Original description of Bubalus mainitensis. IpeEM. Premiére Révision du Genre Ussa H. et Rectification de nomenclature. Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois (1899), 4, pt. 3, 184-141. Original descriptions of Ussa baryceros, U. cinereus, U. villemerianus, U. michaelinus, U. vidalinus, and U. atheneensis. IDEM. Etudes Odontologiques. Part 4, Chapter 1, Lémuriens, Tarsiens, Galeopithéciens. Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois (1899), 4, 155-172. Original description of Tarsius carbonarius. Hopeson, B. H. Synopsis of the Vespertilionide of Nipal. Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal (1835), 4, 699-701. Original description of Myotis formosus. HOFFMAN, B. Uber Siugethiere aus dem Ostindischen Archipel. Abhand- und Berichte des Kénigl. Zoolog. Mus. Dresden (1886-87), No. 3, 1-29, 1887. Notes on rats, bats, and buffaloes from the Philippines. Original description of Mus chrysocomus. HoLuisterR, N.. Two New Species of Epimys from Luzon. Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington (1911), 24, 89-90, May 15. Original descriptions of Hpimys calcis and H. querceti. IpbEM. Description of a New Philippine Flying-squirrel. Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington (1911), 24, 185-186, June 23. Original description of Sciwropterus crinitus. IpEM. The Generic Name of the African Buffalo. Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash- ington (1911), 24, 191-194, June 23. Shows the generic differences between the water buftaloes of Africa and Asia, and restricts the name Bubalus to the latter. B. mindorensis considered congeneric with the Indian buffalo. HORSFIELD, THOMAS. Zoological Researches in Java and the Neighboring Islands (pages and plates not numbered). London (1824). Original descriptions of Pipistrellus imbricatus, Kerivoula hardwickii, Scotophilus temminckii, and Rhinolophus larvatus. Huet, J. Note sur une Espéce nouvelle de Mammiféres du Genre Mydaus Provenant de l’Ile Palaouan. Le Natwraliste (1887), II, 9° année, No. 18, 149-151, September 15. Original description of Mydaus marchei. IpeM. Sur deux Espéces Nouvelles de Sangliers. Le Naturaliste (1888), II, No. 20, 6-8, January. Original descriptions of Sus ahoenobarbus and S. marchei. JENTINK, F. A. On some hitherto Undescribed Species of Mus in the Leyden Museum. Notes Leyden Museum (1880), 3, 13-19, January. Original descriptions of Epimys neglectus and HE. ephippium. 58 HOLLISTER. Ip—EM. On Two Mammals from the Calamianes Islands. Notes Leyden Museum (1895), 17, No. 9, 41-48, August. Original descriptions of Mydaus schadenbergu and Mungos parvus. IpEM. Revision of the Genera Macroglossus and Syconycteris, and descrip- tion of a New Genus and Species, Odontonycteris meyeri. Notes Leyden Museum (1901), 23, No. 8, 181-142, July. Original description of Odontonycteris meyeri. JOURDAN, . Mémoire sur Quelques Mammiféres Nouveaux. Compt. rend. Acad. Sci. (1887), 5, 521-524. Original description of Paradoxurus philippinensis. LINN/us, C. Systema Nature, 10 ed. (1758), 1, 14-77, Mammalia. Original descriptions of Bubalus bubalis, Epimys rattus, Pithecus syrichta, Felis catus, Cynocephalus volans, and Megaderma spasma. LYDEKKER, R. Mammalia. Zool. Rec. (1892), 29, 24-25, 18938. First use of name menagensis (for the Philippine slow lemur) in combination with generic name and references, and consequently the “original description” of Lemur menagensis. Ip—eM. The Deer of All Lands. A History of the Family Cervide, Living and Extinct. London (1898). General account of Philippine deer. IpEM. Wild Oxen, Sheep, and Goats of All Lands, Living and Extinct. London (1898). Account of Philippine Bovide. Ip—eM. An Undescribed Type of Rusine Deer. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1900), VII, 6, 204-205. Original description of Cervus tavistocki. LYON, MARcuS WARD, Jr. Notes on the Porcupines of the Malay Peninsula and Archipelago. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1907), 32, 575-594, pls. 54-57, June 29. Hystrix pumila Giinther from Palawan regarded as a probable member of the genus Thecurus. } IpEM. The Authority for the Name Nycticebus menagensis. Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington (1909), 22, 89, April 17. Shows Lydekker to be authority for the name Nycticebus menagensis, first described, without inclusion in a genus, by Nachtrieb. Magsor, C. I. ForsytH. On Sus verrucosus, Mill. & Schleg., and Allies, from the Eastern Archipelago. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1897), VI, 19, 521-542. Original description of Sus verrucosus mindanensis, and S. barbatus balabacensis. MATSCHIE, PAUL. Sdugethiere von den Philippinen. Sitz.-Ber. Ges. Nat. Freunde zu Berlin (1898), No. 5, 38-43, May. ~ Original descriptions of Tupaia méllendorffii, Sciurus méllendorffi, and S. albicauda. IpEM. Die Fledermause des Berliner Museums fiir Naturkunde. I. Lie- ferung. Die Megachiroptera, Berlin (1899), 1-102, pl. 1-14. Original description of Macroglossus lagochilus. MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 59 MEARNS, Epcar A. Descriptions of New Genera and Species of Mammals from the Philippine Islands. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 28, 425-460. Original descriptions of Pithecus mindanensis, P. m. apoensis, P. suluensis, P. cagayanus, Pieropus lanensis, Pt. cagayanus, Urogale cylindrura, Podogymnura truei, Epimys tagulayensis, E. albigularis, E. magnirostris, E. mindanensis, EH. zamboangz, EH. kelleri, HE. toda- yensis, E. vulcani, E. v. apicis, EZ. pantarensis, Mus commissarius, Bullimus bagobus, Limnomys sibuanus, Tarsomys apoensis, Apomys hylocetes, A. petrxus, and A. insignis. Meyer, A. B. Description of a New Squirrel from the Philippine Islands. Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1890), 579-601. Original description of Sciwrus cagsi. IpEM. Eine Neue Tarsius-Art. Abhandl. und Berichte des Kénigl. Zool. Mus. Dresden (1894-95), No. 1, 1-2, 1895. Original description of Tarsius philippensis. IDEM. Eine Neue Phlcomys-Art. Abhandl. und Berichte des Kénigl. Zool. Mus. Dresden (1894-95), No. 6, 1-2, 1895. Original description of Crateromys schadenbergii. IpEM. Der Stinkdachs der Philippinen (Mydaus marchei Huet). Abhand. und Berichte des Kénigl. Zool. Mus. Dresden (1894-95), No. 13, 1-4, August 25, 1895. Mydaus schadenbergii Jentink said to=M. marchei Huet. IpEM. Sdugethiere von Celebes und Philippinen-Archipel. I. Abhand. und Berichte des Kénigl. Zool. Mus. Dresden (1896-97), No. 6, 1896. General account of Philippine mammals with colored plates. IpEM. Sdaugethiere von Celebes und Philippinen-Archipel. II. Abhand. und Berichte des Kénigl. Zool. Mus. Dresden (1898-99), No. 7, 1899. Original description of Hpimys datae. MILLER, GERRIT S., Jr. A Second Specimen of Odontonycteris meyeri Jen- tink. Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington (1905), 18, 2538, December 9. Records a specimen from Cagayan Sulu; in the U. S. N. M., collected by Dr. E. A. Mearns, 1904. IpEM. The Families and Genera of Bats. Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1907), No. 57, I-XVII; 1-282, pl. 1-14. History and classification of bats. IpEM. Descriptions of Two New Genera and Sixteen New Species of Mammals from the Philippine Islands. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1910), 38, 391-404, pls. 18-20, August 19. Original descriptions of Crocidura halconus, C. beatus, C. mindorus, C. grandis, Tupaia cuyonis, Pteropus pumilus, Chilophylla hirsuta, Taphozous pluto, Epimys tyrannus, E. gala, Tryphomys adustus, Batomys dentatus, Apomys bardus, A. major, A. musculus, and Tarsius fraterculus. IpEM. Note on the Mus commissarius of Mearns. Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash- ington (1911), 24, 38, February 24. Records additional specimens, two from Luzon. 60 HOLLISTER. MULLER, PHILIPP LupWic STaTius. Des Ritters Carl von Linné Kéniglich Schwedischen Leibarztes Vollstandigen Natursystems. Supplements- und Register-Band tiber alle Sechs Theile oder Classen des Thierreichs. Nurenburg (1776). Original description of Dugong dugon. NACHTRIEB, HENRY F. A New Lemur (Menagensis). Zool. Anzeiger (1892), 15, 147-148. First published account of the Philippine slow lemur. NEHRING, ALFRED. Uber Zwei Schadel des Sus longirostris Nehring von Borneo und Java. Sitz.-Ber. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin (1886), No. 5, 80-85, May. Original description of Sus philippensis Meyer Mss. IpEM. Uber Sus celebensis und Verwandte. Abhand. und Berichte des Kénigl. Zoolog. Mus. Dresden (1888-89), 1-84, pls. 1-2. Original description of Sus barbatus var. palavensis. IpEM. Uber Sus celebensis und Verwandte. Sitz.-Ber. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin (1889), No. 10, 196, December 17. Note on Sus barbatus var. palavensis. IpEM. Uber Einen Unterkiefer des Philippinen Wildschweins. Sitz.-Ber. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin (1890), No. 1, 8-11, | ELEY Remarks on Philippine pigs. IpeM. Uber Sdugethiere der Philippinen, Namentlich tiber Phleomys cumingi Waterh. und Bubalis mindorensis Heude. Sitz.-Ber. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin (1890), No. 6, 101-108, June 17. Original description of Phleomys pallidus. IpEM. Uber Phleomys cumingi var. pallida. Sitz.-Ber. Ges. Nai. Freunde Berlin (1890), No. 8, 153-154, October. Note on Phleomys. IpEM. Sdugethiere von den Philippinen, namentlich von der Palawan- Gruppe. Sitz.-Ber. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin (1894), No. 8, 179-193; October 16. Original descriptions of Bubalus moellendorfi and B. kerabau ferus. IpEM. Uber Sus marchei Huet und Tragulus nigricans Thomas. Sitz.-Ber. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin (1894), No. 9, 219-226, November 20. Remarks on Philippine pigs and deerlets. OSBORN, HENRY FAIRFIELD. The Age of Mammals in Europe, Asia, and North America. New York (1910), I-XVII, 1-635. Appendix with an outline for classification of Mammals. The sequence of orders and families is used in this list. PETERS, W. Uber die von Hrn. F. Jagor bisher auf Malacca, Borneo, Java, und den Philippinen Gesammelten Saugethiere aus den Ordnungen der Halbaffen, Pelzflatterer und Flederthiere. Monatsb. Konigl. Preuss. Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin (1861), 706-712, 1862. Original descriptions of Emballonura discolor, Rhinolophus rufus, Hipposideros antricola, H. obscura, Cynopterus luzoniensis, and Ptenochirus jagorit. MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 61 IppM. Uber Neue oder Ungeniigend Bekannte Flederthiere (Vampyrops, Uroderma, Chiroderma, Ametrida, Tylostoma, Vespertilio, Vesperugo) und Nager (Tylomys, Lasiomys). Monatsb. Konigl. Preuss. Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin (1866), 392-411, 1867. Original description of Kerivoula jagorii. IpEM. Uber Neue Arten von Spitzmdusen des Konigl. Zoologischen Museums aus Ceylon, Malacca, Borneo, China, Luzon, und Ost-Afrika. Monatsb. Kénigl. Preuss. Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin (1870), 584-596, 1871. Original description of Pachyura luzoniensis. IpEM. Uber die Gattungen und Arten der Huflisennasen, Rhinolophi. Monatsb. Koénigl. Preuss. Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin (1871), 301-332, 1872, June. Original descriptions of Hipposideros coronata and Rhinolophus arcuatus. RAFFLES, THOMAS STAMFORD. Descriptive Catalogue of a Zoological Collec- tion made on Account of the Honourable East India Company, in the Island of Sumatra and its Vicinity, under direction of Sir Thomas Stamford Raffles, with Additional Notices illustrative of the Natural History of those Countries. Trans. Linn. Soc. London (1822), 13, 239-340. Original description of Viverra binturong. SANCHES, Dominco. Los Mamiferos de Filipinas. Anales de la Sociedad Espanola de Hist. Nat. (1898), II, 27, 98-110. General discussion of distribution of Philippine Mammals. IpEM. Los Mamiferos de Filipinas. Amnales de la Sociedad Espanola de Hist. Nat. (1900), II, 29, 177-290. General account of distribution of mammals in Philippines, with many corrections of previous accounts, especially that of Casto de Elera. Closes with list of species. Scnater, P. L. Report on additions to the Society’s Menagerie. Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1870), 380-383, pl. 28. Original description of Rusa alfredi. IpEM. The “Tamarou” of the Philippine Islands. Nature (1888), 38, 363-364, August 16. Extracts from letter from J. B. Steere, regarding “Anoa mindorensis.” Stack, J. H. Mammalogical Notices. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia (1867), 19, 34-88, pl. 1. Original description of Macacus fur. SMITH, CHARLES HAMILTON. Supplement to the Order Ruminantia. Griffith’s Animal Kingdom (1827), 4, 33-428. Original description of Rusa philippinus. STEERE, J. B. [Letter to Secretary of the Zoological Society of London.] Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1888), 4138-415, November 20. Account of the Tamarou on Mindanao. 62 HOLLISTER. IpEM. A List of the Birds and Mammals Collected by the Steere Expedition to the Philippines, with Localities, and with Brief Preliminary Descrip- tions of Supposed New Species, Ann. Arbor, July 14, (1890), 1-30. Original descriptions of Sciurus mindanensis and S. samarensis. TEMMINCK, C. J. Monographies de Mammalogie. Tome premier, Paris (1827), I-XXXII, 1-268. Original description of Felis minuta. IpEM. Monographies de Mammalogie, ou Description de quelques genres de mammiféres, dont les espéces ont été observées dans les différents musées de l'Europe. (1841), 2, 1-892, pls. 28-70. Leiden, (1835—- 1841). Original descriptions of Vespertilio abramus, Tylonycteris pachypus, Pipistrellus tenuis, Hipposideros bicolor, and Rhinolophus luctus. IDEM. Over de Geslachten Taphozous, Emballonura, Urocryptus en Dicli- durus. Tijdschrift voor Natuurlijke Gessch. en Physiol. (1838), 5, 1-34. Original description of Hmballonura monticola. THOMAS, OLDFIELD. Diagnoses of four New Mammals from the Malayan Region. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1888), VI, 2, 407. Original description of Nannosciurus concinnus. IpEM. Preliminary Notes on the Characters and Synonomy of the Different Species of Otter. Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1889), 190-200. Specific name cinerea Illiger revived for the Oriental clawless otter. IpEM. On some New Mammalia from the East Indian Archipelago. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1892), VI, 9, 250-254, March. Original description of Urogale everetti, and Tragulus nigricans. IpeM. Description of a New Sciuropterus from the Philippines. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1893), VI, 12, 30, July. Original descriptions of Sciuropterus nigripes. IpEM. On the Palawan Representative of Tupaia ferruginea. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1894), VI, 13, 367. Original description of Tupaia ferruginea palawanensis. IpEM. Descriptions of Two New Bats of the Genus Kerivoula. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1894), VI, 14, 460-462. Original description of Kerivoula whiteheadi. IpEM. Preliminary Diagnoses of New Mammals from Northern Luzon, Collected by Mr. John Whitehead. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1895), VI, 16, 160-164. Original descriptions of Rhynchomys soricoides, Chrotomys white- headi, Celenomys silaceus, Carpomys melanurus, C. pheurus, Batomys granti, and Epimys luzonicus. IpbEM. On Mammals from Celebes, Borneo, and the Philippines recently received at the British Museum. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1896), VI, 18, 241-250. Original description of Harpyionycteris whitehead. — a, MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. 63 IpEM. On the Mammals obtained by Mr. John Whitehead during his recent Expedition to the Philippines. Trans. Zool. Soc. London (1898), 14, pt. 6, 377-412, pl. 30-36, June. Original descriptions of Celznomys, Crunomys, and Epimys negrinus. IpEM. On Mammals collected in Mindanao, Philippines, by Mr. M. P. Anderson for the Duke of Bedford’s Exploration of Hastern Asia. Abstr. Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1907), No. 39, 5, February, 12. Original description of Crunomys melanius. IpEM. The Duke of Bedford’s Zoological Exploration in Eastern Asia. III. On Mammals obtained by Mr. M. P. Anderson in the Philippine Islands. Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1907), 140-142, June, 1907. Notes on seven species from Mt. Apo. IpEM. The Nomenclature of the Flying-Lemurs. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1908), VIII, 1, 252-255, March. Cynocephalus volans the proper name for the Philippine flying-lemur. IpeM. The Nomenclature of Certain Lorises. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1908), VIII, 1, 467-469, June. Considers Nycticebus philippinus a synonym of N. menagensis. IpEM. The Squirrels described as Sciurus steeri from Balabac and Palawan. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., (1908), VIII, 2, 498, December. Restricts S. steeri to Balabac and names the Palawan form Sciurus juvencus. IpEM. New Species of Paradoxurus, of the P. philippinensis Group, and a New Paguma. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1909), VIII, 3, 374-877, April. Original description of Paradoxurus minax and P. torvus. Ip—EM. The Mammals of the Tenth Edition of Linnzus; an Attempt to fix the Types of the Genera and the Exact Bases and Localities of the Species. Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1911), 120-158, March. Fixes types of Linnean genera, and type-localities of most Linnzan species. Revives the name syrichta for the Luzon macaque. Tomes, RoBert F. Descriptions of Four Undescribed Species of Bats. Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1857), 25, 52-54. Original description of Vespertilio chinensis. Ip—EM. A Monograph of the Genus Miniopteris. Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1858), 115-128. Original description of Miniopterus tibialis and M. australis. TROUESSART, E. L. Description d’une Espéce Nouvelle de Musaraigne de la Collection du Musée de Paris. Le Naturaliste (1880), No. 42, 330, December 15. Original description of Pachyura edwardsiana. IpEM. Catalogus Mammalium tam Viventium quam Fossilium. Quin- quennale Supplementum, 1904. Fasciculus I. Primates, Prosimiae, Chiroptera, Insectivora, Carnivora, Pinnipedia. Berolini (1904). Records from Philippine Islands: Primates, 2; Prosimiz, 2; Chirop- tera, 34; Dermoptera, 1; Insectivora, 6; Carnivora, 7. 64 HOLLISTER. IpEM. Same. Fasciculus II. Rodentia. Berolini (1904). Records twenty-eight rodents from the Philippines. IDEM. Same. Fasciculus III. Tillodontia, Ungulata, et Sirenia. Berolini (1905). : Records fifteen Ungulates from the Philippines. WATERHOUSE, G. R. On the Flying Lemurs (Galeopithecus). Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1838), 119-120. Original description of Galeopithecus phillipinensis=Cynocephalus volans. IDEM. On a New Species of Rodent from the Island of Luzon. Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1839), 7, 107-108. Original description of Phleomys cumingi. IpEM. Description of a New Species of Squirrel (Sciurus philippinensis) from the Philippine Islands. Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1889), 7, 117— 118. Original description of Sciurus philippinensis. IpEM. On Various Species of Bats Collected by H. Cuming, Esq. in the Philippine Islands. Proc. Zool. Soc. London (1843), 66-69. Original descriptions of Hipposideros pygmzxus and Rhinolophus philippinensis. IpEM. On a New Species of Megaderma. Proc. Zool. Soc. London (18438), 69. Original description of Megaderma philippinensis. IpEM. [Exhibition of and Description of Two New Species of Mouse.] Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1848), 12, 134. Original description of Mus castaneus. IpEM. Descriptions of Species of Bats collected in the Philippine Islands, and Presented to the Society by H. Cuming, Esq. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lon- don (1845), 3-10, April. Original descriptions of Vespertilio rufo-pictus, V. meyeni, V. esch- scholizii, Kerivoula pellucidus, Miniopterus tristis, Myotis macrotarsus, and Taphozous philippinensis. Ipem. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (1845), 16, 49-56, July. Reprint (?) of article in Proc. Zool. Soc. (1845), 13, 3-10, April, 1845, describing new species of bats from Phillippines, collected by Cuming. WESTERMAN, G. F. Beschrijving van eene Nieuwe Soort van Marter, Mustela (Martes) henricii. Bijdragen tot de Dierkunde (1848), 1, 13-14. Original description of Martes henricit. Worcester, DEAN C. The Philippine Islands and Their People. A record ' of Personal Observations and Experience, with a Short Summary of the More Important Facts in the History of the Archipelago (1899), J-XIX, 1-529. New York. Notes on various mammals. Good account of Bubalus mindorensis. a vert x OBITUARY Paul Caspar Freer DIRECTOR OF THE BUREAU OF SCIENCE OF THE GOVERNMENT OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS DEAN OF THE COLLEGE OF MEDICINE AND SURGERY AND PROFESSOR OF CHEMISTRY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF THE PHILIPPINES, AND FOUNDER AND EDITOR-IN-CHIEF OF THIS JOURNAL We are deeply grieved to announce the death of Doctor Freer at Baguio, Philippine Islands, on April the seventeenth, in his fifty-first year, from arterio-sclerosis and acute nephritis. In an effort formally to express our sorrow and to honor his memory a memorial meeting of the members of the Staff of the Bureau of Science, the Council of the University of the Philippines, and the members of the Philippine Islands Medical Association will be held on July 1, 1912. The proceedings of this memorial meeting will be published in a future number of this Journal. At a meeting of the members of the Staff of the Bureau of Science, held on the eighteenth day of April, the following resolutions were adopted: Whereas it has pleased Almighty God in His Wise and Inscrutable Providence to remove from our midst Paul Caspar Freer, M. D., Ph. D., Director of the Bureau of Science of the Government of the Philippine Islands, since the time of its organiza- tion as the Bureau of Government Laboratories in the year 1901, Dean of the College of Medicine and Surgery, and Professor of Chemistry, University of the Phil- ippines, and Founder and Editor-in-Chief of the ‘‘Philippine Journal of Science,’’ who, for many years, has been our Leader, Counselor, and Friend; and Whereas at best we can do little to indicate at this time our real appreciation of him as a man and as a worker for the general good: Therefore be it Resolved, That we, the Members of the Staff of the Bureau of Science in Manila, Philippine Islands, do hereby express our deepest sorrow and keen feeling of personal loss in the death of Doctor Freer; and be it further Resolved, That he holds a place of highest respect, admiration and appreciation both officially and personally in the hearts of all of us, and especially of those who were most intimately associated with him in scientific work; and be it further Resolved, That it is the sense of the Members of this Institution that the Bureau of Science has suffered a very great loss and that the cause of Science in these Islands has been deprived of one of its most zealous and conscientious advocates; and be it further Reeolved, That we extend our sincere sympathy and condolence to his Widow in her overwhelming grief, to his Sister, Brother and other Relatives; and be it further Resolved, That copies of these resolutions be engrossed and sent to the bereaved Widow and Brother of Doctor Freer, and that they be filed in the Archives of the Bureau of Science, transmitted to the Bureau of Civil Service, published in the forth- coming Number of each Section of the “Philippine Journal of Science,’’ in the newspapers of Manila, in a paper in the City of Chicago, Doctor Freer’s birth-place, and in ‘‘Science,’’ the Official Organ of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, of which Doctor Freer was a Fellow. For the Staff of the Bureau of Science: RICHARD P. STRONG, CHARLES S. BANKS, E. D. MERRILL, ALVIN J. COX, OSCAR TEAGUE, A. E. SOUTHARD, Committee. At Manila, Philippine Islands, this eighteenth day of April, in the year of our Lord one thousand nine hundred and twelve. THE PHILIPPINE JOURNAL OF SCIENCE D. GENERAL BIOLOGY, ETHNOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY Vou. VII APRIL, 1912 No. 2 THE ANATOMY OF ACLESIA FREERI NEW SPECIES. By LAWRENCE EDMONDS GRIFFIN.* (From the Zodlogical Laboratory, University of the Philippines.) DIAGNOSIS. Body from 138 to 20 centimeters long, not contracted behind the head, sloping upward to the inhalent siphon, descending abruptly behind; entirely covered with simple and compound dermal processes, the largest of which may be 5 centimeters long, a large dermal process between the eyes; another is usually found between the tentacles. Foot extending to posterior extremity of body, sharply pointed behind, broader than body. Ground- color, light gray, overlaid with yellow dots and black markings so that the general effect is olive-green. Two or three rows of large peacock-blue spots, each surrounded by a narrow brown line, extend along the back and sides of the body. Anterior end of branchial fissure a little in front of the middle of the body. Tentacles large, 25 to 30 millimeters long; rhinophores more slender and tapering, almost as long as the tentacles. Apparently this is the largest described member of the genus. * Associate professor of zodlogy, University of the Philippines. 108642 65 66 GRIFFIN. HABITS AND EXTERNAL CHARACTERS. My attention was called to the presence of this species in Manila Bay by Mr. Dean C. Worcester, about February 1, 1909. The animals were then congregated in enormous numbers for miles along the coast, just below low tide level. At the spot where they were first discovered, there were areas where the ani- mals were so numerous that it was impossible to move without treading on them, and the outstretched hand would cover three or four almost everywhere it could be placed. The aclesias were then engaged in depositing their eggs which are produced in enormous numbers. The egg capsules are inclosed in a cord of greenish mucus, one of which when unraveled proved to be 27 meters in length. The tangled egg-masses are attached, if pos- sible, to stakes or stones; sometimes one animal after another de- posits its eggs at the same place, until there is an accumulation sufficient to fill a large pail. An immense number of the egg masses which are deposited on the bottom are washed ashore, forming a windrow which extends along the beach for miles. As the eggs develop, the color of the mass changes to light brown. The egg masses are eaten by many persons in the form of a salad, dressed with vinegar and olive oil. The aclesias themselves also serve as food to a limited extent, the thick body-wall being cooked and eaten. In the years 1909 and 1910, the aclesias first appeared along the shore of the bay near Manila about the first of February. During the middle of the month, their numbers and egg-laying activities were greatest; then the num- ber of aclesias lessened day by day. Few were left at the end of the month, and after the first week of March it was impossible to find any of them along the beach. The first individual and eggs of the next season were found December 4, 1910; the principal activity in egg-laying occurred during January, 1911, instead of in February as in the previous years. Many aclesias, however, remained along the shore until the last week of February. Other duties rendered it impos- sible to determine the extent of coast line along which the aclesias appeared during the years mentioned. The author has found this aclesia to be an extremely useful form to use in his classes. The supply appears to be regular and unlimited. ’ The animals are of large size, clean in appearance and odor, *In 1912 no aclesias had appeared by March 11, the date on which the author left Manila. ANATOMY OF ACLESIA FREERI. 67 and all adults; while the character of the body wall is such that the internal organs are completely exposed by a few cuts with the scissors. By using a hypodermic injection of cocaine and atropine the animals can be killed fully extended. They are well preserved by either alcohol or formalin. It has been found, however, that the albumen gland must be well hardened, or it will swell and break down into a gelatinous substance. The dissection of aclesia is not without its difficulties, but this aclesia is, in the opinion of the author, the best gasteropod form for general class work with which he is acquainted. When crawling upon the bottom, even in clear shallow water, these mollusks are not conspicuous, although easily distinguished and followed when once found by the eye. Their colors blend well with the sandy bottom, rendering them much less con- spicuous objects than one would think from observing the animals in an aquarium, where color and form show to the greatest advantage. There is considerable variation in size among the specimens collected, but the average is about 15 cen- timeters long, 7 centimeters wide, and 5 centimeters high. The posterior extremity extends some distance back of the visceral mass, forming a broad, pointed tail. The creeping sole extends to the tip of this part. The sides of the foot extend beyond the margins of the body. i The highest point of the body is at the level of the anterior end of the branchial fissure. The slope from here to the head is even and gradual, but abrupt and steep to the tail. The dorsal surface of the head and neck is considerably flat- tened. The head is distinctly separated from the foot (fig. 10, Plate III), but there is no dorsal or lateral demarcation between the head and the broad, thick, neck region. The lips, which inclose the large ventral mouth, are white in color, thick, and creased. They form a flattened area of considerable extent which is applied to the surface on which the animal is creeping. At each side of the mouth, the head is produced into a pair of large oral lobes, almost directly beneath the tentacles. The ventral edge of the oral lobe is formed by an extension of the lip. The tentacles arise from the latero-anterior angles of the head; they are long and large, tapering little from base to tip. The auriculate tip is directed somewhat posteriorly, and extends in the form of a small fissure down the posterior surface of the tentacle about two-fifths of its length. When the aclesias move about, the flattened surface of the tentacle is spread on the bottom like the palm of a hand. The rhinophores are about as long as 68 GRIFFIN. the tentacles, but more tapering. Their fissures extend from base to tip of the posterior side; except at the tip, the margins of the fissure are usually rolled tightly upon each other. When the rhinophores are fully extended their bases meet in the midline to a height of 6 to 10 millimeters above the surface of the head, making them appear to spring from a transverse elevation of the head. When retracted, they appear to be widely separated. The bases of the tentacles do not approach each other closely, even when most fully extended. The eyes lie on the line connecting the centers of the bases of the tentacle and rhinophore, slightly nearer the rhinophore than the tentacle. In life, the minute, black eye is surrounded by a narrow ring of bright yellow, which renders the eyes fairly conspicuous. After preservation, the color about the eyes fades, and the eyes seem to become somewhat depressed by the con- traction of the skin so that it becomes difficult to find them. The entire dorsal and lateral surfaces of the body are covered (excepting only the oral lobes) by slender villi of different sizes; the small ones simple, the larger ones more or less branched. Scattered over the surface of the body are good- sized, conical elevations of the skin, made more distinct by the radial, black lines or spots with which they are marked, and frequently covered with villi. Between the bases of the villi, the skin is covered by numerous, extremely fine, dermal papille scarcely distinguishable without a hand lens, and only to be observed in well expanded, living animals. Some specimens are found in which practically all the villi are short and simple. In others, the villi are fewer in number, long, and complexly branched. Even the tentacles and rhinophores may carry large compound villi. The number of branches possessed by a large villus can only be determined when it is fully expanded, for the contractility of these processes is so great that a large and highly complex villus when contracted may appear as a tubercle on the surface of the body from which project only one to three small simple villi. A curious feature of the villi, both large and small, is the presence of ridges, or angles, extending from base to tip. There are always two, and frequently three, of these. Branches, or secondary papille, always arise from these ridges. A large papilla, which arises from the middle of the dorsum of the head, about equidistant between the tentacles and rhinophores, appears to be a constant feature. When fully extended, it is of about the same size as these other organs, and appears much like an extra tentacle. Preserved specimens ANATOMY OF ACLESIA FREERI. 69 show scarcely a trace of it. Another large papilla may arise from the anterior edge of the head between the tentacles, but does not appear to be so constant in its development as the one previously mentioned. The tissues of the body wall and foot are delicate and trans- lucent; this character combined with the pleasing coloration render Aclesia freeri a much handsomer animal than most large tectibranchs. Viewed with the naked eye, the ground-color appears to be olive, but under a lens it is seen to be a very light gray. Black dots and lines are so closely placed upon this that the ground-color in most places is reduced to small irregular dots, not distinguishable without a hand lens. The sole of the foot is lighter in color than the body because the overlying color is light brown, and its markings are much finer and more evenly distributed than those of the body. The tips of the minute papille, which have been mentioned previously, are white, and thus a finely regular, whitish speckling of the skin is produced. About and on the bases of the larger villi, the black markings have the form of complete or incomplete rings, crescents, and irregular flecks of vivid black. Between the bases of the villi are numerous irregular areas where the black markings unite, producing a fine black network inclosing minute gray areas and the small white-tipped papille previously referred to. The black markings of the larger papille become finer and finer toward the tip; to the naked eye, no black is visible in the ter- minal portion of the papille. The ground color, also, changes from gray to tan, or even reddish-brown, with or without minute ‘dots of canary-yellow. The spots of the last-mentioned color are widely distributed over the body of some specimens and lacking in others. The brilliant eye-like spots of peacock-blue are subject to extreme variation. In general, two fairly well-defined rows may be distinguished. One row extends along the side of the body, 10 to 20 millimeters above the foot; the other commences back of the tentacle and passes along the back parallel with, and about 1.5 centimeters distant from, the branchial fissure. Some- times a third row appears, close to the margin of the fissure. The color of these spots is very uniform. When examined with a lens, the blue appears to be flecked with bright spots, appearing like the metallic paints often used on children’s toys. The spots are ordinarily fairly uniform in size, and from 3 to 5 mill‘meters in diameter. Occasionally one finds a specimen 70 GRIFFIN. having a number of small blue spots, 1 millimeter or less across, about the bases of the rhinophores. The smallest spots are entirely blue, but the larger and more usual ones have dark centers, marked and colored like the general surface of the body. Hach spot is finely margined with black, outside of which is a second equally fine ring of gray to brown. In certain lights, the foot shows a beautiful violet iridescence, possibly due to the layer of mucus covering it. During life, the gizzard, hermaphrodite gland, and anterior genital mass show through the tissues of the foot. The expanded oral surface, the ventral edges of the oral lobes, and the groove separating the head from the foot are very lightly pigmented. The parapodial lobes are separated for more than half their length by the branchial fissure, but fused with each other poste- rior to this (fig. 1, Plate I). At the level of the anterior end of the branchial fissure they are joined to the body wall from the seminal furrow to the margin of the foot (fig. 8, Plate II). A large contractile sac is thus formed which surrounds, but is not attached to, the visceral mass of the body, within which lies the large branchia, and into which open the anus and the renal and reproductive pores. The branchial fissure lies slightly to the right of the median dorsal line. During inspiration, the anterior end of the branchial fissure (inhalent siphon) expands, and its margins are elevated, while the posterior extremity closes. The parapodial sac enlarges so as considerably to increase the space between its wall and the body. When expiration begins, the an- terior opening closes suddenly, the posterior (exhalent siphon) opens, and the water inclosed by the parapodial sac is expelled by the contraction of the walls of the sac with considerable force, a force sufficient to carry all refuse well beyond the end of the tail. The anal papilla lies immediately below the exhalent siphon (fig. 8, Plate II). It can be extended so as to bring the anus almost into the exhalent siphon (fig. 9, Plate II) and thus discharge feecal materials into the outpassing current in such a manner that they will be completely carried away. The division between the right and left parapodia is main- tained anteriorly by the seminal furrow, which passes from the genital orifice over the dorsum and right side (fig. 8, Plate II), to the penial pore, just below the right tentacle. The body wall, parapodial lobes, and foot are translucent and appear to be composed largely of a gelatinous connective tissue. There is present, however, a considerable amount of muscle tissue in these parts, and they shrink little in properly preserved speci- ANATOMY OF ACLESIA FREERI. 71 mens. The parapodia are traversed by numerous muscle strands passing from the outer to the inner wall. An irregular network of larger muscle bands lies. next to the internal surface, which can be clearly seen when the parapodia are reflected. Outside of the horizontal muscle layer, but close to the internal surface of the parapodium, is a network of venous sinuses which forms a quite definite layer (fig. 8, Plate II). There being no trace of a shell, the mantle is reduced to a ridge which passes from near the anterior side of the branchial cavity around the left end of the gill, finally ending behind the gill near the base of the anal papilla. The pericardium and nephridium lie to the left of the ridge, raised somewhat above the general level of the floor of the branchial chamber. The highest part of the mantle ves- tige, near the posterior end, projects from 5 to 7 millimeters, sufficient to enable it to overlie a few small plates of the pos- terior end of the branchia. The anterior end of the mantle ridge is brillant black, and is com- posed of denser tissue than the remander of the ridge. The posterior extremity of the man- tle ridge is also pigmented. These aclesias have the power, possessed by most tectibranchs, of emitting a purple dye when they are greatly disturbed by Fic. 1.—Diagram of the pallial complex of Aclesia freeri sp. nov.: a, anal papilla; bv, afferent branchial vein; mr, mantle ridge, i. e., the projecting free margin of the reduced mantle; n, nephridium; 0, osphradium; par, parapodium; p. e., pericardium ; v, vein of left side of body running _beneath the pericardium and nephridium; vu, vulva; «, aperture by which the blood from the hemocel and veins of the right side of the body enters the branchial vein. handling, or when the water in which they are kept becomes un- bearably stale. The dye is emitted by this species in smaller quantity and with more reluctance than by any other aplysiid with which I am familiar. The great majority of the specimens which have been killed, either by asphyxiation or by narcotization, have died without giving forth any trace of dye. The dye is produced from the pigmented areas at the anterior and posterior ends of the mantle ridge, the anterior region pro- ducing the greater amount. The pigmented areas of the mantle ridge can be squeezed in a moribund aclesia, when the purple dye 72 GRIFFIN. will issue from the skin; at the same time the pigmentation disappears. The black pigment of these spots can all be pressed out, coloring the water purple as it appears, until the skin is white. The renal pore is located in the pigmented area at the posterior extremity of the mantle ridge. The true mantle cavity extends farther beneath the base of the gill than is at first apparent. The dotted line in text figure 1 indicates the limit of the mantle cavity. From this it will be seen that a considerable part of the pericardium and of the nephridium is included in the base of the mantle. The branchia is large (65 millimeters long, 25 millimeters wide, and 15 millimeters thick). It is attached to the mantle and body wall by a broad base which follows approximately the curve of the mantle ridge. The free extremity of the branchia curves to the right and backward, ending well back of the anal papilla. Both dorsal and ventral sides of the branchia are sub- divided into leaflets, upon the outer edges of which the afferent branchial veins are prominent. The dorsal and ventral series of leaflets are widely separated by a deep groove on the anterior face of the branchia. The color of the branchia is gray or greenish, punctate with numerous black dots. The anal papilla stands just below the exhalent siphon and within the are of the posterior side of the gill. Within the in- spiratory aperture and a little to the right is the opening of the vulva. The thin-walled pericardium occupies the area on the left side of the body between the mantle ridge and the anterior margin of the branchial chamber. The triangular nephridium forms the posterior border of the pericardium, and extends back- ward as far as the posterior extremity of the mantle (fig. 8, Plate II). The visceral mass back of and below the kidney is covered by a thin, semitransparent body wall, which is pigmented in extremely fine black dots. The outlines of the liver and her- maphrodite gland, and portions of two coils of the intestine can be seen through the kidney and pericardium. On the right side of the branchial chamber, we find beneath the branchia and in front of the anus, an elevation caused by a portion of the reproductive system (the ‘‘anterior genital mass”). The hypobranchial gland consists of an area of dermal glands which lie in the floor of the branchial cavity, commencing at the right side of the genital orifice, and extending backward along the right side at least as far as the level of the anal papilla. The thickening of the dermis in the glandular area is noticeable; ANATOMY OF ACLESIA FREERI. 73 the color there is lighter than on the surrounding parts. The gland appears to secrete large quantities of mucus, but no dye seems to be produced there, nor does the secretion have a dis- agreeable odor, as in some other aplysiids. INTERNAL ANATOMY. The osphradium lies in the angle under the extreme anterior end of the base of the branchia (text figure 1). It has the form of an oval papilla, only slightly raised above the surround- ing surface; it is depressed a little at the center, where the osphradial ganglion is in contact with the dermis. The pericardium is thin-walled and occupies the space between the mantle rim and the anterior wall of the respiratory chamber. It is bounded posteriorly and overlapped by the nephridium, which is light-colored and somewhat elevated. The lateral (left) border of the kidney is approximately parallel to the mantle rim, although in most cases the posterior end of the kidney is much narrower than the anterior. The external aper- ture of the kidney, the reno-branchial pore, is found on a thickened and pigmented area at the posterior extremity of the mantle rim, to the left of the base of the anal papilla. The anterior and lateral portions of the nephridium are composed of solid glandular substance. The postero-median region con- tains but little glandular tissue, which lines the walls, while the central part is occupied by a more or less distinct cavity. The lateral edge of the nephridium lies over the large vein which collects blood from the left side of the body. Numerous minute openings are visible in the surface of the nephridium which lies against the vein. The pericardium and nephridium lap to such an extent that nearly one-half of the latter overlies the pericardium. The reno-pericardial pore is formed at the ex- treme posterior end of the pericardium, close to the angle formed by the dorsal, posterior, and median walls. Veins from the nephridium open directly into the left side of the auricle. ALIMENTARY SYSTEM. The narrow, slit-like mouth lies in the middle of a nearly circular, flat, oral plate, the thickened skin of which is raised in radiating, pleated ridges (fig. 10, Plate III). The flattened, free edges of the ridges are white, while the grooves between them are flecked with black spots. The ventral edges of the oral lobes are continuous with the surface of the oral plate. Just within the lips, each side of the buccal cavity is armed by a GRIFFIN. 74 fiat, horny, mandibular plate, of the shape shown by text figure 2. Each plate is composed of fine rodlets, which are inclined to the surface in such a way that they overlap each other, leaving only the heavy, bluntly-pointed ends projecting and pointing toward the concave anterior border. The pharynx (buccal mass) is large and muscular, the in- trinsic circular and longitudinal muscles, as well as its retractors and protractors, being well developed and defined (fig. 15, Plate III). The tongue is large and firm, is quite regularly ovoid in shape, and occupies most of the floor of the pharynx (fig. 13, Plate III). The anterior surface presents a median point, from which a frenum-like ridge extends along the floor of the pharynx to the mouth; the posterior end of the tongue overhangs the base. The radula is light brown, broad, depressed along the median line, acutely pointed at the anterior end, and rounded posteriorly. The widest part of the radula lies upon the posterior face of the tongue. Ab- sorption of the lateral teeth commences at the posterior limit of the anterior face of the tongue and proceeds inward from this point, resulting in the pointed an- terior end of the radula already referred The radular sheath lies under the posterior end of the tongue, and is broad and shallow. A transverse arcuated NY Py A y SZ>> SLPS Fic. 2—Outline of a man- to dibular plate of Aclesia S freeri_sp. nov. The figure within the out- line represents four of the rods of which the plate is composed. The concave border of the plate is anterior. Ac- tual dimensions, 5 milli- meters high, 3 milli- meters wide at bottom, 1 millimeter wide at fold of the floor of the pharynx lies be- hind and parallel to the base of the tongue. ; On each side a broad fold of mucous es membrane projects from the lateral wall of the pharynx above the posterior portion of the tongue. In the unopened pharynx the free medial edges are applied closely to each other, completely separating the anterior, muscular- walled part of the pharyngeal cavity which contains the tongue, from a thin-walled posterior portion which opens directly into the cesophagus. The inner (ventral) surfaces of the folds are fairly smooth, the outer surfaces corrugated. The apertures of the salivary ducts are on the inner surfaces of these folds, near their anterior extremities. The mucous membrane of the pharynx is pigmented in black spots and lines. ANATOMY OF ACLESIA FREERI. 75 The radula sac opens by a V-shaped aperture in the middle of the posterior half of the dorsum of the tongue. The posterior wall of the sac is folded into it, so as to lie against the lateral walls. The sac is deep, extending obliquely downward and forward to the base, and almost to the an- terior extremity of the tongue. The radula (figs. 27, 28, and 29, Plate IV) consists of two portions; one lying upon the dorsal and anterior surface of the tongue, the other bending sharply at right angles to the first portion, and lying on the posterior face of the tongue and in the radula sac. The central part of the exposed portion of the radula is considerably raised above the margins, and at the anterior end forms a high sharp ridge, where the central teeth are apparently the only ones used. The center of the posterior portion of the radula, on the contrary, is greatly depressed. The radular teeth are of the type common to the family, and little different from those of other known species of aclesias. Text figure 3 represents the central tooth, the first two lateral teeth, and the four outermost lateral teeth of a row. A de- - : Fic. 3.—Central tooth, first and second inner laterals, and four outer lateral teeth of the radula of Aclesia freeri sp. nov. f tailed description would be superfluous. The inner surface of the anterior and ventral part of the pharynx is covered by a fairly heavy, chitinous cuticula which bears numerous spines of the kind shown in text figure 4. They are of two kinds; a in the anterior region the spines are short, thick, and sharply pointed; posteriorly, there are patches of long, slender, blunt spines which seem to be totally lacking im rigidity, and are more like cuticula- 5., 4 cuticular spines or thorns upon the inner covered villi than spines. The long (35 to 40 millemters), lobu- lated, salivary glands lie parallel to the esophagus (fig. 12, Plate III) ; their pos- terior ends are loosely attached to the sur- surface of the pharynx of Aclesia freeri sp. nov. The four spines at the bottom are from the anterior, the ones above from the posterior region of the part of the pharynx thus armed. face of the gizzard. The ducts of the salivary glands pass under the posterior edge of the outermost circular muscle layer of the pharynx until they reach the dorsal surface of this organ. They then turn forward for a distance of from 3 to 4 millimeters, 716 GRIFFIN. beneath the muscular wall, and finally open into the pharyngeal cavity near the anterior ends of the lateral lamelle, as previ- ously mentioned (page 74). The cesophagus is a straight tube about 25 millimeters in length. Its mucous membrane is thrown into numerous, straight, longitudinal folds. The cesophagus opens into a thin-— walled saccular crop, about 12 millimeters long by 15 millimeters in diameter. The opening of the cesophagus into the crop is guarded by a strong sphincter muscle and, also, by an annular fold of the mucous membrane of the csophagus, which pro- jects backward into the crop (fig. 138, Plate III). The mucous membrane of the crop is smooth. The crop is followed by a muscular, barrel-shaped gizzard, 12 millimeters long by 17 millimeters in diameter. The muscular wall of the gizzard consists of a thick, complete ring of circular muscles, thickest at the center and thinning regularly toward each end. The interior of the gizzard is almost completely filled by roughly pyramidal, chitinous ‘‘stomach-plates,” usually about 10 in number, which occupy the greater part of the wall. A row of from 9 to 11 small plates stands in front of these. The plates have about the same consistency as fresh hyaline cartilage, and are of a light coffee-color. The food of the animal consists of the animal and plant substances which are mixed with the bottom sand, which must be very effectively ground in passing through the narrow passages between these plates. It appears probable that the trituration of the food is accomplished more by the sand grains which are mixed with it than by the direct action of the stomach plates. The arrangement of the latter is such as to leave only tortuous, narrow passages through the gizzard when that organ is relaxed. When its muscular walls contract, the sand grains contained in the pas- sages will be pressed against each other and against any food substances present, producing a comminuting action much more effective than can be attained by the direct action of the large, blunt, and somewhat soft plates. The large stomach plates are bluntly pointed, with the points directed slightly backward. Each plate presents 3 or 4 prominent, somewhat irregular, but not sharp edges (figs. 17 and 18, Plate III). The bases of the plates are slightly convex and, in general, ovoid in outline. The center of the plate is occupied by an axial column of darker color and slightly harder material than the outer part, wide is exposed upon the worn tip of the plate. The plates are composed of numerous, thin layers, parallel to ANATOMY OF ACLESIA FREERI. TF the base. Each layer consists of prismatic columns, which are superposed, or coincide, from layer to layer. Each plate is situ- ated on an epithelial bed with slightly elevated margins, the shape of which corresponds to the shape of the bottom of the plate. An area is visible in the center which corresponds to the base of the axial column of the plate. The smaller plates of the anterior row are more slender, and pointed, and are considerably curved toward the interior part of the gizzard (fig. 19, Plate II). It is noticeable that the small stomach-plates are all found on the anterior edge of the gizzard, while the largest plates are found in the posterior row. Among the anterior plates, also, and located on the extreme anterior edge of the gizzard, often may be found minute plates in the first stages of growth. This arrangement suggests that possibly new teeth are continually being produced at the anterior edge of the gizzard, which gradually move backward as they grow, room being made for them by the reabsorption, or falling away, of the most posterior plates. Such a process would be essentially similar to the forward movement of the bands along which the nautilus is attached to its shell as its body moves forward in the growing shell. The axial column is the first part of the plate to be formed, growing from a minute, subtriangular, flat, epithelial elevation at the anterior edge of the gizzard. The outer coating is then formed around this, almost entirely, at first, upon the posterior side, where it frequently develops in a second point. The axial column is the more sharply pointed of the two; its tip is not covered by the secondary deposit until the plate is of consider- able size. A second axial column develops just in front of the first, fused with the first at its base, but with freely projecting tip. With further growth of the plate, the axial column now develops as a single structure, while the double point becomes worn away. The outer substance is formed in considerable thickness upon the anterior surface of the axial column, while it remains as a thin layer upon the sides. As a result of this method of deposition, the axial column usually extends almost completely across the plate and forms the entire grinding sur- face, and the outer substance forms considerable masses anterior and posterior to the axial column (figs. 17 and 19, Plate III). The surfaces of the axial column are iridescent. The elongated conical stomach, which follows the gizzard, shows no definite demarcation from the intestine. It is about 85 millimeters in length, and curves to the right under the 78 GRIFFIN. liver. The hepatic duct opens into the stomach by a large aperture on the dorsal side (fig. 21, Plate IV). Projecting from the inner surface of the stomach are numerous, slender, sharp-pointed spines of the same composition and structure as the plates of the gizzard, and arranged in a definite and constant manner (fig. 13, Plate III). They pass in two rows completely around the stomach, the first row being close to, and paralled with, the posterior margin of the gizzard. The plane of the sec- ond ring is perpendicular to the axis of the stomach. Therefore, it lies about 5 millimeters behind the first ring on the dorsal side of the stomach, but 15 millimeters behind it ventrally. Where the rows approach each other dorsad, they are connected by a short broad band of similar spines. The bands of epithelium on which the spines stand appear to be somewhat modified, being slightly lighter in color and smoother than the remainder of the stomach epithelium. The aperture of the hepatic duct lies directly behind the median dorsal band of spines. It is large, but is guarded by what appears to be an efficient, although pecul- iar, device (figs. 13 and 14, Plate III). At the anterior edge of the aperture stands a large conical stomach plate, which is inclined backward over the aperture. As this plate stands close to the posterior end of the short dorsal band of spines, it may possibly be considered as the hindmost and most developed one of the same series. It differs from plates of similar size in the gizzard in presenting no angles, its base being oval in outline. To the right and left of the aperture is a pair of prominent pad- like structures with much-folded mucous membrane. The meet- ing of the two pads and the anterior plate effectually closes the aperture of the hepatic duct. The pylorus is constricted by a weak sphincter muscle. The character of the mucous membrane does not change at the py- lorus, but appears to be the same in the upper part of the intes- tine as in the stomach. The long intestine traverses the length of the liver three times, beside coiling around it, and making a double loop over the surface of the hermaphrodite gland (fig. 12, Plate III). Within 15 millimeters of the anus, a sudden change oecurs in the nature of the mucous membrane, which there becomes thicker and is thrown into from 10 to 12 longi- tudinal folds. Each fold corresponds to one of the points on the edge of the anal papilla. The rectum occupies the center of the anal papilla; around it is a considerable thickness of gauzy connective tissue, crossed by numerous radiating fibers connect- ing the rectum and the dermis. ANATOMY OF ACLESIA FREERI. 719 The liver needs no particular description. It forms a solid, well-defined mass, without division into distinct lobes. The intestine is so closely attached to the liver in most places that it can not be dissected away without rupture. The life-color of the liver is gray with black markings, but after preservation in formalin the liver assumes the usual dark-green color. The hepatic ducts form three main ducts, one anterior and two posterior, which open into a short but broad common duct (fig. 21, Plate IV). The latter receives a few small ducts which are independent of the three larger ducts already men- tioned. The common hepatic duct opens into the stomach by the aperture previously described. The right stomatogastric nerve (fig. 21, Plate IV) passes to the dorsal side of the cesophagus, while the left remains ventral. Near the posterior end of the crop these nerves divide into branches which make a ring around the crop and anterior end of the gizzard, and also give off three nerves which pass over the surface of the gizzard, one on the dorsal, one on the ventral, and one on the left side. At the anterior end and near the middle of the stomach these three nerves anastomose in two rings which encircle the stomach. From the second ring, the left and ventral branches proceed to the pylorus, where another ring is formed. From this point, nerves pass along the walls of the intestine, but can not be readily followed. No noticeable enlargements or ganglia occur at the points of anastomosis. VASCULAR SYSTEM. The auricle (fig. 31, Plate V) is large (23 millimeters wide, 9 millimeters long, 7 millimeters deep), its base being expanded so that it covers the base of the gill and extends upon the ante- rior face of the kidney. The reno-pericardial pore is found beneath this part of the auricle. The wall of the auricle is transparent and extremely delicate. Its interior is crossed by numerous anastomosing muscular fibers, which can be seen through the wall. The auricle receives blood through several large openings from the efferent branchial vein, as well as by one or more openings from the kidney. The ventricle (fig. 31, Plate V) is conical (14 millimeters long by 11 millimeters wide), the base being turned toward the auricle, with thick but spongy walls. The auricle is attached to the ventricle over practically the entire basal surface. The auriculo-ventricular aperture is a wide horizontal slit, 6 millimeters long. Each lip of the slit is turned into the ventricle and forms an efficient semilunar valve, 4 millimeters high (fig. 32, Plate V). 80 GRIFFIN. The pointed anterior end of the ventricle joins a bulbous aorta of considerable size, a large appendage of which projects upon the right side. Four large arteries spring from the aortic bulb, the intestinal, gastric, and genital arteries, and the aorta. The gastric artery (fig. 30, Plate V, 22) quickly divides into two branches which follow the junction of crop and gizzard, one on the dorsal and left sides, the other on the right and ventral surfaces. Hach gives off branches to both gizzard and crop. The right branch sends a large vessel to the csophagus. The aorta (fig. 30, Plate V, 5) passes forward and downward over the left side of the viscera until it reaches a position beneath the posterior extremity of the pharynx. Here, a large vessel is sent forward beneath the pharynx until the anterior portion of this is reached, where the vessel enters the pharynx. This vessel sends a small branch from its right side to the pleu- ropedal ganglion; from the left side a larger branch supplies the ventral and dorsal walls of the head and the cerebral ganglia; a ventral branch passes into the foot. In one specimen dissected, a large branch arose from each side of the base of the pharyngeal artery (fig. 30, Plate V), at the point where it passes beneath the pedal ganglia. The right branch entered the sheath of the right side of the nerve ring, the left one the left side. The diameter of each branch being fully half that of the pharyngeal artery, it may be seen that the central nervous system is richly supplied with blood. The aorta then turns backward along the left side of the foot, sending first a large branch into the middle portion of the foot, then passing into the tissues at the junction of foot and lateral body wall back of the middle of the body. The intestinal artery (fig. 30, Plate V, 19) arises from the pos- terior part of the aortic bulb, passes immediately into the liver, and then follows closely the second, posteriorly-directed loop of the intestine. One large branch passes through the anterior part of the liver to the part of the intestine just back of the gizzard (fig. 30, Plate V, 23) ; other branches pass into the substance of the liver; numerous short branches are given off to the intestinal walls. The genital artery (fig. 30, Plate V, 12) gives off, first, a branch which furnishes a rich supply of blood to the terminal part of the sperm-oviduct and to the neighboring body wall, and a branch to the osphradium. The main vessel passes downward, following closely the medial side of the genital duct; it then divides, one part passing above the duct to the right side of the albumen gland, the other branch passing to the ventral side ANATOMY OF ACLESIA FREERI. QT of the genital mass, giving off a branch to the hermaphrodite duct, a large vessel to the posterior and right sides of the albumen gland, another vessel to the anterior part of this gland, and a vessel to the central mucous gland. The principal vein of the body lies under the left margin of the nephridium and pericardium, occupying the entire width of the space which separates the lateral extension of the true mantle-cavity beneath the nephridium and pericardium, from the body wall of the left side of the visceral mass. Numerous apertures in the ventral surface of this vein admit blood from the left side of the body. Other openings in the dorsal wall permit blood to pass from it into the kidney. At the base of the branchia, it receives a large vein from the right side of the visceral mass, and then enters the efferent branchial vein. The efferent branchial vein opens into the auricle by several large apertures. The venous sinuses of the nephridium, also, com- municate directly with the auricle. REPRODUCTIVE SYSTEM. The principal portions of the reproductive system (fig. 28, Plate IV) form two large masses, often referred to in the literature of this group of mollusks as the anterior and pos- terior genital masses. The posterior mass consists entirely of the hermaphrodite gland, which lies back of the liver and forms the rounded posterior extremity of the visceral mass. The hermaphrodite gland, in reality, is an elongated organ, but is rolled spirally in such a manner as to form an approximately hemispherical mass, the flattened surface of which is applied against the liver. The coils of the intestine which enfold the gland follow its inrolled edges. The convoluted hermaphrodite duct arises from near the center of the anterior surface of the gland, and passing toward the right side connects with the ventral surface of the anterior genital mass (fig. 22, Plate IV). The anterior genital mass is composed of a central mucous (nidamental) gland, surrounded by the coils of the oviduct (fig. 22, Plate IV). Upon its ventral surface is the sperma- tocyst. The hermaphrodite duct passes forward under the anterior genital mass till it reaches the neck of the spermatocyst. The last coil of the oviduct is continuous with the sperm-oviduct which passes forward from the right side of the mass (text figure 5). The spermatocyst opens into the smaller spermatic division of the sperm-oviduct. At the base of the spermatocyst, the hermaphrodite duct changes its character, becoming much 108642——2 82 GRIFFIN. smaller and losing its convolutions. This narrow portion of the duct passes almost completely around the neck of the sper- matocyst, until directly posterior to it (fig. 22, PlateIV). Here, the hermaphrodite duct divides into two portions, sperm duct and oviduct. The sperm duct turns sharply forward, crosses the neck of the spermatocyst, and finally enters the latter upon its anterior surface close to the junction of the spermatocyst with the sperm-oviduct (text figure 5). The oviduct passes dorsad over the posterior surface of the neck of the mucous gland and leads directly into the convoluted tube seen on the dorsal side of the anterior gen- ital mass (fig. 23, Plate IV). This can then be traced into the broad white coils which form the structure commonly ealled the albumen gland, which as a matter of fact is no more than a specialized por- tion of the oviduct. The al- buminogenous portion of the oviduct is flattened trans- versely, the lumen being a hori- zontal slit which extends almost completely across the tube. The wall of the outer edge of the duct remains thin, form- ing a well-marked conducting channel. . The dorsal and ven- tral walls of the glandular Fic. 5.—Diagram of the reproductive system of Aclesia freeri sp. nov. 1, vulva; 2, copulatory recess; 3, spermatocyst; 4, mucous gland (nidamental gland) ; proximal portion of oviduct; 6, albumi- nogenous portion of oviduct (albumen gland) ; 7, hermaphrodite gland; 8, her- maphrodite duct; 9, ovarian portion o sperm-oviduct ; 10, spermatic portion of sperm-oviduet ; 11, spermatheca. part of the duct are produced internally into thin, closely packed, transverse lamellz, to which the considerable appa- rent thickness of these walls is due. The proximal end of the albuminogenous portion of the oviduct is thin-walled and differs conspicuously from the remaining portions by the racemose condition of its wall. The wall of this part, moreover, is quite thin and bears no internal lamelle. The oviduct finally opens into the right, or oviducal, side of the sperm-oviduct (text figure 5). The mucous (nidamental) gland is visible only on the ventral surface of the anterior genital mass. It is a brown body, roughly triangular in outline, occupying the central part of the ANATOMY OF ACLESIA. FREERI. 83 mass (fig. 22, Plate IV). Its walls are thinner, but considerably firmer and stronger, than those of the albumen gland. The internal cavity of the gland is large; it is partially divided into an anterior and a posterior chamber by an inward projection of the dorsal wall. The internal surfaces of the walls are folded into low lamellz, which are approximately parallel to the axis of the gland. The broad, short neck of the gland opens by a large aperture into the ovarian side of the sperm-oviduct, just back of the junction of the spermatocyst with the spermatic duct (text figure 5). The spermatocyst is a club-shaped sack, the narrow neck of which is a direct continuation of the spermatic portion of the sperm-oviduct (fig. 22, Plate IV; text figure 5). The common genital duct (sperm-oviduct) is divided into two parallel tubes by a pair of longitudinal, internal folds arising from the walls, whose edges are closely appressed. The ovi- ducal portion is thicker-walled than the spermatic, the walls being evidently glandular. Near the vulva, the sperm-oviduct is twisted spirally. Two or more complete turns are made; the spermatic portion of the duct thus comes to open into the vulva upon the left side of the ovarian. There is a single genital opening into the vulva, but the spermatic and ovarian apertures are practically separated by the median septa previ- ously mentioned. The seminal furrow enters the spermatic duct, and can be traced along its wall nearly to the proximal end. The globular spermatheca (Vesicle of Swammerdam) lies in front and to the left of the genital aperture (fig. 23, Plate IV). Its slender duct passes backward and along the left side of the vulva, crosses over the sperm-oviduct to the right side, and turning forward enters a small diverticulum of the vulva upon the right side. The penial aperture is found immediately under the right tentacle. When the penis is indrawn, it lies in its sheath at the right side of the pharynx. There is no prostate gland con- nected with the organ. When extended the penis has the form of a cylinder about 5 millimeters in diameter by from 14 to 18 millimeters long, terminating in a flattened expansion, the prepuce (figs. 24 and 25, Plate IV). The cylindrical base is pigmented like the surrounding skin; the prepuce is white. The main flattened portion of the prepuce is about 9 by 7 millimeters in dimensions, nonmuscular, and apparently capable of being considerably distended by vascularization. The distal 84 GRIFFIN. surface is slightly convex, and is marked by fine parallel ridges. The anterior angle is produced into a sharp, slightly spiral point, from 4 to 6 millimeters in length, over which are scattered small backwardly directed spines. Upon reaching the base of the penis, the seminal furrow passes distally upon the anterior surface of the cylindrical base of the organ and then follows a somewhat spiral course to the tip of the prepuce. A shelf-like lamella springing from the right side of the seminal furrow, which meets the overhanging margin of the left side of the furrow, practically forms a closed tube along the bottom of the seminal furrow for the passage of sperm from the genital oriface to the copulatory organ. NERVOUS SYSTEM. The circumcesophageal ring formed by the central nervous system is large and but loosely attached to the cesophagus. It is enveloped by an extremely fine, cottony form of connective tissue; the connective tissue unites those nerves which pass most directly from the cerebral, pleural, and pedal ganglia to the body wall, and thus a small space surrounding the pharynx is almost completely separated from the large body hzemocel. The various ganglia are large, but not all distinct without care- ful dissection because of their close fusion. Ganglia and nerves are covered by thick connective-tissue sheaths. The cerebral ganglia (fig. 38, Plate VI) are fused into a single mass which shows no median constriction cr other sign of its double origin. The optic and rhinophoral nerves arise from its dorsal surface; nerves to the other parts of the head spring from the anterior margin. The cerebro-pleural and cerebro-pedal connectives are either separated by a slit, or are so loosely united by connective tissue that they can be easily distinguished. The pleural and pedal ganglia of each side are closely fused. The pedal com- missure is large, and a narrow parapedal commissure is also present upon the posterior face of the pedal commissure; these two may be separated by a narrow space toward the right side. The visceral and parietal ganglia are closely fused to each other and to the right pleural ganglion, but are connected to the left pleural ganglion by a long and fairly thick pleuro-visceral connective. The cerebro-buccal connectives arise from the sides of the cerebral ganglia, just in front of the roots of the cerebro- pedal connectives. They make an unusually wide loop around the sides of the wsophagus and join the sides of the buccal ganglia instead of the posterior surfaces, as is more commonly ANATOMY OF ACLESIA FREERI. 85 the case. The buccal ganglia are comparatively large. They give origin to the stomatogastric nerves, as well as to those which pass to the muscles of the buccal mass and to the salivary glands. Each rhinophoral nerve ends in a small ganglion, lying at the base of the inrolled, sensory surface of the rhinophore, from which a number of fine nerves pass to all parts of the sensory epithelium. There is no apparent tentacular ganglion, the ten- tacular nerve ending in a network of fine branches under the inrolled surface of the tentacle. The nerve of the oral lobe ends similarly. Several nerves spring from each pleural gang- lion and pass to the lateral and dorsal walls of the anterior half of the body. A large nerve from each pedal ganglion passes backward from along the junction of the foot and wall of the body to the end of the tail. Branches pass from it to the parapodia and the posterior half of the foot. Other nerves, arising from the pedal ganglia, innervate the parapodia (fig. 33, Plate VI, 14 and 15) and the anterior half of the foot (37). A small, much-branched nerve passes from the right pedal gang- lion to the penis, its muscles, and the body wall in its immediate neighborhood. A large genital nerve extends from the visceral ganglion to a small genital ganglion. From it some small nerves enter the in- tegument around the vulva, while the principal nerve runs along the sperm-oviduct until it reaches the point where the herma- phrodite duct crosses the oviduct, traversing several small ganglia on the way. At this point is a larger ganglion from which the principal nerves of the albumen and hermaphrodite glands arise. A much smaller nerve which arises from the left side of the visceral ganglion (fig. 33, Plate VI, 23) runs, without any branches, along the right side of the body to the rectum, where - it enters a small rectal ganglion; from this a nerve passes along the rectum toward the intestine. A third nerve, also very fine, arises from the right side of the visceral ganglion (fig. 33, Plate VI, 26), and runs directly backward; this was traced to the duct of the spermatheca and to the pericardial wall. The parietal ganglion gives rise to a single, large nerve which passes to the osphradial ganglion (fig. 33, Plate VI, 27) ; the branchial nerve arises from this and passes into the base of the gill. In life, the individual ganglia or groups of nerve cells are vivid orange in color, and a better idea of their arrangement can be obtained in fresh than in preserved specimens. The IFFIN. 86 GRIFFIN color is contained in the gigantic nerve-cells of the centers, some of which are large enough to be visible to the naked eye. The cerebral ganglion consists of a single triangular mass of nerve-cells, the apex of the triangle being dorsal. The angles of the mass are formed by the principal collections of cells (each of which is a group of loosely aggregated cell masses), while the central portion of the ganglion is less dense. Each buccal ganglion consists of one large, and a dozen or more smaller, cell masses, each quite separate from the others. The broad but short buccal commissure contains no nerve-cells. Each pleural ganglion consists of one large, and several small, cell masses. Each of the visceral and parietal ganglia contains several cell masses, while similar groups of cells are scattered along the entire length of the left pleuro-visceral connective; there- fore, there is a continuous series of ganglionic masses con- necting the left pleural and the visceral ganglia. The pedal ganglia are each composed of more than a dozen small cell masses. While these extend into the pedal commis- sure, the central part of the latter remains free from them. The pleural commissure contains no nerve-cell masses. The cell masses of the pedal and pleural ganglia are plainly sepa- rated. Fie. 1 2 3 4 Fics. 5 Fig. 7 Fie. 8. 9 Fig. 10 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20 ILLUSTRATIONS. PLATE I. (All drawings on this plate are natural size.) . Aclesia freeri sp. nov. . Tentacle of Aclesia freeri sp. nov. with large villi. . Tentacle of Aclesia freeri sp. nov. . Large villus of body fully extended. and 6. Villi. . Rhinophore, showing the posterior grooved surface. (Drawn by Espinosa.) PLATE II. Branchial cavity opened by splitting and folding back the parapodia. . Posterior extremity of an expanded, creeping aclesia. (Drawn by Espinosa.) PLATE III. . Ventral view of head. . Tentacle. . Digestive organs of Aclesia freeri sp. nov. The liver is drawn as if it were a transparent substance through which the coils of the intestine can be seen. The intestinal artery is seen entering the liver above the right margin of the stomach. The hermaphrodite gland lies back of the liver, surrounded by coils of the intestine. Pharynx, esophagus, crop, gizzard, and stomach, opened by a dorsal incision. A portion of the wall of the stomach containing the hepatic pore, showing how the aperture is closed by the fleshy lateral pads and the anterior chitinous plate. Lateral view of the pharynx. Only the anterior end of the pharynx is attached: to the lips. The left salivary gland lies upon the dorsal surface of the esophagus; the right some distance below. The buccal ganglia show behind the right salivary gland. Anterior view of the interior of the gizzard. Basal view of a large stomach plate. The axial column is clearly defined. x 2. Lateral view of the same plate. x 2. Lateral view of one of the small plates situated on the anterior margin of the gizzard. x 4. . A small spine from the stomach. » 4.5. (Drawn by Espinosa.) 87 Fig. 30. 31. - 82. GRIFFIN. PuaTE IV. . Outline of csophagus, crop-gizzard, stomach, and hepatic ducts, showing the course of the stomatogastric nerves. 1.5. . The ventral surface of the anterior genital mass. Natural size. . The reproductive organs lying in their natural positions. The anterior genital mass lies upon the surface of the liver. Natural size. . Outline of the right side of the head of an Aclesia freeri sp. nov. showing the everted penis. Natural size. . The dorsal surface of the prepuce. xX 4. . A tentacle having an unusual development of villi. . Lateral view of the radula. x 4. . Dorsal view of the radula. x 4. : . Ventral view of the radula. x 4. (Drawn by Espinosa.) PLATE V. Arterial system of Aclesia freeri sp. nov. 1, pharyngeal artery. 2, artery of pleuro-pedal ganglion. 3, artery of median portion of foot. 4, artery of right body wall and parapodia. 5, aorta. 6, arteries entering wall of spermatheca. 7, artery of body wall in the region of the seminal furrow. 8, artery of sperm-oviduct and left side of vulva. 9, artery of sperm-oviduct and vulva. 10, artery of sperm-oviduct. 11, osphradial artery. 12, genital artery. 13, artery of hermaphrodite duct. 14, artery of oviduct (albumen gland.) 15, artery of mucous (nidamental) gland. 16, artery of right side of albumen gland. 17, artery of ventral surface of albumen gland. 18 and 19, intestinal artery. 20, hepatic branch. 21 and 23, deep hepatic branches. 22, gastric artery. 24, artery of left side of foot, left body wall, and parapodium. 25, artery of foot. 26 and 27, artery passing along dorsal side of crop and ceso- phagus. 28, branch to dorsal wall of head. 29, branch to ventral wall of head. The auricle and ventricle in the pericardium. Natural size. The base of the ventricle, to show the large auriculo-ventricular valves, and the arrangement of muscles in the wall of the ventricle. The wall of the auricle is spread out around the base of the ventricle. x 4. (Drawn by Griffin and Espinosa.) ANATOMY OF ACLESIA FREERI. 89 PLATE VI. Fic. 33. Nervous system of Aclesia freeri. sp. nov. 1, nerves to central and inner parts of the pharynx. 2 and 3, nerves to lateral surface of pharynx. 4, nerve to external circular muscle of pharynx. 5, nerve to posterior and ventral surface of pharynx. 6, nerve to lips and anterior part of head. 7, nerve to salivary gland. 8, penial nerve, supplying penis, retractor penis, and the body wall in the vicinity. 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, and 15, nerves passing to body wall, parapodia, and lateral part of foot. 13, the index line is directed to the point where a nerve (24) to the central portion of the foot emerges from beneath the pleural ganglion. Its origin is from the ventral surface of the pedal ganglion. 16, principal pedal nerve. 17, genital ganglion. 18, nerve td sperm-oviduct. 19, small ganglion on ventral surface of sperm oviduct. 20, continuation of trunk of genital nerve. 21, ganglion situated on the rectum, about 7 millimeters from the anus. 22, intestinal nerve. 23,nerve arising from visceral ganglion, which passes to the rectal (anal) ganglion. 24, pedal nerve to central portion of foot. 25, corresponding nerve of left side. 26, nerve traced to spermatheca and pericardial wall. 27, osphradial ganglion. 28, branchial nerve. 29, ganglion situated beside the spermatocyst. 30, ganglion situated at the crossing of the hermaphrodite duct and the oviduct. 30’, nerve to oviduct (albumen gland). 30”, nerve following the hermaphrodite duct to the hermaphrodite gland. 31, nerve to region around the mouth. 32, nerve to oral lobe. The branch on the other side of the fork passes to the integument of the anterior part of the head, dorsal to the mouth. 33, tentacular nerve. 34, main trunk of nerve passing to the oral region. 35, stomatogastric nerve. 36, rhinophoral nerve, ending in ganglion from which numerous fine nerves arise. 37, nerves to anterior portion of foot. 38 and 39, nerves to left body wall and parapodia. 40, left pedal nerve. cr. b. c, cerebro-buccal connective. cr. gn, cerebral ganglion. p. gn. R, right pedal ganglion. 90 Fig. GRIFFIN. p. c, pedal commissure. par. gn, parietal ganglion. The right pleural ganglion lies between the pedal and parietal ganglia, closely joined to the latter. v. gn, visceral ganglion. p. p. €, para-pedal commissure. pl. gn. L, left pleural ganglion. p. gn. L, left pedal ganglion. cr. pl. c, left cerebro-pleural connective. cr. p. €, left cerebro-pedal connective. b. gn, buccal ganglia. 34. Ventral view of pedal, pleural, parietal, and visceral ganglia. 35. Central nervous system of a specimen of Aclesia freeri sp. nov. in which the viscero-parietal ganglion is some distance back of the esophageal nerve ring, approaching the condition found in Tethys (Aplysia). c, cerebral ganglion. p, left pedal ganglion. p’, right pedal ganglion. pl, left pleural ganglion. pl’, right pleural ganglion. p. par, pleuro-parietal connective. pl. v, pleuro-visceral connective. V. par, viscero-parietal ganglion. 36. Right lateral view of cerebral, pedal, pleural, and parietal ganglia. (Drawn by Griffin.) TEXT FIGURES. 1. Diagram of the pallial complex of Aclesia freeri sp. nov. A, anal papilla; bv, afferent branchial vein; m7, mantle ridge, 7. e., the projecting free margin of the reduced mantle; n, nephridium; 0, osphradium; par, parapodium; p. e., pericardium; v, vein of left side of body running beneath the pericardium and nephridium; vu, vulva; «, aperture by which the blood from the hemoccl and veins of the right side of the body enters the branchial vein. 2. Outline of a mandibular plate of Aclesia freeri sp. nov. The figure within the outline represents four of the rods of which the plate is composed. The concave border of the plate is anterior. Actual dimensions, 5 millimeters high, 3 millimeters wide at bottom, 1 millimeters wide at top. 3. Central tooth, first and second inner laterals, and four outer lateral teeth of the radula of Aclesia freeri sp. nov. 4, Cuticular spines or thorns upon the inner surface of the pharynx of Aclesia freeri n. sp. The four spines at the left are from the anterior, the ones to the right from the posterior region of the part of the pharynx thus armed. 5. Diagram of the reproductive system of Aclesia freeri sp. nov. 1, vulva; 2, copulatory recess; 3, spermatocyst; 4, mucous gland (nidamental gland); 5, proximal portion of oviduct; 6, album- inogenous portion of oviduct (albumen gland); 7, hermaphrodite gland; 8, hermaphrodite duct; 9, ovarian portion of sperm-oviduct; 10, spermatic portion of sperm-oviduct; 11, spermatheca. GRIFFIN : ACLESIA FREERI SP. NOY.] (PHIL. Journ. Scr., VII, D, No. 2 ACLESIA FREERI sp. nov. PLATE I. GRIFFIN: ACLESIA FREERI SP. NOY.] [Pui. Journ. Scr., VII, D, No. 2. Fig. 9. Posterior extremity of Aclesia freeri sp. nov. PLATE ll. GRIFFIN : ACLESIA FREERI SP. NOV. ] . [Purit. Journ. Scr., VII, D, No. 2. PLATE Il. ANATOMY OF ACLESIA FREERI sp. nov. No. 2 Vil, D, [Puit. Journ. Scr, GRIFFIN : ACLESIA FREERI SP. NOY. ] ANATOMY OF ACLESIA FREERI sp. nov. PLATE IV. GRIFFIN : ACLESIA FREERI SP. NOV. ] [Pur. Journ. Ser, VII, D, No. 2. PLATE V. ARTERIAL SYSTEM OF ACLESIA FREERI sp. nov. GRIFFIN : ACLESIA PREERI SP. NOV. | [Pui. Journ. Scr, VII, D, No. 2. PLATE VI. NERVOUS SYSTEM OF ACLESIA FREERI sp. nov. THE PHILIPPINE JOURNAL OF SCIENCE. D. General Biology, Ethnology and Anthropology. Vol. VII, No. 2, April, 1912. A NEW PHILIPPINE FIDDLER-CRAB. By A. S. PEARSE. (From the Zodlogical Laboratory, University of the Philippines.) The most abundant species of fiddler-crab along the esteros near Manila has not been described. Believing the species to be new, the writer prepared the following description while he was serving as assistant professor of zodlogy in the University of the Philippines. Uca rathbunz sp. nov. Description.—Length of carapace about three-fifths its great- est breadth, which is at the acute antero-lateral angles. Carapace not very convex, smooth, anterior margin somewhat arcuate; the regions all recognizable, but not clearly defined; posterior border one-half the greatest breadth; lateral margins not converging posteriorly. The crenulate line that bounds the dorsal plane on each side is well marked two-thirds of the way back and convergent posteriorly. The breadth of the front, measured between the bases of the eye-stalks, is about one- twentieth the greatest breadth of the carapace. The front is spatulate, and its raised border is wider at the ventral margin than the central groove. Orbits somewhat oblique; borders sinuous, both crenulate; crenulations on the lower border progressively larger away from median line; a line of fine crenulations below all the upper border except the outer quarter; a row of tubercles on the floor of the orbit inside the middle third of the lower border. Larger cheliped of male with hand nearly 38 times greater than length of carapace; merus finely granulated on outer sur- face, all margins denticulate, denticles larger at superior distal angle; carpus granulated on upper and outer surfaces, hairy 91 92 PEARSE. and denticulate on antero-internal margin. Hand with palm somewhat flattened, granulate, both borders well defined, upper border hairy on its compressed rounded posterior margin; oblique granulated ridges on inner surface of palm both well Outer surface of cheliped of male; b, front; c, inner surface of cheliped of male; d, dorsal view of male. Fig. 1.—Uca rathbune sp. nov. X 1.5. a, NEW PHILIPPINE FIDDLER-CRAB. 93 defined, outer one most prominent, a well-marked elongated depression between them. Fingers rather slender, strongly flattened, minutely granular; both have a longitudinal groove on the external surface, but that in the fixed finger is the deeper ; fixed finger tapering, nearly straight, hooked at the top, smooth on lower margin and denticulate on inner margin; movable finger slightly arcuate, bearing 2 strong spines on inner margin, one at the tip and the other about one-fourth of the length of the inner margin from it; most individuals also have a strong den- ticle on the inner margins of eath of the fingers about one-third of the distance from the proximal end. Merus of last pair of legs somewhat foliaceous. Color of living male.—Dorsal surface of carapace, dark brown (65)? (almost black) with a transverse yellowish-white (141) band back of the front and sometimes another spot of the same color in the center of the back; eye-stalks light brown (137). Large chela with fingers and inside of palm white, outside of palm whitish or green above (341) and fuscous (102) below. Other walking legs gray (222); back of merus of last pair of legs white; abdomen bluish (402). The above description was taken from 69 males and 8 females, collected May 22, 1911, at an estuary three blocks south of the Philippine Medical School, Manila, P. I. The 10 largest males gave the following average measurements: Length of carapace, 14.64 mm; breadth of carapace, 24.40; length of chela 40.3. This species closely resembles U. dussumieri (Milne-Edwards) ,” but can be distinguished from it by the constant presence of a tooth on the inner margin of the movable finger near the tip, by the well-marked lines bounding lateral borders of the dorsal surface, and by the less salient character of the 2 oblique ridges on the inner surface of the palm. Miss M. J. Rathbun has kindly compared two specimens of this species with specimens of 13 narrow-fronted species from the Indo-Pacific region in the United States National Museum. She reports that U. rathbune is most nearly related to U. wrvillei (Milne-Edwards) and makes the following observations: Shape of carapace much as in U. urvillei. The orbital margin is a little more oblique. Frontal furrow longer, not triangular and sharp pointed at the extremity as in urvillei, but slightly spatulate. The accessory line of granules above the lower margin of the orbit is much shorter, occupying * The numbers following colors refer to Klincksieck, P., et Valette, T. Code des couleurs. Paris (1908). * For references, see Alcock, Jour. Asiat. Soc. Bengal (1900), 69, 362. 94 PEARSE. less than one-third of the middle of the orbit, and composed of 4 or 5 granules (or on one side of one specimen it is broken into 8 smaller granules) ; in wrvillei the line of granules occupies as much as one-half the length of the orbit. The granulation of wrist and hand is finer than in the related species and the granules on the lower edge of the palm are more prominent. The groove of the immovable finger is more deeply impressed at its origin. The fingers are narrower and les» flattened; the immovable one has an enlarged tubercle near its middle, and the movable finger has two enlarged tubercles or small teeth, one near the middle and one not far from the tip. The merus joints of the ambulatory legs are not so wide as in urvillei, the difference being most aougee ole in those of the last pair. ILLUSTRATION. TEXT FIGURE. Fic. 1. Uca rathbunz sp. nov. x 1.5. a, outer surface of cheliped of male. b, front. c, inner surface of cheliped of male. d, dorsal view of male. 95 THE PHILIPPINE JOURNAL OF SCIENCE. D. General Biology, Ethnology and Anthropology. Vol. VII, No. 2, April, 1912. ZWEI NEUE LUCANIDEN DER PHILIPPINEN. Von CARL FELSCHE. (Leipzig, Germany.) Prosopocoilus palawanicus sp. nov. (Tafel I, fig. 1.) é Grésse und Statur des P. buddha Westw. Schwarz, Kopf matt, Halsschild massig, Fliigeldecken stark glanzend. Kopf fast quadratisch, der Clypeus rund, in der Mitte des Randes mit einem Knoten, die Flache tief ausgehohlt, der Stirnkiel bis zum ausseren Rande der Mandibeln reichend, einen nach riick- warts gerundeten missig tiefen Bogen bildend, Stirn und Scheitel eine ebene, stumpf dreieckige, seitlich unbestimmt begrenzte Flache bildend, die ganze Oberflache fein und dicht gekornt; die Augenkiele wenig hervortretend, das Auge kaum halb durch- setzend, der Seitenrand hinter den Augen etwas gerundet erwei- tert; die Lippe breit, vorn einen flachen, vollig gleichmdssigen Bogen bildend, das Kinn dreieckig, die Unterseite des Kopfes, mit Ausnahme der Kehle welche weitlaufig fein punktiert und glanzend ist, dicht und fein gekérnt; die Mandibeln sind etwas linger als Kopf und Halsschild zusammen; unmittelbar an der Basis haben sie einen breit dreieckigen, dariiber, etwa am ersten Viertel, einen schlankeren Zahn, von diesem bis zum letzten Viertel sind sie breit, parallelseitig, ganz leicht geschwungen, der letzte Teil ist plotzlich stark verschmilert, sodass der vorher- gehende am Ende zahnartig vortritt, der letzte Teil einwarts gebogen in eine starke Gabel endend. Thorax quer ziemlich gewolbt, der Vorderrand in der Mitte vorgezogen, der Hinterrand gerade, die Seitenrander parallel, und im letzten Drittel sehr leicht geschweift, die Vorderecken spitz, unmittelbar neben ihnen eine kleine Ausrandung, die ganze Flache fein gek6érnt, dazwischen sehr zerstreut eingestochene Punkte, die Mitte etwas glanzend. Fliigeldecken schwarz, mit sehr schwachem Erzglanz, auf der Scheibe dusserst fein zerstreut punktiert, stark glanzend, die abfallenden Teile seitlich und hinten dusserst fein gerunzelt. Die Beine gleichen denen des P. buddha, nur fehlt den Mittel- schienen der feine Dorn. Lange incl. der Mand., 49 mm. 1086423 97 98 FELSCHE. PALAWAN, Iwahig, P. I. (C. M. Weber). Typus ¢ in meiner Sammlung unter No. 11631, des Bureau of Science. Aegus currani sp. nov. (Tafel I, fig. 2.) é Von der Grosse der groéssten A. platyodon Parry aber schlanker, von diesem wie den anderen mir bekannten Aegus durch den Frontalkiel verschieden. Kopf doppelt so breit als lang, parallelseitig; Kopfschild sehr kurz, steil abfallend etwas ausgehohlt, am Vorderrand sehr leicht geschwungen, der Fron- talkiel, welcher bis zur inneren Basis der Mandibeln reicht, ist vierzahnig, die beiden mittleren Zahne gross, mit breiter Basis, durch einen dreieckigen Ausschnitt getrennt, die 4usseren kaum ein Viertel so gross; hinter diesem Kiel die Flaiche des Kopfes in etwa in ein Viertel ihrer Lange leicht ansteigend, dann eben, dicht gek6érnt, vorn und an den Seiten mit zerstreuten groben Punkten. Mandibeln so lang als Kopf und Halsschild zusam- men, von der Basis an leicht nach aussen, im letzten Drittel ziemlich kraftig nach innen gebogen, die Bezahnung bei beiden gleich; nahe der Basis ein dreieckiger etwas nach unten gerich- teter Zahn, dariiber, noch etwas unter der Mitte, ein dhnlich grosser, dann, etwa in der Mitte, ein viel kleinerer und endlich im letzten Drittel, gleichmassig verteilt, noch fiinf Zahnchen. Halsschild anderthalb mal so breit als lang, hinten und an den Seiten gerade, vorn, wie gewohnlich geschweift, die hinteren Winkel breit gerundet, die vorderen vorgezogen aber schriag nach innen abgestutzt; die Flache dicht gekérnt, in der Mitte eine schwache Langsfurche, auf der Flache einzelne grobe Punkte, besonders in der Furche, an allen Randern besondere grosse Punkte, die so dicht stehen, dass die Sculptur netzartig erscheint. Fliigeldecken jede mit sechs ziemlich tiefen Streifen, die im Grunde kettenartig punktiert sind, die Zwischenraume ziemlich gewolbt fein punktiert, der neben der Naht auf seiner inneren Halfte ziemlich grob und fein, alle an der Basis sehr grob runzelig punktiert ; diese Sculptur erstreckt sich auf dem sechsten Zwischenraum bis ziemlich zur Mitte und tritt auch mehr oder weniger auf die angrenzenden Streifen iiber; der abfallende Teil der Fliigeldecken ist massig grob, aber sehr dicht punktiert. Die Vorderschienen wie gewohnlich gezahnt, der vorderste Zahn einfach, die mittleren Schienen mit zwei, die hinteren mit einem Zahn. Lange incl. der Mand., 55 mm. LUZON, La Laguna, Santa Maria, P. I., (H. M. Curran). Typus ¢ in meiner Sammlung unter No. 12721, des Bureau of Science. ILLUSTRATIONEN. TAFEL I. (Ad nat. del J. Castro.) Fic. 1. Prosopocoilus palawanicus sp. nov. 2. Aegus currani sp. nov. 99 ‘| Wa4vl “AOU ‘ds "aou ‘ds luedino snBay "zg “Bl4 snolueme|ed snjlo00do0solg ‘TT ‘Bl4 2 ON ‘d ‘ITA “10S ‘Nuno “11Ng) [NdGINVoOO’] aNaN WMZ :aHOSTIY THE PHILIPPINE JOURNAL OF SCIENCE. D. General Biology, Ethnology and Anthropology. Vol. VII, No. 2, April, 1912. EIN NEUES APION VON DEN PHILIPPINEN. Von HANS WAGNER. (Dahlem, Berlin, Germany.) Apion (Pseudopiezotrachelus) schultzei sp. nov. (Fig. 1.) Dem Apion (Pseudopiezotrachelus) unicolor Roel. ungemein nahe stehend, durch folgende Punkte von ihm verschieden. Der Riissel ist in beiden Geschlechtern etwas weniger gekriimmt, beim ¢ wenn auch schwach, so doch deutlich von der Fiihler- insertion zur Spitze verjiingt, beim ¢° kaum schwiacher als beim $ (bei unicolor 2 fast glatt und ziemlich stark glanzend) sculp- tiert; der Thorax ist um geringes langer, dessen apicale Hin- schniirung merklich kraftiger, die Seiten des apicalen Teiles (vor der Hinschniirung) erscheinen mehr winkelig und der Vorder- rand ist in der Mitte deutlich eingebuchtet; die Punktierung ist etwas groéber und namentlich dichter; die Fliigeldecken erschei- nen infolge der etwas geringeren seitlichen Rundung ein wenig gestreckter ; ihre Zwischenréiume sind etwas starker chagriniert und dazwischen von feinen Querrunzelchen durchzogen. In allen librigen Punkten stimmt die Art mit wnicolor vollig itiberein. Die Art lag mir in 8 vollig iibereinstimmenden Exemplaren (3 ¢ und 2 2) von folgenden Localitaten zur Beschreibung vor: Linge, incl. Riissel, 3 mm. LUZON, Batan, Lamao (H. H. Stevens). Typus, ¢ und ¢ No. 9841 in der Sammlung des Bureau of Science, Manila, P. I. LUZON, Pampanga, Mt. Arayat (W. Williamson). Cotypen, No. 2986; 4 Exemplare, davon 2 Exemplare mir freundlichst iiberlassen. In dem Material, welches mir von Herrn W. Schultze in Ma- nila, dem die vorstehende Art freundlichst dediciert sei, mitge- teilt wurde, befanden sich noch 4 Exemplare des Apion versu- tum Faust, die sich—nach Vergleich mit der Type—nur durch etwas helleres Braun des ganzen Korpers und durch die helleren, 101 102 WAGNER. mehr rotlichgelbbraunen Beine von der typischen Form unter- scheiden ; simmtliche Exemplare stammen von Manila, Luzon (C. S. Banks No. 5275; und B. Arce, No. 6150), ein Belegexemplar wurde gleichfalls freundlichst meiner Collection tiberlassen. Fic. 1.—Kopf und Fic. 2.—Kopf und horax von Thorax von Apion schult- Apion wuni- zei Sp. Nov. color Roel. Der leichteren Orientierung wegen habe ich es fiir gut befun- den die Characterisierung der vorstehenden neuen Art mit einer mittels des Abbé’schen Zeichenapparates angefertigten Skizze der in Betracht kommenden K6rperteile zu vervollstandigen und habe zum Vergleich dazu auch eine solche iiber Apion (Pseudo- piezotrachelus) unicolor Roel. (Fig. 2) beigegeben; beide Ab- bildungen beziehen sich auf das méannliche Geschlecht der betreffenden Species. ILLUSTRATIONEN. TEXTFIGUREN. Fic. 1. Kopf und Thorax von Apion schultzei sp. nov. X20. 2. Kopf und Thorax von Apion unicolor Roel. x 20. 108 THE PHILIPPINE JOURNAL OF SCIENCE. D. General Biology, Ethnology and Anthropology. Vol. VII, No. 2, April, 1912. EINE NEUE GATTUNG DER DISCOLOMIDAE (COLEOPTERA) AUS DER ORIENTALISCHEN REGION. Von K. M. HELLER. (Kgl. Zoologisches und Anthropologisch-—Ethnographisches Museum, Dresden, Germany.) Nachdem D. Sharp! gezeigt hat, dass die kugeligen kleinen Hinterhiiften seiner Discolominen-Subfamilie nur die sichtbaren Enden von in Wirklichkeit sehr breiten, aber vom Metasternum und von der ersten Bauchschiene verdeckten queren Hiiften sind, macht es Hugh Scott? sehr wahrscheinlich, dass auch die Gat- tungen Aphanocephalus und Fallia zu den bereits von Horn ? als Familie vorgeschlagenen Discolomidae gehéren, was E. Csiki + als bereits erwiesen annimmt und dementsprechend 8 Discolo- miden Gattungen auffiihrt, darunter auch Aphanocephalus. Letztere war bisher die einzige Gattung der Familie, die ausser in der neotropischen auch in der orientalischen Region ver- breitet ist. Es ist daher eine tiberraschende Tatsache, dass mir durch die Sammlung des Bureau of Science in Manila noch eine weitere, neue Gattung, die jedoch eine nahere Verwandtschaft mit Holophygus als mit Aphanocephalus aufweist, bekannt ge- worden ist und weiter unten ausfiihrlicher beschrieben werden kann; sie lasst sich nach den zumeist nur den Diagnosen entnommenen Gattungsmerkmalen der Discolomidae (mit Aus- * Biol. Centr. Americana, Coleop. (1899), 2, pt. 1, 497. *Fauna Hawaiensis (1908), 3, pt. 5, 432. * Proc. Am. Phil. Soc. (1878), 17, 556. “Coleopterorum Catalogus. Berlin (1910), pars 18, 31. 105 106 HELLER. nahme von Coccidophilus) wie folgt in einer tabellarischen Uber- sicht der Gattungen einreihen: A’. Tarsen viergliedrig, Kérper linger als breit, 9.-11. Fihlerglied eine lose gegliederte Keule bildend. Discogenia Kolbe. Ostafrika. A’*. Tarsen dreigliedrig. B”*. Seitenrand der Decken nicht, oder wenn abgesetzt, dann weder wellen- formig noch mit einer Reihe entfernter Knétchen. C*. Fihlergeissel neungliedrig, Kérper fast kreisrund oder kurz ellip- tisch, Fliigeldecken ohne abgesetzten Seitenrand. Discoloma Er. Central- und Siidamerika. C*. Fuhlergeissel 7-8 gliedrig, Kérper gestreckt, elliptisch, Hinterhiiften weit voneinander getrennt. X*. Keule ungegliedert, 4. und 5. Geisselglied an Lange wenig ver- schieden (die 3 letzten Geisselglieder zusammen viel langer als das vierte Geisselglied). Hinterhiiften klein, kugelig. Fallia Sharp. Hawai, Central Amerika. X *. Keule zweigliedrig, 4. und 5. Geisselglied an Lange sehr ver- schieden (die 3 letzten Geisselglieder zusammen nur so lang wie das vierte). Hinterhiiften quer bis an die Hinterbrust- episternen reichend. Coccidophilus Bréthes. Argentinien. C*. Fithlergeissel achtgliedrig, Koérper fast kreisrund, Fligeldecken- seitenrand schmal abgesetzt, Halsschild an der Wurzel am brei- testen, Geissel relative diinn (Keule ungefahr viermal so dick wie das letzte Geisselglied). Aphanocephalus Woll. Hinterindien, China, Japan, Brasilien. B*. Seitenrand der Decken breit abgesetzt, wellenfoérmig, mit einer Reihe von ungefahr sechs entfernten, knotchenartigen Anschwellungen. D*. Fiihlergeissel achtgliedrig, Halsschild nahe der Mitte am brei- testen, nach vorn mehr als nach hinten verengt, Fiihlerkeule kurz keulenférmig, nur doppelt so breit wie das letzte Geissel- glied, Schenkel gezahnt. Parmaschema gen. nov. Philippinen. D’*. Fihlergeissel achtgliedrig, Halsschildseitenrand nicht wellen- formig. E*. Halsschild in der Mitte am breitesten, Fihlerkeule kurz keulen- formig. Notiophygus Gory. Sitidafrika. E*.Halsschild an der Wurzel am breitesten, Keule birnformig, Hinterhtifte weit getrennt. Cassidoloma Kolbe. Ost und Westafrika. D*. Fiihlergeissel neungliedrig, Halsschildseitenrand wellenférmig, Fiihlerkeule gestreckt keulenformig. Holophygus Sharp. Centralamerika. Die neue Gattung sei wie folgt charakterisiert : PARMASCHEMA gen. nov. Genere Holophygo Sharp similis, sed antennae octoarticulatae, articulo ultimo breviter clavato haud articulato; prothorax trans- versus, lateribus fortiter rotundatis haud undulatis; femora ante EINE NEUE GATTUNG DER DISCOLOMIDAE. 107 apicem subter minute dentata; mesosternum inter coxas inter- medias haud productum. Typus: Parmaschema nodimargo sp. nov. K6perform einer kleinen Cassida ahnlich. Gefliigelt. Kopf mit querem, gew6élbtem, von der Stirn durch eine gerade Naht getrenntem, am Vorderrand leicht ausgebuchtetem, Epistom. Lippentaster zweigliedrig (?), das vorletzte Glied aufgeblasen und gekriimmt, viel grésser als das konische letzte. Kiefertaster dreigliedrig, das zweite Glied quer, das dritte gestreckt kegel- férmig. Fiihler vor den vorstehenden Augen unter dem Seiten- rand des Kopfes eingefiigt, 8-gliedrig; das Endglied breit, keulenformig angegliedert. Halsschild quer, am Hinterrande beider- seits leicht gebuchtet. Schildchen drei- eckig, sehr klein. Fliigeldecken breiter als das Halsschild mit flach ausgebreite- tem Seitenrande. Hinterleib sechsringe- lig, erstes Bauchsternit so lang wie die beiden folgenden zusammen, mit kurzem zwischen die Hinterhiiften hineinragen- §c.1—Parmaschema nodi- dem Fortsatz. Alle Hiiften scheinbar 90” “™ “°°” klein, kugelig und einander genihert. Tarsen dreigliedrig, das dritte Glied mindestens so lang wie die ersten zwei Glieder zusammengenommen. Parmaschema nodimargo sp. nov. Badius, crebre punctatus, subtilissius parceque pilosus, elytro- rum thoracisque margine pallidiore, subpellucido ac subtilius punctato, corpore subter, antennis pedibusque testaceis; protho- race transverso, margine laterali deplanato ac rotundato, maxima latitudine basi propiore, in dimidia parte basali crenulato, mar- gine antico sinuato basi utrinque subsinuato; elytris margine basali utrinque intra humeros subsinuato, angulis humeralibus subrecte rotundatis ac extantibus, margine laterali expanso, undulato, nodulis sex glabriusculis remote seriatis apicem versus decrescentibus; metasterno segmentoque abdominali primo sat remote fortiterque punctatis, segmentis reliquis medium versus parcius punctatis; epipleuris in nodulis singulis obsoletis puncto majore. Long. 1.8, lat. hum. 1.5 mm. Patria: LUZON, Laguna, Lazaan (legit Charles S. Banks). Typus No. 11488 in Coll. Ent., Bureau of Science, Manila, P. I. Kastanienbraun, tiberall sehr fein und sparsam behaart; K6r- 108 HELLER. perunterseite, Epistom, Fiihler, Beine, der ausgebreitete Rand des Halsschildes und der Fliigeldecken heller. Epistom doppelt so breit wie lang, braunlich gelb, etwas glan- zend, fein und zerstreut punktiert, Stirn dunkler, relativ grob und dicht punktiert. Zweites Glied der Fiihlergeissel fast kuge- lig, das dritte langer als eines der iibrigen, Keule so lang wie die drei vorhergehenden Glieder zusammen, 14 mal so lang wie breit. Halsschild doppelt so lang wie breit, der Seitenrand breit abgesetzt und flach, etwas durchscheinend und fein, die Hals- schildscheibe gewolbt und grob punktiert, Basalrand beiderseits, der Vorderrand einfach ausgebuchtet, Seitenrand in der Basal- halfte stark gerundet und fein gezadhnelt, in der Apicalhalfte kaum merklich concay verlaufend, in der Mitte der Ausschweif- ung mit zwei mikroskopisch kleinen Hinkerbungen, Hinterecken sehr stumpf, Vorderecken rechtwinkelig verrundet. Fliigel- decken so lang wie breit, Basal- und der wellenfo6rmige Seitenrand in der Hauptrichtung rechtwinkelig aufeinanderstossend, ersterer vor den vorstehenden, abgerundeten Schulterecken etwas ausge- buchtet, mit Ausnahme des Seitenrandes grob und noch dichter als das Halsschild punktiert, jener mit einer Reihe von 6 nach hinten zu kleiner werdenden rundlichen, glanzenden, Schwielen, die grésser als die sie trennenden Zwischenraume sind; auf den breit umgeschlagenen Seitenrand (den Epipleuren) sind diese Schwielen wenig angedeutet und nur durch einen grésseren Po- renpunkt markiert. K6rperunterseite; namentlich die Hinter- brust und das erste Bauchsegment massig dicht und kraftig, die iibrigen Bauchsegmente nur an den Seiten deutlich punktiert. Aussere Kante an der Unterseite der Schenkel vor der Spitze in Form eines stumpfen kleinen Zahnes ausgezogen. Drittes Tarsenglied viel langer als die beiden Wurzelglieder zusammen- genommen. Die interessante Art wurde in fiinf Exemplaren von Herrn Charles S. Banks, Government Entomologist in Manila, im mittleren Teil von Luzon, in Laguna, entdeckt. ILLUSTRATIONEN. TEXTFIGUREN. Fic. 1. Parmaschema nodimargo gen. et sp. nov. 109 (on oer oe Hee q ise? Sama ati Wr i ay Lana Rui } i ; ; y 5 Yi ! % f if i REVIEW. Biology. General and Medical. By Joseph McFarland, M. D., with 160 illustrations. Pp. 440. Cloth. Philadelphia and London, W. B. Saun- ders Company, 1910. Many teachers of biology should have welcomed the appear- ance of McFarland’s book. It presents many subjects to which it has been difficult to introduce students without requiring them to read a large amount of extremely technical literature. It appears possible to use this book as a text in connection with laboratory work and lectures. If this is done the content of courses in general biology can be very considerably increased, and the student will come in contact with a much wider range of bio- logical facts than is usually attempted in the so-called courses in general biology. The reading of this text, however, has emphasized the belief, which the reviewer has held for many years, namely, that courses in general biology should not be given to elementary students, but should follow one or more college courses in zodlogy and botany. To introduce students to phenomena of living substance through a course in general biology is fascinating in theory, but discouraging in practice. This text of McFarland, while evidently intended for use by students who have not had extensive scientific training, can scarcely be employed to advantage by those who have not had thorough preliminary courses in zodlogy and botany. The scope of the work is wide, touching in its 18 chapters on such subjects as “Cosmical Relations of Living Matter,” “the Origin of Life,” “‘Conformity to Type,” “Blood Relation- ship,” ‘“Parasitism,” “Infection and Immunity,” ete. It is sig- nificant of the increasing requirements of medical education, that medical students should be expected to have such a general knowledge of biological facts and theories as is outlined in this book. While there are chapters which will not meet with the full approval of zodlogists, still they may well read it carefully for the sake of seeing many things in their own field from a new point of view. The résumé of the theory of spontaneous 111 i J REVIEW. generation is usually clear and good. The chapter on Manifesta- tions of Life includes a discussion of the responses of animals and plants to various stimuli which is for the most part correct and clear. It might have been better to have made more man- ifest the distinction between nerve force and electricity. The paragraph in which distinction between motion and locomotion is set forth, while not important in itself, is one which illustrates the author’s faculty of clear and illuminating expression. The section on metabolism is very good, especially its treatment of “foods” and the integration of living substance. It is unfor- tunate that in a book of this general character, cell division has not been treated in a broader manner. The chapter on the higher organisms is probably the one most open to criticism by zodlogists. However, it should be remem- bered that a discussion of animal morphology, limited to 60 pages, is more difficult to write than a text-book of several times that length. The chapter on parasitism will be found extremely useful, and, if properly used in conjunction with laboratory work, should give the student a thorough grasp of this difficult but fascinating subject. The discussion of blood relationship is not as extensive as one would expect to find, but is sufficient if properly supplemented by the teacher. The chapter on infection and immunity affords a discussion of this subject which should go far to prepare students who are ex- pecting to study medicine to understand this work in bacteriology and pathology, and give the work in bacteriology more biological meaning than is frequently the case. The text is not one which can be used to advantage, with even a fairly advanced class, unless the teacher is prepared to supplement it very largely with both lectures and experimental work and with additional read- ings; but, if used in the right way, it should prove a distinct advance on the texts in general biology which are now available. LAWRENCE E. GRIFFIN. THE PHILIPPINE JOURNAL OF SCIENCE D. GENERAL BIOLOGY, ETHNOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY VoL. VII JUNH, 1912 No. 3 THE HABITS OF FIDDLER-CRABS. By A. S. PEARSE." (From the Zodlogical Laboratory, University of the Philippines.) The habits of fiddler-crabs are of particular interest to natural- ists. Since the time of Darwin (’74), these crustaceans have been believed to furnish evidence of sexual selection on account of the bright coloration and enormous chela of the male; these characteristics contrasting strongly with the comparatively dull dress and the small bilaterally symmetrical chelipeds of the female. Alcock (’92, ’00, 702) is convinced that (’00, p. 351)— In one species, at any rate (Gelasimus annulipes), the males, which are greatly in excess of the females, use the big and beautifully colored cheliped not only for fighting with each other, but also for “calling” the females. According to the same writer (92), Milne-Edwards described a South American species in which the male and female lived together in a single burrow, the former closing the mouth of the burrow with his large chela. But Smith and Weldon are apparently not convinced that the purpose of the peculiar adap- tations of male fiddlers has been demonstrated, for they say (709) — Though the genus Gelasimus is remarkable for the large size of one of its chelae the purpose of this peculiar adaptation is unknown in the various species. They state that the chela is believed by various writers to be used for closing the burrow, as a weapon in combats, and as a means of attracting the female, but do not affirm that any of these uses have been demonstrated. + Recently assistant professor of zodlogy, University of the Philippines. 111310 1138 114 PEARSE. During the summer of 1911, the writer worked among the tropical fiddler-crabs that swarmed in the estuaries near Manila and on the mud flats along Manila Bay. In some places these little animals covered the beach in countless numbers. At low tide their bright colors and active movements made them con- spicuous objects that could not fail to attract attention. Five species and 1 subspecies occurred in this locality, 5 of them being abundant. In order of decreasing numbers those repre- sented were: Uca forcipata (Adams & White?, de Haan),? U. marionis Desm. and U. rathbune Pearse,? U. marionis nitida (Dana), U. annulipes (Latr.), and U. gimardi (Milne-Edwards). The behavior of all of these species was similar. The observa- tions described in the following pages were undertaken with the purpose of discovering: (1) the habits and relationships of the various fiddler-crabs inhabiting the estuaries of Manila Bay and (2) the use or uses of the peculiar adaptations of the males. They were made between May 1 and August 1 at the estuary extending from Pasay to Georgia Avenue in the City of Manila. This narrow, shallow estero, as such places are termed in the Philippines, is about 3 kilometers long and is bordered by native nipa-palm houses along a large part of its extent. GENERAL HABITS. The fiddlers of Manila Bay are diurnal. On bright days, moreover, many more individuals are seen outside their burrows than when it is cloudy, provided the mud be somewhat wet. In order to ascertain whether they were active at night, the writer went to a place at the edge of an estero where he had been making observations in day-light for about a week, and where the ground was thoroughly familiar to him. On this particular evening, June 16, the sky was overcast with clouds, but though rain threatened, the darkness was relieved somewhat by occa- sional flashes of lightning and by the dim glow from the electric lights of Manila. The writer stumbled to his station at 8.15 and sat quietly on the grass for fifteen minutes. Then he flashed the light from an acetylene bicycle-lamp suddenly over the most populous part of the estero. Nota fiddler was to be seen. The light was shaded while five hundred seconds were counted, and again flashed over the estero. No crabs were in sight, but a *The writer’s thanks are due Miss Mary J. Rathbun who examined these species. Acknowledgment is also due to Mr. Tom Jones, of the St. Louis University School of Medicine, who drew the figures appearing with this paper. THE HABITS OF FIDDLER-CRABS. 115 good-sized snake was just entering a burrow about 1 meter away. The lack of fiddlers on this occasion was probably not due to the inclement weather for these animals often fed serenely in great numbers during the day in the midst of violent rainstorms. Furthermore, as fiddlers are often active on moonlight nights, the conclusion seems to be warranted that a certain amount of light is necessary to bring them from their burrows. The observations of Holmes (’08) support this view since he found that Uca pugnaa was strongly positively phototropic when tested under laboratory conditions. At Manila the burrows of the genus Uca are found for the most part between low- and high-tide marks on the mud flats. Many of them are so high that they are covered only at the time of very high tides, and their openings therefore may not be inundated for a number of days at atime. It would seem, then, that the location selected for a burrow is apparently not a matter of chance. The different species show a preference for certain levels, and this results in more or less clearly-marked zones on the shore of an estero: (1) High along the edge of the shore Uca forcipata is found, (2) this zone grades into the one of U. rathbune just below, while (3) U. marionis and U. marionis nitida are found in the softer mud of the deeper parts of the estero. The less abundant U. annulipes and U. gimardi were usually found in the second and third zones respectively. This stratification in habitats is very clearly shown (Table I) as the crabs emerge from their holes when the tide is falling. TABLE I.—Giving the number of each species of fiddler-crab observed in a certain area as the tide was receding. | A U. mario- ae ae eee nse area ca nis nitida | p.m. 2.50 | 0 0 0 o | | 3.00 | 2 0 0 0 | 3.18 8 0 0 0 SENG Melscossoset cosesscseseases 3.35 | 22 8 a 5 || 3.45 | 27 4 0 0 || 4.05] 31 10 0 0 4.32 82 | 12 2 1 \{ 2.00 0 0 0 0 || 3.15 2 0 0 0 TUNE NS eee aaa ele een RE |] #8.35 5 0 0 0 |) 3.51 i 1 0 0 || 4.14 16 6 0 0 || 5.12 70 14 1 1 | 116 PEARSE. It might be assumed that U. forcipata was the most abundant species in the locality chosen for these observations, but this was not the case. In order of decreasing abundance the species of this station were: U. rathbunx (about 400 individuals), U. forcipata (275), U. marionis nitida (40), U. marionis (8), U. annulipes (3), U. gimardi (2). In addition to their diurnal habits and discrimination in the selection of sites for their burrows, the fiddlers exhibited a third striking peculiarity in their reactions to tidal changes. Countless individuals were to be seen on the flats at low tide, and active feeding was carried on at such a time. The same was true when the sea was rising or falling. When the water threatened to cover the mouths of the burrows, however, a plug of mud was carried to the opening of each hole and drawn down after the owner in such a way as to shut him inside. During a period Fic. 1.—Uca rathbune carrying a load from her burrow. Drawn from a photograph. of high tides, burrows in low situations often remained closed for several days; during low tides, those on higher ground might be left open day after day, though the flats dried out to such an extent that the crabs could not feed easily, and mostly remained at the bottoms of their burrows. BURROWING HABITS. In excavating her burrow, a female fiddler digs with the walk- ing legs of either side. After a piece of mud has been pried loose by working under it with the legs it is carried to the mouth of the burrow and deposited outside. The males usually enter their burrows with the small cheliped ahead; and hence they usually carry loads of mud hugged close against the body by means of the first three legs on the side opposite the large chela. THE HABITS OF FIDDLER-CRABS. W'7 During the summer, however, 3 males were seen to hold a ball of mud with the two walking legs just behind the large chela, and on one occasion a male carried 3 successive loads in this manner. The males do not use the large chela for burrowing. As has been stated, females dig and carry from the burrow with the first three legs of either side, there being no difference between the legs. In either sex an animal bearing a load walks on the two posterior legs of the loaded side and the four walk- ing legs of the opposite side. The burden is always below the animal as it emerges from the burrow. The successive loads of mud are often carried as much’ as two-thirds of a meter from the mouth of the burrow; usually, however, to a distance of 25 to 30 centimeters; sometimes they are not carried away at all and may even be built in around the mouth of the hole. At times, all the excavated material is carried to a certain spot at a distance from the mouth of the burrow; the writer has seen from 40 to 50 loads thus placed in a neat pile. Some individuals scatter mud over a space of 1 to 2 meters, two loads seldom being put in the same place. One individual had 2 dump piles and he varied his labor by carrying a few loads to one, and then a few to the other. The mud brought from the burrow is often spread out flat and searched over for food with the small chela. The rapidity with which dirt is removed from a burrow varies to a considerable degree; a certain individual may bring only one load in a forenoon, while others may work as fast as possible for an hour or more. Dif- ferent fiddlers were seen to excavate as follows: 6 loads in twenty minutes, 16 in twenty-one, 6 in six, 26 in twenty-five, 5 in three, 11 in five and one-half; or, these individuals averaged one load every 3.8, 1.3, 1.0, 1.0, 0.6, and 0.5 minutes respectively. As has been stated, the burrows are usually closed when the -tide comes in. Often the mouth of a hole is prepared by bring- ing in a bit or two of dirt from outside or by carrying some mud from below; such masses are plastered around the mouth of the burrow and smoothed over to make the opening more nearly circular. When all is ready the crab goes a little way off and secures a disk of stiff mud which he carries back to the hole and draws down after himself in such a way that the mouth of the burrow is neatly and completely closed (fig. 2). The “plug” is loosened from the floor of the estuary by pushing the walking legs beneath it, the crab “leaning back” to do so. The males always use the legs of the side opposite the big chela for this work, but the females employ those of either side. As it is carried to the burrow, the plug is held by the first three walking 118 PEARSE. legs; the chela (always the small one in the male) is pressed down upon it from above while the second and third legs support it from below. After it has been drawn into the mouth of the .. Fic. 2.—A fiddler-crab closing its burrow by pulling a disk of mud in after itself. burrow, it is usually adjusted from below for a few moments, and then its surface often meets that of the ground in such a way that it is difficult to discern. It was observed that when the mud was somewhat dry, fiddlers frequently went to the edge of the advancing tide to secure softer material, and in this showed some discrimination. Fic. 3.—Showing an unusual method of closing a burrow. Although the method just described was the usual one employed in closing burrows, fiddlers were twice seen to depart from it. Once a male pushed a mass of soft mud up ahead of him nearly THE HABITS OF FIDDLER-CRABS. 119 to the top of his hole so that he shut himself inside. On another occasion a nervous little female, after hastily carrying 3 loads of dirt from her burrow and plastering a couple of pieces of soft mud around her doorway, went part way into her burrow, and by scraping with the legs of one side (fig. 3) gradually decreased the size of the opening until there was barely room enough to draw her legs inside. She then shut herself in by pushing up soft mud from below. When a fiddler wishes to open a burrow that has been sealed, it pulls the plug down inside. The plug must usually be left there for it was seldom brought out within a reasonable time in the numerous instances observed. Once a large Uca forcipata was seen to open his burrow by simply walking out of it, the plug being pushed to one side. _ Fiddlers are very cleanly in their habits and often scrape themselves with the small cheleze or with the walking legs when, in burrowing or in some other way, they have accumulated dirt on any part of their body. They are particularly careful of the eyes and eyestalks and these organs are often folded into their sockets and rubbed a few times. Mud or débris is not allowed to accumulate about the mouths of the burrows. Fiddlers have often been seen moving such matter to some little distance where it was cast aside or pushed down the holes of other crabs. Both sexes move sideways in entering the burrow, and the males more often have the large chela uppermost as they dis- appear. So far as the writer observed they always emerge in the same position as they enter; that is, the body is not turned around in the burrow. The holes are usually of uniform diam- eter, though they may be slightly enlarged at the bottom and occasionally turn off in a horizontal direction. They vary in depth from about 16 to 75 centimeters, and usually have water standing in the deeper parts, even when the tide is out. PLACE ASSOCIATION. A fiddler usually does not wander more than a meter and a half from his home and is ever ready to dart into it at the slightest provocation. Nevertheless, the writer observed a few instances in which particular individuals wandered 4.2, 4.5, 9, 9, and 12 meters from their respective burrows and returned. One peculiarly marked Uca marionis nitida, for no apparent reason, dug a new hole 4.5 meters from where he had first been observed; and a certain U. rathbunx, whose burrow had been inadvertently closed by the writer as he walked over it, dug a new hole 2.4 meters away; but such cases were unusual, and 120 PEARSE. most crabs manifested a choice for a particular locality. On one occasion the writer was sitting motionless at the edge of the estero when a female fiddler came out of a burrow beside him. He quickly clapped a foot over the hole so that the owner could not enter. She sat perfectly motionless for fifteen minutes. Then, as the writer slowly moved away his foot, she made a dash to the spot where the burrow had been and tried persistantly to enter, but was not able to do so on account of the mud that had been pressed down in such a way as to close the hole. She remained thus until the writer frightened her away by bringing his hand near her. A number of peculiarly marked fiddlers were snared with a noose of thread as they emerged from their burrows and then carried various distances to see if they would return. Although the results of these tests, as shown in Table II, were quite variable, they indicate that fiddlers have some power of associa- tion in connection with the situation they may have chosen for a burrow. Although only 3 out of 11 crabs returned to the same spot, the writer was convinced that the behavior of these 3 showed an association for a particular place. TABLE II.—Showing results of moving fiddler-crabs various distances from their holes. Returned— Distance Number of individual. moved in meters. | To same | To same hole. locality. Dee ee ee ee ee eens O50} Nolaea= == No OR a A SE a ee NE en aS GO || N@s--- No Boe ae ee 2 ee nee ee en 4.5 | No__----- No. AON Re Soe ee a ce ee IGG} |) WCE Yes, Bisste ae Spots ke ee ee eee ee 6.0 | Killed ___| Killed. ea ee a espa eee eee ee 6.0 | No------- Yes. by (ea SP ae a eS pr 5.4 | No__----- No. Beal ee SE OE oe ee ee ee eee 2.4 | Yes_.---- Yes, Ra Be a ee a ee EE ee eas gene EO |) NOR No. AOE See CL ee 2 ee ee ee Abi | Nose=n== No. Wee ee eee aT ee See ee ue 28404 ENoeenens No. Numbers 1, 2, 3, 7, 10, and 11 were moved to new situations where high ground prevented them from seeing their burrows; 1, 2, 8, 5, and 11 were never seen after the day they were moved; 3, 6, 7, 9, and 10 at once occupied burrows in the new location, some of these dug new burrows and some may have occupied those already dug. Although number 1 was in plain view of the burrow where he had been captured, the writer could not THE HABITS OF FIDDLER-CRABS. 121 see that he made any effort to return during the twenty-nine days he was watched. Number 8 dug a new burrow where he was placed and occupied it for two days; on the third day he had returned to his old haunts, but was not occupying his orig- inal burrow and had dug a new one 45 centimeters above it; on the fourth day he was often seen to enter his original hole, although he continued to excavate the one he had started the day before; from the fifth day he occupied the burrow he had started on the third and his original burrow was allowed to become filled with mud. Number 4 wandered about for some little time, frequently going to the tops of the little mounds of earth as if looking about. He did not move directly toward his burrow; in fact, he sometimes went in the opposite direction, but after about an hour he had returned to it. Number 7, an Uca annulipes, dug a burrow where he was placed and occupied it for twenty-two days; during this time his original burrow had become completely filled; on the twenty-third day he had returned to his original station and dug a new hole within 30 centimeters of his original home. It was by no means easy for a strange fiddler to make his way among his fellows through a densely populated portion of the estero. Dangers beset him on every hand. Number 5, a good- sized Uca rathbune, was captured at 1.56 in the afternoon, and thrown 6 meters from his hole down a small bay. He was an unusually timid individual, dodging into one hole after another and investigating his surroundings from time to time from the tops of hillocks; at 2.59 when he had progressed 2 meters toward his own hole, he unfortunately entered the burrow of a male Uca marionis nitida and emerged in a few moments shorn of most of his legs; only the small chela remained on the left side and the second and fourth walking legs on the right side. He hobbled into a shallow burrow a little way up the bank. Next day his cleanly picked “bones” lay bleaching on the flat. Of the 11 crabs moved to new situations, 5 were not seen again, 1 was known to be killed (others may have been), 3 dug burrows in new localities, and 3 returned to their original homes. Of the 3 that dug new burrows, 1 was behind a high grass-covered ridge, but in the other 2 instances the fiddler’s view of his old habitat was unobstructed. Three crabs showed a strong homing propensity and the fact that this did not appear in 3 other cases may have been due to an inhibiting factor or factors, such as the danger of travel or the lack of acute vision in certain indi- viduals. It is also possible that there may be individual dif- ferences in the ability or inclination to form place associations. 122 PEARSE. FEEDING AND FOOD. Female fiddler-crabs feed by scooping up mud with the hairy, spoon-like fingers of the chelipeds and carrying it to the mouth; the two hands alternate rapidly in this action. The males, how- ever, use only the small cheliped when feeding. These append- ages are well suited for the work they have to do, for their fingers are flattened and hollowed in such a way that admirable dredges are formed for carrying mud to the mouth. Feeding is not attempted when the flats are dry, and it is most active just after the tide has gone out, or along the edge of an advanc- ing tide. The mouth-parts sort over the mud that is brought to them and a mass of rejected material collects below them. This material slowly drips as the animal moves about feeding, and is frequently wiped away with a cheliped. On July 4, 20 stomachs of Uca rathbune were collected between 8.55 and 9.20 in the morning. These were placed at once in 10 per cent formalin, and two days later the contents of 6 were examined microscopically with considerable care. The objects discovered were as follows, in the order of decreasing quantity: Plant tissue, a branched alga, vascular plant tissue, small green algze, small brown spores or cysts (?), fine silt, diatoms, protozoa, and a piece of leaf epidermis. Striated muscle fibers were also found in 2 stomachs, but these may have been loosened from the stomach wall of the crab itself. Whether this was true or not, the examination showed that the food of fiddlers consists mostly of vegetable matter. The stomachs of 2 individuals were completely filled with a species of alga and a little fine silt. Probably a portion of the unidentifiable plant tissue consisted of the same alga, which appears to be an important element in the fiddlers’ fare. Although these animals seem to take mud from almost any locality, they are not indiscriminate feeders, the chelipeds and mouth parts apparently exercising consider- able care in the selection of food. BEHAVIOR. A fiddler-crab lives on the mud flats crowded among vast numbers of his fellows, but his intercourse with them shows no development of “social” instincts. He has selected his most suitable habitat, and the fact that he is surrounded by hundreds or thousands of his own kind is more or less incidental. Each fiddler searches the mud around his hole for food and his “hand is against every man.” He is ever ready to dart into his burrow, and if danger threatens he quickly retreats into this refuge. If THE HABITS OF FIDDLER-CRABS. 123 one of his fellows approaches too close to his domain, he rushes forth and enters into fierce combat. Hach crab makes his hole the center from which all his activities are conducted, and he treats the approach of any intruder as an unfriendly act. Though combats between 2 males are most frequent, males sometimes fight with females, and members of the weaker sex not infrequently struggle against each other. If 2 males that differ markedly in size fight, the larger combatant usually takes little interest in the contest and soon makes off, even though he may be hotly pursued by his smaller antagonist. When a small fiddler trespasses on a larger crab’s territory, however, he is soon chased away. Males of different species frequently SA SS Fic. 4.—Position assumed by male fiddlers when fighting. “eross swords,” but the most sustained and spirited contests are between those of the same size and kind. In fighting (fig. 4), the males face each other and often dance about excitedly, at the same time frantically waving the small chele. The large chele are then locked together, like two men shaking hands, and each contestant attempts to break off his opponent’s claw by a sudden wrench. Such quick movements are often so violent that one of the fighters, rather than lose his claw, is obliged to loosen his hold and in so doing is thrown backward for a distance of from 60 to 90 centimeters. Although fights were frequent during the time the writer made observa- tions, he saw only one crab dismembered (p. 121), and ihis individual did not survive the combat. In fighting, the large 124 PEARSE. chela was not seen to be used as a club as Alcock (’92, p. 416) maintains, but often served as a shield to ward off a thrust. If a male got the worst of an encounter, he often retreated into Fic. 5.—Fiddlers defending their burrows. his burrow and guarded it by extending his large chela from the opening (fig. 5). Sometimes one male caught another nap- ping and entered his burrow. In such cases the owner waited nervously about until the intruder came out and then chased him away, or he boldly went down after the stranger with his large chela extended before him and usually emerged soon after followed by the intruder. Males were not infrequently seen standing at “attention” on some elevation (fig. 6), for as much Fic. 6.—Uca forcipata standing at ‘“‘attention.’”” Drawn from a photograph. as ten or fifteen minutes without moving. The writer was not able to determine the purpose of such actions. Perhaps these individuals were awaiting a mate, or an opportunity to fight. THE HABITS OF FIDDLER-CRABS. 125 There was a marked difference between the different species in regard to their relative pugnacity. Uca annulipes was the most active and excitable; U. forcipata was the most sluggish, though an excellent fighter when aroused. The fights between males and females were usually of short duration, and as a general thing were occasioned by one coming too near the burrow of the other. When the intruder was chased away the affair ended. In the combats between females, the contestants sometimes faced each other, but they usually stretched to their full height and danced about excitedly back to back and struck out behind with their walking legs. Some of the activities of the fiddlers were like those displayed by higher animals while at play. The crabs frequently darted about apparently without a serious purpose, and were some- times downright mischievous. On one occasion a male was half-heartedly pursuing a female. She went to her burrow, secured a plug near by, and shut herself in. The male then came directly to the burrow, seized the plug, and cast it to one side. The female was just emerging from the burrow when the writer ended the episode by frightening the participants by a sudden movement. Another time, two males (an Uca marionis nitida and an U. forcipata) of medium size were seen running about for perhaps half an hour over an area about 12 meters in diameter. They kept close together and acted like two mis- chievous sailors ashore. The tide was coming in rapidly, and in their rambles the pair came to a place where a large slow- moving U. forcipata was carrying a plug to close his burrow. They waited until the plug had been pulled down over the owner, then the U. forcipata went to the hole and removed it; and, as the outraged owner emerged, the plug-remover and his. mate scuttled off toward the former’s burrow some 4.5 meters away. He soon closed his own burrow, for the advancing water threat- ened to inundate it, and his companion hurried away down the estero. The writer watched him until he had gone more than 11 meters and was lost to view at the edge of the advancing water. To all appearances activities such as these just described were carried out in a spirit of sport. Alcock (00) believed that the males were “greatly in excess of the females,” but this difference may have been assumed from only a casual observation. Some instances were noted by the writer in which the females outnumbered the males. For example, the counts shown in Table III represent the total 126 PEARSE. number of fiddler-crabs to be seen along the edge of a small bay on the afternoon of May 20, as the tide was going out. Further- more, even if the females to be seen were actually fewer than the males, it could not be taken as proof that they were less abundant; for, as they use both chele, they are able to feed twice TABLE III.—Showing sexes of fiddler-crabs in view as the tide was going out. Time. Females. | Males. p.m. 4.30 6 1 4.36 12 4 4.44 13 3 4.51 14 7 4.58 14 7 5.05 13 8 as fast as the males; therefore, they could obtain the necessary food in a shorter time and would be able to pass longer periods sealed in their burrows. ‘The crabs along the estuaries of Manila Bay, in the opinion of the writer, are about equally divided between the sexes. However, the males are more active and conspicuous and might easily impress an uncritical observer as exceeding the females in number. The behavior of the sexes toward each other is of particular interest. It was with deep regret that the writer was obliged to forego the pleasure of watching the fiddlers during the breed- ing season. Mating probably occurs at Manila ‘in the colder months,” as Alcock (’92) has observed in India. No females were observed during the hot season (May 1 to August 1) that were carrying eggs or young, nor were any very immature fiddlers seen. The males frequently fought each other and stood at “attention” with outstretched chela on the top of some eminence (fig. 6), apparently awaiting a combat, but only a few cases of courting were observed. The behavior of the sexes during courtship is important on account of its bearing on sexual selection. In one instance observed by the writer, the male waved his large chela and danced actively about the female with his back toward her for about five minutes. The female meanwhile hung around the mouth of her burrow, always keeping her face away from her suitor, while he made frequent attempts to climb over her back- ward. Although the male was unsuccessful in his efforts, he never turned his face toward the object of his attention. A THE HABITS OF FIDDLER-CRABS. 127 movement by the writer frightened these lovers and they both ran into the female’s hole. This was the only time that a male and a female were seen to enter the same burrow. On another occasion a female pursued by a male entered her burrow. Her suitor went halfway in after her, paused a moment as if feeling something within the hole, and then went away. The female ‘came out of the hole and resumed her feeding. Another male was seen pursuing a female twice his size. In both the latter instances the male faced toward the female and approached her “head on” or sideways without any dancing; the females kept their backs toward the males. Still another case was observed in which a male danced actively about a female keeping his back constantly toward her; she was as unconcerned as possible and continued to feed through the whole performance. The writer was interested to note that all males that were dancing about females kept their backs continually toward them. In such a position the bright coloration on the male’s large chela was almost if not wholly invisible to the female. Furthermore, although many females are dull colored, the brightest tints are found on this sex; and though the chele of many males are brightly colored, the greatest range of striking reds, purples, blues, greeris, and whites (as seen by the human eye) are found on the backs and legs of the females. All these facts throw doubt on the conclusions of Alcock (’92) who says (p. 416) : I have been able to observe that, whatever other functions the great chela may serve—whether as a stopper to the mouth of the burrow, or as a nuptial support, as some have supposed—it also, in the species under consideration, is (1) a club used in the contests of rival males, and (2) a signal to charm and allure the females. This last function is particularly apparent. As one walks across the mud one first becomes aware of the presence of these crabs by noticing that the surface of the mud is every- where alive with twinkling objects of a pearly pink colour. Carefully watched, these prove to be the enormous chele of a crowd of males of Gelasimus, waving in the air, each little crab standing at the mouth of its burrow and ceaselessly brandishing its big claw. On closer observation, among every ten or so males a small clawless female may be seen feeding in apparent unconcern. If the female should approach the burrow of a male, the latter displays the greatest excitement, raising itself on its hindmost legs, dancing and stamping and frantically waving its beautifully coloured claw. From prolonged watching I feel convinced that the waving of the claw by the male is a signal of entreaty to the female, and I think no one can doubt that the claw of the male has become conspicuous and beautiful in order to attract the female. Alcock’s observation could not have been very detailed for he “did not actually see the rival males seize each other in the conflict,’ and he could scarcely have failed to do this if any 128 PEARSE. considerable amount of time had been spent. It would be easy for anyone observing the crabs in a casual way to believe that the males were trying to attract the females by their bright colors, but the writer saw nothing in the behavior of either sex that could be interpreted in that way. The males often wave their claws frantically, as Alcock says, but they apparently do this to an equal extent whether females are present or absent, and without any apparent reference to mating but often before fighting with another male. Fiddlers treat other animals with suspicion. Any large mov- ing object causes them to retreat at once to their burrows, although they soon emerge again if the object is not near at hand. Most crabs retreat into their holes when a man ap- proaches within 15 meters, but if one is careful not to make any quick movements he can sit apparently unnoticed within a couple of yards of an active fiddler for hours at a time. Large adult crabs like Sesarma bidens are avoided, but small crustaceans of any species are at once attacked. . Any strange ‘animal, how- ever small, is avoided; the writer once saw a small hermit-crab cause every fiddler near to run for its hole by moving quickly along the edge of the rising tide. The fiddler’s burrow furnishes a retreat from many enemies, and his speedy reaction toward it in response to all movements in his field of vision would help protect him from the herons, snakes, skinks, frogs, toads, and fishes that commonly hunt along the shores of the estuaries. In reacting to its surroundings, a fiddler-crab apparently uses its senses of sight and touch most, although the recognition of chemical substances may be important in securing and selecting food. The eyes are very quick to note any movement in the landscape; they are always held straight upward except when their stalks are being cleaned or when a crab is entering a burrow. Feeding probably depends mostly upon the tactile and chemical senses, for the usual position of the eyes is such that the small chele: can not be seen as they pass food to the mouth. Such loud noises as whistling, hand clapping, gun shots, and locomotive whistles produced no apparent reaction from the fiddlers, nor did the stridulation of the large decapod, Thalassina anomala (Herbst), that builds its burrows among them. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. Although fiddler-crabs live together in enormous colonies, they show no codperation with one another, nor do they manifest any tendency toward such communal existence as that displayed by THE HABITS OF FIDDLER-CRABS. 129 some other arthropods; for example, ants, bees, wasps, and ter- mites. In this they agree with other crustaceans, for although this class of animals exhibits an endless variety of structural adaptations suited to various habitats and modes of life, none of them has apparently taken advantage of the opportunities offered by a codperative communal association among mem- bers of the same species (except in some instances in which the male is intimately associated with the female). Although the females of many species carry their eggs and newly hatched young for a time, the association of the young with their mother is nominal, for she never feeds nor cares for them. The struggle for existence is nowhere more apparent than in the midst of a fiddler-crab colony. Each individual jealously guards the area about his own burrow and immediately attaeks any invader of this territory. His pugnacity is ever ready to show itself against his fellows that swarm about him and against numerous competitors of other kinds that also seek to eke out an existence from the area he has chosen for his own. At Manila, the fiddler’s chief competitors for the food on the mud flats are: (1) two species of Macrophthalmus whose feeding habits and food are very similar to those of the fiddler, but that usually live farther from the shore in the deeper parts of the estuaries and hence overlap the fiddler zone on the lower side only; (2) two burrowing crustaceans, Sesarma bidens De Haan and Thalassina anomala (Herbst), sometimes exceeding the fiddlers in size, that live mostly along the upper side of their zone; and (3) some smaller animals, such as the numerous mud snails, nereid worms, and the less frequent hermit-crabs. In addition to honest competition the fiddler must reckon with some larger animals that seek not his food but him. Among these the snakes, skinks, frogs, toads, and fishes are important. The behavior of the fiddler is admirably suited to enable him to gain a livelihood and at the same time escape injury or death from his enemies. His aggressive attitude toward members of his own genus and toward-other crabs of similar size keeps enough space clear about his burrow to enable him to sift his simple diet from the mud in comparative safety. Furthermore, the way is thus left clear for retreat to his burrow if danger threatens, and the fiddler is not slow in dodging into his hole as soon as any strange or threatening object moves within his field of vision. His burrow is the center of all his activities, and his association for the place where it is situated is very strong. Fiddlers are protected from night prowlers by their 111310——2 130 PEARSE. diurnal habits, and they escape the fishes and snakes that hunt at the edge of the advancing tide by closing the openings of their burrows when the water threatens to inundate them. Although the majority of the reactions of fiddler-crabs are stereotyped and appear to be instinctive, yet they are open to some modification, The daily life of a fiddler is more or less of a routine—to dig a burrow, to seek food as long as the territory about his burrow is clear, to attack small aggressors, to retreat from large enemies, to plug the burrow when the tide comes in, to open it when the water recedes, to retire during darkness, and to mate at the proper season. These are his ordinary activities and they depend largely upon unvaried reac- tions. Some instincts are so strong that, although usually ad- vantageous, they may be harmful; for example, place association and instinct to retire into her hole was strong enough to cause a crab to remain for some time in danger when the burrow could not be entered and she might have escaped by running away (p. 120). Nevertheless, a fiddler shows some ability to modify his reactions to suit circumstances; such as departing from his usual method of carrying mud from his burrow (p. 117), using different ways to plug the burrow (p. 118), and in some other activities. A fiddler-crab is able to establish a place association for a certain locality, and to retain it for as long as three weeks (p. 121). Some activities (p. 125) might be interpreted as manifestations of a desire to play. The instinct to fight males of his own species and size is very strong in a fiddler, yet this instinct is more than a “fighting reflex,” for he is slow to resent an attack by a smaller male (p. 128). Concerning the structural differences between the sexes, it may be affirmed that the great chela of the male was not developed for burrowing or feeding, because he never uses it for either purpose; in fact, it is rather a disadvantage in either of these activities. The great chela closes the burrow inas- much as it fills the opening as a weapon of offense (fig. 5), but is not used as a lid or stopper. It may be of some advantage in copulation, but this can not be affirmed until someone has ac- tually seen the phenomenon. The great chela is of unquestion- able use to the male in his combats with his fellows and in defending himself from other enemies. In this respect it is comparable to the secondary sexual characters of some other male animals, such as the stag’s antlers, the cock’s spurs, and THE HABITS OF FIDDLER-CRABS. 131 the walrus’s tusks. Among higher animals in which the males possess such special aggressive organs, however, the females are protected and cared for to some extent, but nothing of this sort is known among decapod crustaceans with secondary sexual adaptations (Uca, Alpheus, and others). Thus, although many of the crustacea have two adaptations which might fit them for colonial life—through the mother carrying her eggs and young for a time, thus having opportunity to start a colony with them; and through the aggressive adaptations of the males, which might enable stronger individuals of that sex to gather a number of females about them—their instincts have prevented them from developing it. The writer can not believe with Alcock (’92) who thinks “no one can doubt that the claw of a male has become conspicuous and beautiful in order to attract the female” and that “it is used as a signal to charm and allure the females.” In support of Alcock’s views we have: (1) his own opinion, which, though apparently the result of more or less casual observations (p.127), is not to be taken lightly; (2) the conclusion of the writer from his observations at Manila that the colors of male fiddlers are perhaps most uniform on the great chela and more variable on other exposed parts of the body. Against Alcock’s views may be urged: (1) that during the most ardent courtships observed by the writer (p. 127), the males kept their backs constantly toward the females so that the great chela could not be seen; (2) the chela is not always “bright” colored, at least as seen by the human eye, and the males that danced were not always bright; (3) other crustacea depend little if at all upon the sense of sight in choosing mates (Bethe, ’97; Holmes ’03; Pearse, 709; Chidester, ’11), and there is some doubt as to the ability of crustaceans to discriminate colors (Pearse, 711); (4) at Manila the female fiddlers often were, to the human eye, more brightly colored than males of their own species, and the female’s bright colors were on her back and legs so that they could readily be seen by a male dancing behind her but she did no dancing. The writer is convinced that the male dances about the female in order to induce her to mate with him, but, from his own obser- vations, doubts whether the male’s coloration is effective in influencing her to do so. The matter ought to be reéxamined during the active mating season with special reference to color. By observing the coloration of the males actually chosen, by painting the chele of rejected suitors, or by other tests, a ea PEARSE. definite conclusion could doubtless be reached. Until such experiments have been made it can not be affirmed that fiddler- crabs show the operation of sexual selection through color- discrimination. BIBLIOGRAPHY. Aucock, A. 1892. On the Habits of Gelasimus annulipes Edw. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1892), VI, 10, 415, 416. 1900. XVI. Materials for a Carcinological Fauna of India. No. 6. The Brachyura Catometopa, or Grapsoidea. Journ & Proc. Asiat. Soc. Bengal (1900), 9, 2, 279 to 256. 1902. A Naturalist in Indian Seas. London (1902), xxiv + 328, 98 figs., 1 map. BETHE, A. 1897. Das Nervensystem von Carcinas maenas. Ein anatomisch- physiologischer Versuch. 1. Th.,1. Mith. Arch. f. Mikr. Anat. (1897), 50, 460-546, Taf. 25-30. CHIDESTER, F'. H. 1911. The Mating Habits of Four Species of Brachyura. Biol. Bull. (1911), 21, 235 to 248. Darwin, C. 1874. Descent of Man. 2d. ed., London (1874), 672 pp. Houmes, S. J. 1908. Sex Recognition among Amphipods. Biol. Bull. (1903), 5, 288 to 292. 1908. Phototaxis in Fiddler Crabs and its Relation to Theories of Orientation. Journ. Comp. Neurol. and Physchol. (1908), 18, 493 to 497. PEARSE, A. S. 1910. Observations on Copulation among Crawfishes with special Reference to Sex Recognition. Amer. Nat. (1910), 43, 746 to 753. 1911. The Influence of Different Color Environments on the Behavior of Certain Arthropods. Journ. An. Behavior (1911), 1, 79 to 110. 1912. A New Philippine Fiddler-crab. Phil. Journ. Sci., Sec. D (1912), 7, 91 to 94. SMITH, G. AND WELDON, W. F. R. 1909. Crustacea. Cambridge Natural History. London and New York (1909), 4, 1 to 217. ILLUSTRATIONS. TEXT FIGURES. (From drawings by Tom Jones.) Fic. 1. Uca rathbune carrying a load from her burrow. Drawn from a photograph. 2. A fiddler-crab closing its burrow by pulling a disk of mud in after itself. ; Showing an unusual method of closing a burrow. Position assumed by male fiddlers when fighting. Fiddlers defending their burrows. Uca forcipata standing at. “attention.” Drawn from a photograph. 133 SD GALES 9 Well Q ‘ » eal Ris ME THE PHILIPPINE JOURNAL OF SCIENCE. D. General Biology, Ethnology and Anthropology. Vol. VII, No. 3, June, 1912. THE MANGYANS OF MINDORO. By Merton L. MILuer. (From the Division of Ethnology, Bureau of Science, Manila, P. I.) The Island of Mindoro lies directly south of Manila, distant only twelve hours by the usual steamship routes. Notwith- standing the facts that it is near Manila, that it has a varied topography, much cultivable land and valuable forests, it is one of the least known, least developed, and has one of the least dense populations of all the Philippine Islands. For some reason which Americans have never been able entirely to fathom, Mindoro had the reputation in Spanish times of being an unhealthful place. This to some extent may account for the tardy development and scant population which the island presents to-day. The Christian people of Mindoro number about 45,000. They occupy a narrow coastal strip, extending with frequent inter- ruptions around the entire island. By far the larger proportion of them are on the north and east coasts. They are almost entirely Tagalogs and Bisayas, the former in the northern part of the island and the latter in the southern. It is only along a few of the streams that the Christian people have made settle- ments in the interior, and these settlements are but a few miles inland. It does not appear to have been fear that has led the Christian Filipino to cling to the seashore, but simply the natural tendency of man to remain near the ocean until some necessity arises to urge him inland or some advantage appears to be derived from such a movement. Apparently, there has been nothing to urge or induce the coast people of Mindoro to move into the interior. The interior is to a great extent unoccupied, but scattered all over this part of the island are a primitive people who gener- ally are known by the name Mangyan and who probably number from 5,000 to 20,000 souls. Owing to the lack of trails and the 135 136 MILLER. consequent difficulty of gaining access to these people, it is prac- tically impossible at the present time to form an accurate idea of their number. So far as I can judge from my own acquaintance with the Mangyans? they are an entirely friendly, harmless people, peace- able to the point of timidity. Weapons are not common among them, and in some sections they seem to have only working tools and appear to be without offensive weapons of any kind. I should add that there is one section of them of whom I have seen little. They live west of Bongabong on the east coast; a part of them are known as Bangons and a part as Bukils. It is these people who are said to have tails, according to a story told by the coast Filipinos. If the few Bukils whom I have seen were typical, their costume, customs, and general appearance indicate that they are closely allied to the Mangyans elsewhere in Mindoro. My interpreter, who talked without difficulty with the Mangyans near Bulalakao on the east coast, found it no easy matter to understand the Bukils in the interior. The fact that he could understand them at all, even though with diffi- culty, shows that the dialects in use by the two peoples are closely related. The best way to give a picture of these widely-scattered people will be to describe the inhabitants of some one limited section, at the same time indicating the details in which those of other parts of the island differ from the people of the section described. Various settlements of Mangyans, containing from 8 to 30 people, are found near Bulalakao, at distances varying from three to six hours’ travel on foot. Some of these are on steep hill- sides in a limestone region where the soil is thin. Even the crops are planted on hillsides so steep that the use of animals would be impracticable, even if the people had work animals. In these locations advantage is taken of any small level spot for erecting two or three small houses. The people live in them for years, apparently until the houses are about ready to fall. Because of the topographic conditions, it might not be easy in all cases to find a suitable site for a large number of people to live together. Other settlements are located on rolling land not far from the ocean, where the soil appears to be rich and deep. In these places there is nothing to interfere with the building up of comparatively large settlements, excepting the disinclination of *T have visited them in five widely separated localities. THE MANGYANS OF MINDORO. 137 the people. A brief, detailed statement, describing the location of several of the settlements, will throw some light on the life of the Mangyans. Dangas,? about five hours’ walk from Bulalakao, is reached by traveling over a hilly country gradually rising until the last half-hour of the journey, when the trail becomes so steep in places as to be almost a cliff. A gently sloping ground, where there are 5 houses, is found above this cliff. About 20 people live here. One hour beyond Dangas is another small settlement of 5 houses and about 30 people. The trail from Dangas leads up the ridge of a long, steep hill, across a narrow valley, and part way up the opposite slope. The houses are on a small, flat spot on the hillside. Budburan, a settlement of 3 houses, is located in a rolling country about 3 kilometers from the ocean and five hours’ travel on foot from Bulalakao. Here there is a large area, alternating between grass-covered and wooded country, where thousands of people might live. In the interior of Mindoro I saw no groups of houses nor even two houses in sight of each other. The majority of the few houses which I saw were located at points on steep hillsides where the slope was a little more gentle and offered space for a small house. The cultivated fields were close by. I saw a few little hovels, built near small streams, just high enough above the stream to be safe in time of high water. These hovels appeared to be temporary, the more permanent homes being on the hillsides far above the streams. Near Abra de Ilog many of the Mangyans live in isolated houses built high on steep hillsides like those in the interior of the island. Here, too, as well as along the Bako River and on the shores of Lake Nauhan, there are small groups of houses hidden away in the forest near the clearings and usually near a small stream. HOUSES. The houses in which the Mangyans near Bulalakao live are like those built by their Christian neighbors. When they are new they are neat and attractive, but they are allowed to deterio- rate, although people continue to live in them as long as they are at all habitable. They are built from 1 to 2 meters above the ground. The roof and the sides are usually of nipa or buri * Lisboa Vocabulario de la lengua Bicol, gives: Angas=A7ngpds, steep cliff; Parangasan, open place which the (prevailing?) wind strikes from the front. 138 MILLER. palm.? The leaves, of which the sides are made, are held down by horizontal strips of bamboo about 30 centimeters apart: The floor is of split bamboo, sometimes made neatly of strips of uniform width, but more often of pieces of bamboo split open and laid out flat. The doors and windows are sometimes arranged to slide along a bamboo pole and sometimes to swing upward and outward. The houses are of good height, so that it is possible to stand erect almost anywhere inside, although it is necessary to stoop a little in order to pass through the door. Access to the house is gained by means of a short bamboo ladder made as wide as the door. Just outside the door there is often, but not always, an open- air platform on a level with the floor of the house. This is used in fair weather by the owners when pounding out palai* or when engaged in other household duties; it also serves as a lounging place. Within the house there is usually a bench at one side about 50 centimeters above the floor and 40 centimeters wide. This is made of 1 or 2 hewn boards and is fastened to two of the main posts of the house by rattan. The fireplace is made by fasten- ing together 4 pieces of wood or bamboo into a quadrilateral and filling the space thus inclosed on the floor with earth to a depth of from 8 to 10 centimeters. Three stones serve as a rest for each vessel to be put over the fire. In one corner of the house there is either a large earthenware jar or a number of pieces of bamboo for holding water. Suspended from the roof timbers are a few baskets which may contain camotes,® bananas, maize, or some pieces of clothing. A few wooden spoons may be seen placed behind the roof beams. Sleeping mats are rarely seen. On the whole, the house fur- nishings are scanty. The Mangyans sometimes build small, rude shelters near their cultivated fields in which they live while sowing, caring for, and harvesting the crops. They do this partly because it is more convenient to live near-by while they are putting in the crops and partly to protect the latter from birds and other animals while they are maturing. After harvesting the crop, they return to the place where they ordinarily make their homes. The Mangyans in the neighborhood of Bulalakao build the *Nipa palm, Nipa fruticans Wurmb.; buri palm, Corypha elata Roxb. * Unhusked rice. “Tpomoea batatas Poir. THE MANGYANS OF MINDORO. 139 best houses and are in general the most prosperous of all these people in Mindoro. Those of Abra de Ilog and the Bako River live in rude little huts which usually have no sides. The eaves are so near the floor of the hut that sides are really not neces- sary. The floor is from 30 centimeters to 2 meters above the ground, and is made either of small poles or of the bark of trees. Buri palm leaves are used to make the roof. Many of these houses are so low that a white man can not stand erect in them except in the center under the highest part of the roof. When the floor is more than 1 meter above the ground, the hut is entered by means of a notched log or by 2 small logs laid in the form of an >< along one side of the house. Even these simple houses may be occupied for several years. For lights the Mangyans use a resin from a tree known as palsahingen. This resin is wrapped in a green leaf of the buri palm. The use of this kind of light is widespread in the Philippines. PHYSICAL APPEARANCE. There is much difference in the appearance of the Mangyans in different parts of Mindoro. Some are large and well devel- oped and appear like Christian Filipinos; others are small with slight physical development; while a few show signs of having Negrito blood. Practically all the Mangyans have blackened teeth. This con- dition is a result of the continual chewing of betel-nut. Occasion- ally, a man is seen who has white teeth. This is a person who, for some reason, does not care to chew betel-nut and whose teeth have in consequence remained the natural color. The Mangyans near Bulalakao are as large and have as good physiques as the average Christian Filipino. The women seem to be less well developed than the men. This may easily be because of the fact that they marry while still very young, sometimes when they have hardly passed out of girlhood. Many of them, too, work hard. If these Mangyans were to dress and live as do the Christian Filipinos, it would not be possible to distinguish one from the other. The same can not be said of all the people of the interior. °Canarium villosum F.-Vill. This is a large tree of the Burseraceae which furnishes great quantities of resin. In Camarines Province, Luzon, torches are made of this resin and are called sdlong, the Bikol equivalent of Tagalog sahing, pitch, resin. 140 MILLER. Some of them are as well developed as the people near Bula- lakao, but others are small and thin and poorly nourished. As there is no evidence of Negrito blood among them, their slight development may be ascribed to lack of nourishment. Dr. Fletcher Gardner, who saw much of these people while he was stationed at Bulalakao, says of them:’ In appearance the Hampangan Mangyans are pure Malay, of rather small stature, of rather light color, often plump, well formed, and, by Malay standards, good looking. The hair is usually straight, rarely wavy, and never very curly or kinky. The teeth are usually black and worn, from constant use of betel-nut, without cleansing, a fact that led Lander to state that they file and blacken their teeth. The use of betel-nut begins very early among them, so that the appearance described may often be observed in comparatively young persons. They tattoo the body. Some of the Mangyans in the Bako region show evidence of Negrito blood. Curly hair is not uncommon and even closely curled hair may be seen. Sometimes, too, one sees the large, round, typical eyes of the Negrito. A few Mangyans have beard enough so that they sometimes shave with a jack-knife. If, as seems very likely, there is some Negrito blood in the Mangyans of the Bako region, this fact would account for the small stature which is common among the people there. J made inquiries among these people in various parts of Mindoro to find out if they had any tradition of the former . presence of Negritos among them,® but was invariably told that they had never known of any Negritos in Mindoro. The appear- ance of some of the Mangyans makes me believe that there were formerly Negritos in the island. Also, I made careful inquiries about the existence of white people among them, and always received an incredulous denial. The white tribe, I have no doubt, is a myth, which may have been founded on the occurrence of one or of a few albinos among the Mangyans. I attempted to trace to its origin the story of people with tails. As might be expected, I learned nothing tending to establish its truth.° This is a story which is by no means con- 7 Unpublished manuscript in the division of ethnology, Bureau of Science. ® Lisboa, Vocabulario de la lengua Bicol (written between 1594 and 1618), says: “Mangyan. Negrillos mas bosales que los demas.” The Spanish dictionary gives bozal (not bosal, but confusion between s and z is common in Lisboa) as “stupid.” This indicates that in Lisboa’s time Negritos were believed to exist in the Mangyan territory although probably at that time there were Mangyans elsewhere than in Mindoro. ° According to Gardner (unpublished manuscript), the Mangyans, who live near the coast, as well as some Christian Filipinos hold the belief that the Bangon Mangyans, living near Bongabong, have tails. . THE MANGYANS OF MINDORO. 141 fined to Mindoro. Eight years ago, when I was at Sablayan on the west coast of Mindoro, I was told that there were people with tails living near by. I visited the house where they were said to live and saw one woman who had a large malignant growth at the end of the spinal column. Of course, the existence of one such person is sufficient foundation for a story that there are people with tails. Whether the story in Mindoro has any more found- ation than this I am unable to say, but I doubt if it has. DRESS. Near Bulalakao the Mangyan men all wear loin-cloths as the principal item of their dress. These are almost invariably made of white cotton cloth. The cotton is raised, spun into thread, and woven into cloth by the people themselves. The ends of the loin-cloths are embroidered with red and blue cotton yarn. The men usually wear also a short jacket made of the same kind of cloth as the loin-cloths. These are sometimes dyed blue, but are more often white. They are em- broidered with red and blue cotton yarn around the lower edge, the neck, and wrists, along the two front edges, along the outer seam of each sleeve, and along the middle seam in the back. Aside from this embroidery, the jacket is entirely plain. The outer seam of each sleeve is sewed at intervals only and pre- sents a kind of slashed effect. Besides the cord to which the loin-cloth is attached, a belt is worn around the waist. It is made of bu7i 8 to 10 centimeters wide in the middle and tapering to a small loop at one end and a wooden button at the other. The wide middle part has a pocket in which betel-nuts, tobacco, money, and other small articles are carried. In the interior of Mindoro and near Abra - de Ilog these pocket belts are of the same style, but are only 3 or 4 centimeters wide in the middle. Strings of beads are worn around the neck, sometimes in such quantities as to weigh several pounds. I saw one man with coils of copper wire around the neck. A few men wear short strings of beads suspended from the ear lobes and a few strings around the calves of the legs. The hair is worn long, gathered in a knot low on the back of the head. Around the head, a red cloth is usually worn which serves to keep the hair in place both in front and behind. This is the rule near Bulalakao, but the Mangyans elsewhere, notably near Abra de Ilog and Lake Nauhan, wear the hair short. The men and less often the women wear armlets on the upper arm 142 MILLER. made of black and red rattan. These are sometimes worn alone and sometimes are used to hold in place the sweet-smelling roots and the cocks’ feathers which they, especially the young men, like to wear. The women wear a cloth about the loins tucked in at the waist and reaching just below the knees. This is of native-grown cotton and is often dyed dark blue. -They also wear a belt, woven of nito,° 8 to 10 centimeters wide around the abdomen and often another similar band to cover the breasts. At times, instead of the breast band, they wear a short cotton jacket which differs from that worn by the men in some details. It has no opening either in front or in the back, the seams of the sleeves are entirely sewed up, and the only embroidery is around the wrists. For decoration the women wear masses of beads around the neck and great quantities of strips of rattan dyed red wound around the abdomen. The hair is gathered in a knot at the back of the head, and around it is worn a circular band made of nito, rattan, and burt, in black, red, and white respectively. Strings of beads or bands of brass wire are sometimes worn around the wrists, and ear plugs are inserted in the lobes of the ears. Among the Mangyans in other parts of Mindoro no striking variation in the dress of the men occurs. Nowhere else save near Bulalakao is any native-made cotton cloth seen, and nowhere else are the jackets made in the native style. The loin cloths are made either of tree bark or of European cloth. Jackets are either not worn or, if worn, are of the Christian Filipino style. The pocket belt is only 4 centimeters wide instead of 8 or 10. Very few beads are worn except by the Mangyans near Bulalakao. The dress of the Mangyan women varies much from one part of Mindoro to another. Near Abra de Ilog a cloth is wrap- ped around the waist and under this cloth a woven band of nito is worn. The women also wear a loin-cloth under the skirt, but neither a jacket nor a nito breast band, and sometimes they have rings on their hands and grasses thrust through a hole in the lobe of the ear. In this region they neither weave cloth nor use bark cloth. They get cloth either by working for the Chris- tian Filipinos or by exchanging forest products for it. In the Bak6 River region, on the other hand, they either buy cloth from the Christian Filipinos or use beaten bark. Along the Baké River it is the exception rather than the * Lygodium circinnatum Sw. THE MANGYANS OF MINDORO. 143 rule to see a woman with a cloth around the loins. Her ordi- nary costume is a loin-cloth of beaten bark, a great mass of woven nito and rattan wound around the abdomen, and a breast band of nito and buri. The latter is not always worn, but no part of the rest of the costume ever is dispensed with. The loin-cloth is short and is passed both in front and behind over two or three of the strands of the woven nito which is wrapped about the abdomen. A red kerchief is sometimes worn around the breasts instead of the buii band already described. The age at which children wear clothes varies from about 10 or 11 years near Abra de Ilog to 5 or 6 at other places. Their clothes are the counterpart in miniature of those worn by their parents. I saw no evidence among the Mangyans anywhere of tattoo- ing or scarification, or of teeth or body mutilations, except perforations of the ears for the suspension or insertion of ornaments. Hats are rarely worn. Of the few which I saw all but one had been obtained by the Mangyans from their Tagalog neigh- bors. The one exception, worn by a Mangyan working in a clearing, was hewn out of a single piece of wood. It was made so thin and of such light wood that it weighed very little more than many woven hats. INDUSTRIES. The work of the Mangyans is devoted almost entirely to gaining subsistence, but they have a few industries not directly connected with the question of food. None of the people whom I visited make pottery, although I was told there are Mangyans in the hills west of Bongabong from whom cooking vessels are sometimes obtained. They get most of the pottery vessels which they use from the Christian Filipinos in exchange for camotes, maize, palai, and bananas. In the vicinity of Bulalakao the Mangyans plant cotton. The process of converting this into cloth may be described briefly as follows: The first task in preparing the cotton for weaving is the removal of the seeds. A woman takes a small, hard, smooth piece of wood about 50 centimeters long by 15 centimeters wide and a piece of smooth bamboo about 40 centimeters long and 3 centimeters in diameter. She places the piece of wood on the floor or on the ground and kneels in front of it with a basket of cotton at her side. Then she takes a little of the cotton from the basket, places it on the piece of wood, and rolls the bamboo over 144 MILLER. the fiber, forcing the seeds ahead of the roller and out of the cotton. After the seeds are all removed, the cotton is spread out on a mat, and several people sit on the floor around it and beat it with flexible sticks. This is done to detach the fibers one from another so that the cotton can be readily spun into a thread. The fiber is next wrapped in a piece of dry hemp or banana stalk and is ready to be spun. The bundle of cotton is held in the left hand, a little is drawn out with the right, and is attached to the spindle which is held in the right hand. A stone whorl is fastened to the lower end of the spindle to keep the latter revolving when once it has been set in motion. After the cotton has been fastened to the spindle, the latter is set revolving rapidly and the left hand holding the material is gradually raised as high as the spinner can reach. After the thread has been sufficiently twisted, the left hand is slowly lowered, the thread is wound around the spindle, and the pro- cess is repeated. It only remains to weave the thread into cloth. This cloth is about 15 centimeters wide for loin-cloths and about 50 centimeters for jackets, blankets, etc. In no other part of Mindoro did I see any cotton growing nor any evidence that the people are in the habit of weaving cloth. Near Bulalakao, also, the Mangyans make many neat little baskets of buri and nito. Some of them are bags designed to be worn on the person for carrying betel-nuts, tobacco, lime, or other things. These are flexible. Others are octagonal in shape, often with two of the sides much larger than the others. They vary from 7 to 18 centimeters in extreme length and from 3 to 10 centimeters in depth. They have a close-fitting cover which is as deep as the basket itself and which has a cylindrical extension in the center of the top which serves as a handle. This handle is usually about 2 centimeters in diameter and 5 centimeters high. It is stuffed with cotton to give it some rigidity. The baskets are made in two and sometimes in three colors, white, black, and red. The white is of bwri, the the black of nito, and the red of dyed bamboo. The Mangyans occasionally make small, flat, telescope baskets for carrying betel-nuts, tobacco, and similar articles. These are about 14 centimeters in length, 10 centimeters in breadth, and 3 centime- ters in thickness, and are made of bu7i. The Mangyans everywhere make a few household baskets and a few for bringing home camotes and other field products, but they do not make them in great quantities. THE MANGYANS OF MINDORO. 145 AGRICULTURE AND FOOD SUPPLY. All over Mindoro the Mangyans are agriculturists. Of course, they catch a few birds and occasionally kill a wild hog with lances or catch a tamarao," a hog, or a carabao in a snare, but by far the greater part of their food supply comes from culti- vation of the soil. They follow the kaingin * system as do also most of their Christian neighbors; that is, they make a new clear- ing every year or at the most every two years, in which they plant rice. The Mangyans know and value American axes highly. When they have them, they use them in making clearings. When they have no axes, bolos'® are used for clearing the ground of brush and trees. Even large trees are cut down. When the brushwood is dry it is piled up and burned. The rice is planted by making small holes in the ground with a pointed stick and dropping 2 or 3 grains of rice into each hole. As one passes through a field which has been planted a week or ten days before, he notices grains of rice lying on the ground uncovered. Probably for this reason a considerable percentage of the grain does not sprout. Sometimes these clearings for rice are on level or rolling land, as at Badyang and along the Bako River; at other times on the steepest of hillsides, as in the interior of Mindoro and near Abra de Ilog. Whether the land be steep, rolling, or level, the unirrigated type of rice is always planted. Throughout Min- doro, among the Mangyans, the crop is rarely, if ever, sufficiently abundant so that the rice lasts from one harvest to another. In planting, the men make the little holes for the grains and the women drop the seeds. The sticks used in this work are placed together standing near the center of the clearings after the planting is done. The Mangyans say that they do this to protect the rice from the spirits in the ground whom they have never seen, but who really exist according to the statements of the old people. If these sticks are left lying on the ground, the rice will fall down. This they say they learned from the Tagalogs. “ Bubalus mindorensis Heude. 4 A word which describes 2 common Philippine custom of clearing a piece of ground, turning it over, and cultivating it for two or three years until the weeds and grass become thick. This land is then abandoned and another similar clearing made elsewhere. * A common name throughout the Philippines for the ordinary large working knife. See footnote under “bolo” in Schneider’s Notes on the Mangyan Language, this number. 111310—3 146 MILLER. Another principal item in their food supply is camotes. These grow rapidly without much care and yield abundantly. A camote field once set out may be used for two or three years, while as a rule but one crop of rice is obtained from a clearing. When the time again comes for planting, the grass is so thick in the clearing of the year before that it is easier to make a new clearing than to get rid of the grass in the old one. At Pina, Burabud,™“ and Badyang near Bulalakao, there seems to be a tendency to establish permanent settlements and culti- vate old clearings. I have no doubt that if the people had a few simple agricultural implements to enable them to keep the ground free from grass and weeds, this tendency would develop, and after a short time there would be settled communities at these places. Along the Bako River and near Abra de Ilog no such tendency is apparent. Great numbers of clearings on the side of Mount Halcon may be seen from the sea. These in all probability have been made by Mangyans, but have become overgrown with cogon grass and are no longer used for planting crops. A small body of Mangyans making new clearings every year or two would soon clear a large area of forested land. In addition to rice and camotes, the Mangyans plant yams (ubt) ,*° taro (gabi),1° squash, bananas, and beans. They have also papayas.’ When I was at Dangas and Pina, the people seemed to have enough to eat, although they had no rice. At Burabud, however, they had very little. Storms had destroyed their banana plants and the hot sun had prevented their camotes from maturing. They had a few yams and occasionally found a bunch of bananas which, although still green, were far enough advanced so that they could be cooked and eaten. These people lived near the ocean and caught some fish. This was of great help, especially in a time of shortage. There is little else about their agriculture which calls for comment. When supplies of food fail or run low, the Mangyans go into the forest and gather various edible roots. One of these which they call kordt (the nami of the Tagalogs)*® is said to require soaking three days in salt water and three in fresh before * Burabud in Bikol signifies “spring.” * Dioscorea alata L. * Colocasia antiquorum Schott. “Carica papaya L. *% Discorea daemona Roxb. See also Reed, W. A., Negritos of Zambales. Pub. Phil. Ethnol. Surv. (1905), 2, 40. THE MANGYANS OF MINDORO. 147 it is fit to eat. It is then sometimes dried and pounded and sometimes cooked without drying. One of the most prosperous settlements in Mindoro from the point of view of food supply is known as Ak-si-gang near Abra de Ilog. About 24 people live here and it has been their home for six years. One man has 13 coconut trees almost ready to bear fruit and 50 more which are three years old; he also has 30 breadfruit trees all bearing. The people of this settlement also plant the customary crops, rice, camote, maize, taro, yams, squash, beans, papayas, and lemons. They say they use the last as medicine for fevers. They catch wild hogs and deer with spring traps and lassos. They keep hogs to kill, and eat chickens, eggs, and honey. The people at Aluyan, a small settlement near Abra de Ilog, say that they kill fish with a poison known as tuba kamisa, the croton oil plant.1® They crush this poisonous fruit and throw it into the water; the fish soon become stupified and are easily taken. They also catch monkeys for food by means of snares set in the trees. Some of them eat iguanas and some do not. Mangyan methods of cooking are common all over the Philip- pines so far as my observation goes; however, these people do not use the earthenware stoves or fireplaces which are employed by the Christians. They cook by placing the cooking vessel on 3 stones over a fire. The people of Aluyan at least know how to cook rice in a joint of bamboo or in the bark of a tree when they have no better vessels. WEAPONS. Tn the settlements near Bulalakao some of the Mangyans make and use simple bows with bamboo-pointed arrows. The latter are poisoned and are used in hunting game. They have lances also with which they hunt wild hogs. Among the Mangyans on the north coast of Mindoro I saw no bows and arrows. Spears also seemed to be scarce. The people in the Baké region sometimes use spears, which they get from their Tagalog neighbors, in hunting wild hogs. They say that they are afraid of the tamarao and never try to catch it. FIRE MAKING. The Mangyans have several ways of making fire. In the settlements near Bulalakao some men carry a flint and steel and tinder for this purpose. Others make fire by the use of two * Croton tiglhum L. 148 MILLER. pieces of bamboo, and still others with a piece of rattan and a piece of bamboo. The second of the three methods may he described as follows: 7° One edge of a piece of bamboo is sharpened. It is then firmly fastened at an angle of about 45° with the lower end away from the operator. It may be fastened against a post in such a way that the man who is to use it can, by putting one arm on either side of the post, bring the weight of his body as well as muscular force into play. On the convex side of another similar piece of bamboo a shallow groove is cut; on the concave side, at right angles to the groove on the convex side, another is cut until a small hole is made where the two grooves intersect. A few fine shavings are scraped off the bamboo, placed in the groove on the concave side so as to cover the small hole, and held pressed together. This second piece of bamboo is then held firmly in the two hands, the groove on the convex side is placed on the sharpened edge of the other piece, and the bamboo is rubbed rapidly backward and forward and at the same time is pressed down hard. In a few seconds smoke issues from the point of contact of the two pieces and soon the fine shavings are afire. This is the method in use near Bulalakao. In the Bako region practically every man met with, and some women as well, wears on the left upper arm 1 or 2 or 3 armlets of rattan. These appear ornamental, but are used in making fire. A piece of dry wood about 3 centimeters in diameter is selected, one end of it is split for a distance of 12 to 14 centi- meters and a plug is put in to keep the slit open. A few shavy- ings are then put tightly into the slit where it is narrow. One of the armlets is taken from the arm, unwound, and passed around the split stick just under the shavings. The split stick is held firmly on the ground with the two feet and the rattan is drawn rapidly backward and forward until the shavings ignite. A few seconds usually are sufficient. I have seen no other method of making fire in Mindoro excepting, of course, by the use of matches. The Mangyans are acquainted with matches and like them. FAMILY LIFE. Only long acquaintance with the Mangyans would enable the observer to know well their family life. As a rule I have no Compare also fire-making methods in use among the Negritos of Zambales. Reed, Negritos of Zambales, loc. cit., 40. THE MANGYANS OF MINDORO. 149 doubt that as among most people monogamy prevails and that the man and woman are faithful to each other, but at various places throughout the Mangyan area I met men who had two wives. As nearly as I could find out the principal reason for this was in order that the man might have two women to work for him instead of only one. On the Bako River in one settlement I was told that a man sometimes has two wives. In another settlement not far from the first the people said that a man married only one woman whom he never deserted; an unfaithful man or woman was punished by a beating by the old people. At still another settlement a man was married to two women who were sisters. The first had no objection to the man marrying the second. From the occurrence of cases of polygamy at widely separated points in the Mangyan territory and from the fact that inquiries made in the short time I was among them brought to light several such cases, I am inclined te infer that the practice is not uncommon. Marriage is rare between Mangyans and Christian Filipinos. It is probable that the Christians have some prejudice against marrying Mangyans. Whether the latter in general object to such mixed marriages I am unable to say. One Mangyan told me that if they were to marry with the Christians both parties to the marriage would fall ill. I think it is likely that at some time in the past a Christian Filipino and a Mangyan woman married, and that the woman caught some infection from the man. The existence of a tradition that serious illness will follow a marriage between the two people is difficult to explain except by some such hypothesis as this.” The names of both men and women in some parts of the 2 Mr. R. C. McGregor of the Bureau of Science informs me that he knew aman on the Bako River who could write on bamboo. *1T. H. Pardo de Tavera has shown in his pamphlet, Contribucién para el estudio de los antiguos alfabetos filipinos, that it is very unlikely that the ancient Filipinos originally wrote from below upward and that under the influence of Spanish writing they changed to a horizontal left to right order. The Mangyans probably came very little under Spanish influence and the fact that they now write horizontally from left to right supports Tavera’s contention. On the other hand Lisboa says: “Porque ellos [the Bikols] escriben y leen de abajo hacia arriba.” 154 MILLER. consonants together with the vowel a. These characters repre- sent the syllables ba, da, ga, ka, la, ma, na, etc. The addition of a short mark, usually a straight line, above these characters changes the vowel to e or 2, so that we would have bi, di, ki, hi, mi, m, etc. The placing of the same short mark below the character gives the vowel value o or wu, and we would have bo, do, go, ko, lo, mo, no, ete. Certain inconveniences and inaccuracies in such a system of writing are apparent. Neither a combination of consonants nor a terminal consonant can be represented, but only a single con- sonant followed by a single vowel. For example a Mangyan who was writing for me on a piece of bamboo had occasion to use the Spanish word “trabajo.” This he represented by the characters for ta-ra-ba-ho. “Salamat,’” the common Filipino word for thank you, is written sa-la-ma, the final consonant not being represented. ‘Barrio’ appears as ba-yo, “Agosto,” as a-go-to, and so on. ‘ These facts, for a person familiar with the system of writing, make it much easier to write than to read it.?> , There is nothing strange in the fact that the Mangyans, one of the least advanced of all the people of the Philippines, should have a native system of writing, while all the other people of the Islands who can write at all, with the exception of the Tagbanwas of Palawan, use the Roman alphabet. When it is remembered that at the time of the arrival of the Spaniards there were systems of writing in use among the Ilokos, the Pampangas, the Pangasinans, the Tagalogs, and the Bisayas, and probably also among the Mangyans and Tagbanwas, and when the great advantages which an alphabet presents over a syllabary are considered, it is not surprising that those Filipinos who came most in contact with the Spaniards abandoned their old systems in favor of the Roman alphabet, while those who were remote from Spanish influence continued to use them, even down to the present day.?® *T. H. Pardo de Tavera, op. cit., points out that in the ancient Tagalog writing two characters for le or li following each other might be read lili, lilin, lilip, lilis, lilim, liclic, liglig. The characters for ba and ta might be read bata, batang, batas, banta, bantay. “?®T hope to have within a few months some additional data on Mangyan writing and to publish a more detailed account of it than is possible at the present time. ILLUSTRATIONS. PLATE I. Group of Mangyan men and girls, near Bulalakao, Mindoro. (Photograph by Martin.) PLATE II. Fig. 1. Mangyan man, near Bulalakao. (Photograph by Martin.) 2. Mangyan man, Bak6 River, Mindoro; hair shows evidence of Negrito blood; armlet on right arm is for holding feathers or fragrant herbs, that on the left arm is rattan for making fire. (Photo- graph by Martin.) 8. Mangyan man, near Bulalakao. Note slashed sleeves. (Photo- graph by Miller.) 4, Mangyan girl, near Bulalakao, wearing breast band. (Photo- graph by Martin.) PLATE III. Fic. 1. Mangyan man, near Bulalakao. Note slashed sleeves, pocket belt, and loin-cloth. (Photograph by Miller.) 2. Mangyan man, near Abra de Ilog, in typical costume. (Photo- graph by Miller.) PLATE IV. Fic. 1. Mangyan woman, Baké River, wearing braided nito over the abdomen and a loin-cloth. (Photograph by Miller.) 2. Mangyan woman, Bako River, in typical costume. (Photograph by Miller.) PLATE V. Fig. 1. Jacket and loin-cloth of native-grown cotton worn by Mangyan men, near Bulalakao. (Photograph by Cortes.) 2. Baskets made by Mangyans; the smaller ones are made by the people near Bulalakao, the larger one by those of the Baké River. (Photograph by Cortes.) PLATE VI. Fic. 1. Jacket, of native-grown cotton, worn by Mangyan women near Bu- lalakao, and loin-cloth of beaten bark, worn by Mangyan women of the Bako River. (Photograph by Cortes.) 2. A, Braided nito. B, Strips of bamboo dyed red. C, Breast band made of buri and nito. D and E, Nito abdominal or breast bands. F, Head band. (Photograph by Cortes.) M55 156 MILLER. PLATE VII. Fic. 1. Mangyan woman, near Bulalakao, rolling seeds out of cotton fiber. (Photograph by Miller.) 2. Beating cotton to separate the fibers. (Photograph by Miller.) PLATE VIII. Mangyan woman, near Bulalakao, spinning cotton thread. (Photograph by Miller.) PLATE IX. Fic. 1. Better class of Mangyan house, near Bulalakao. (Photograph by Miller.) 2. Group of Mangyan houses, Baké River. (Photograph by Miller.) PLATE X. Fic. 1. Typical Mangyan clearing already planted. (Photograph by Miller.) 2. Rattan bridge built by Mangyans across Amnai River, near Sa- blayan, Mindoro. (Photograph by Martin.) ‘OVYVIVING YVAN ‘STYHID GNV NAW NVADNVN ‘1 aLVW1d ‘ON ‘GZ ‘ITA “IOS “Nuno “IIH ] : [‘ONOGNIW AO SNVADNVI : BATTAL 7 my Sen f che) Stee ae 1 pr’ wo S ih as : MILLER: MANGYANS OF MrNporo.] {Purm. Journ. Scr., VII, D, No. 3. Fig. 3. Fig. 4. PLATE Il. MANGYANS OF THE BAKO RIVER AND OF BULALAKAO. “WW ALW1d *Boj| ep eiqy jeau ‘uew uekBuep ‘zg ‘“BI4 ‘oeyejeing ieau ‘uew uefGuew “Tt “Bl4 “8 ON ‘G‘ILA “IOS ‘NunOL “11HgG] [OMOGNIW, JO SNVAONVI 2 aT * aaah ea ee pul ; x a Ohi Pas [Puiz. Journ. Scr., VII, D, No. 3. MILLER: MANGYANS OF MINDORO.] Fig. 2. Fig. 1. MANGYAN WOMEN OF THE BAKO RIVER. PLATE IV. MILLER: MANGYANS OF MINDORO.] [Puim. Journ. Scr., VII, D, No. Fig. 1. Fig. 2. Jacket and loin cloth. Mangyan baskets. PLATE V. 3. MILLER: MANGYANS OF MINDORO.] {Pui. Journ. Scr., VII, D, No. 8. Fig. 1. Jacket and loin cloth. Fig. 2. Articles of dress made of buri, nito, and bamboo fiber. PLATE VI. hei ea, usa en ey Are ‘MA ALV 1d “49qif U0ZZOO WOIy Spaas Huljjoy “T “Bly "6 ON ‘GQ ‘IIA “IOS "NunOf “11H dg] [‘ONOGNIW, 40 SNVAONVIA ? YaTTIPL Miniter: MANGYANS OF MINDORO.] [Pnm. Journ. Scr., VII, D, No. 3. PLATE Vill. MANGYAN WOMAN, NEAR BULALAKAO, SPINNING COTTON THREAD. MILLER: MANGYANS oF MINDORO. | [Puin. Journ. Ser, VII, D, No. 3. Fig. 1. Mangyan house near Bulalakao. Fig. 2. Mangyan houses, Bako River. PLATE IX. ford A i MILLER: MANGYANS OF MINDORO.] [Put.. Journ. Sct., VII, D, No. 3. Fig. 2. Rattan bridge built by Mangyans, near Sablayan. PLATE xX. THE PHILIPPINE JOURNAL OF SCIENCE. D. General Biology, Ethnology and Anthropology. Vol. VII, No. 3, June, 1912. NOTES ON THE MANGYAN LANGUAGE. By E. E. SCHNEIDER. (From the Bureau of Forestry, Manila, P. I.) The following vocabularies were collected by Doctor Miller in three different regions of Mindoro: Bulalakao, Abra de Ilog, and Nauhan.* The Mangyans of Bulalakao live among the foot- hills some distance inland from the town; those of Abra de Ilog scattered about the basin of the Ilog or Tuai River; and those of Nauhan on the shores of Lake Nauhan, some 15 to 25 kilometers from the town of the same name. Doctor Miller’s interpreter was a Tagalog, a native of Bulalakao, who possessed a good work- ing knowledge of English. With the exception of a few errors, which are commented on in the notes, I believe this list may be relied on as representing correctly the speech of those Mangyans among whom they were collected. However, it should be noted that there is perhaps an unduly strong element of Tagalog of recent introduction in the Abra de Ilog collection. This is seen most strongly in the numerals, which are practically pure Tagalog throughout, even to the compound words, which latter in the Bulalakao dialect are formed on a system somewhat different from Tagalog, Bikol, and Bisaya. Other instances of Abra de Ilog forms identical with Tagalog, or practically so, while the other two dialects are different, will be found under abdomen, cotton, foot, left, mountain (?), and, in addition to these native words, the corrupt Tag.-Span. baraso (Span. brazo, arm). It would be strange if one of the Mangyan dialects had exactly the same numerals as Tagalog, but they are the very words that are first picked up in commercial intercourse. Doctor Miller informs me that the Mangyans of Abra de Ilog have probably come more into contact with the Tagalogs than those of any other region. For convenience of reference, the English words have been arranged in alphabetical order, except the numerals and the names of the individual fingers, the former being given in order at the end of the list and the latter being made to follow the * This number, p. 185. 157 158 SCHNEIDER. ‘generic term finger. After each English word, those of the three Mangyan dialects are given in the following order: a, Bulalakao; b, Abra de Ilog; c, Nauhan. The spelling of the Mangyan words, as well as of those from other languages collected by me directly, is strictly phonetic, the following rules being observed: a, e, i, o, u have the Latin or “continental” value. (Long and short vowels are not distinguished, except in Ifugao, where short vowels are marked with a circumflex accent.) 6, similar to, if not identical with, Germ. 6, or Eng. e in her; it occurs in a few Mangyan words and has been substituted in this paper for E as used by Christie! in Subanun. b, d, f, h, j, k, 1, m, n, p, x, s, t, v, z aS in English. g, always hard, as in get. ng as in ringing; where used without the tilde, n and g are pronounced separately, as in ingrate. ngg as ng in finger. ch as in church. w as in water; used only at the beginning of a word or a syllable. x as Germ. ch in loch. y as in yard; used only at the beginning of a word or a syllable. The apostrophe (’) represents the glottal check, or hamzat, (Germ. Kehlkopfexplosiva). It will be noticed it does not occur in any Mangyan word here recorded; it undoubtedly exists in the language, but if present in any of the words collected, Doctor Miller did not observe it. ¢ and qu are not used, being replaced by k. In order to avoid the confusion incident to citing material written in as many orthographic systems as there are authors, I have reduced all words to the above system, except in doubtful cases wher there seemed to be some risk of misrepresenting a word whose true pronunciation I could not learn. Also, in the cases of words like apm, babui, etc., which are found with the endings -wi, -wy, -oi and -oy, and 6lo or wlu, in which is found every possible combination of o and u, I have unified the different spellings to avoid the endless repetition of practically identical forms. This seems to me unobjectionable both because it is well known that o and uw are frequently interchangeable even within very limited localities and because the majority of writers have been notoriously careless in the use of these two letters. * Pub. P. I. Bur. Sci., Div. Ethnol. (1909), 4, 107. NOTES ON THE MANGYAN LANGUAGE. 159 As the main object of the compilation is to show the probable nearer or more remote relation of Mangyan to the other Phil- ippine languages, forms not closely resembling the Mangyan have as a rule been cited only where no nearly identical ones were found. In cases where no English equivalents are given for the cognate words cited, these are synonymous with the Mangyan, cognate terms not synonymous with Mangyan being followed by English explanations. ; In the case of the numerals it has not seemed worth while to collate a mass of material; they are, therefore, simply tabulated, with a few notes in individual cases.2 No numerals were col- lected in the Nauhan dialect. LANGUAGES AND DIALECTS CITED,* ABBREVIATIONS OF THEIR : NAMES, AND AUTHORITIES CITED. Reed, W. A., Negritos of Zambales. Pub. Phil. Ethnol. Surv. (1905), 2, pt. I. Ae.-Bat.2 Aéta of Bataan. Ae.-SF. Aéta of Sta. Fe, Zambales. Ae.-Sub. Aéta of Subig, Zambales. An excellent table of numerals in Philippine languages is given by Scheerer, The Batan Dialect, following p. 88. Pub. P. I. Bur. Sci., Div. Ethnol. (1908), 4, pt. I. * Besides acknowledging sources from which the word lists are derived, I desire here to express my thanks to Doctor Miller and to Messrs. Scheerer and Beyer for various corrections and suggestions made by them while the manuscript was in preparation. *The spelling of the names (except Ibanak and Ifugao) follows the list proposed by Conant [The Names of Philippine Languages, Anthropos, (1909), 4, No. 5, 6], which has been adopted by the division of ethnology of the Bureau of Science. *It should be kept in mind that all Aeta (i. e., Negrito) dialects so far observed in the Philippines are of Indonesian origin; that is, the Aeta have everywhere adopted the languages of the tribes that surround them. It is quite probable that they have sometimes preserved antiquated forms and in some cases a tribe of Aeta may even have learned their speech from earlier Malayan invaders than those who now surround them. A modern instance of this was suggested to me by Mr. Scheerer: The Aeta of Zambales speak a corrupt Sambali, but Sambali is being supplanted by Iloko, Pangasinan, and Tagalog (see Reed, op. cit., pp. 27, 28). When Sambali becomes obsolete in the plains, which it almost certainly will long before it does in the hills, the Aeta will be speaking an otherwise lost language. Moreover, it is quite certain that each Philippine language, where adopted by the Aeta, has suffered a considerable number of changes in pronunciation and even of inflection, but it remains essentially Indone- sian. It is not, of course, impossible that original Aeta words may have survived occasionally, for instance in topographical names and names of plants. 160 SCHNEIDER. Ban. Banawi. Schadenberg, A., cited by Scheerer, O. The Batan Dialect, etc. Pub. P. I. Bur. Sci., Div. Ethnol. (1908), 4, pt. I. Bgb. Bagobo. Gisbert, M. Diccionario espafiol-bagobo, cited by Scheerer. Some words from the same source added by J. M. Garvan. Bis.-A. Bisaya of Agusan Valley. ) Furnished me by Mr. J. M. Bis.-M. Bisaya of Mindanao. | Garvan, of the division of ethnology, Bureau of Science, who has spent several years among the pagan tribes of eastern Mindanao. The first of these dialects is that spoken by the Christian Bisaya settlers in the Agusan Valley and the second the Bisaya spoken (with many local dialectic variations) throughout eastern Mindanao. Bis.-I. Bisaya of Iloilo.| From an intelligent domestic ser- Bis.-L. Bisaya of Leyte. vant, a native of Leyte, appar- ently well acquainted with both dialects. Bkl. Bikol. From my own notes on this language. Bk. -L. Bikol. Lisboa, Marcos de. Vocabulario de la Lengua Bicol.® Bnu. Banuaon. A tribe distinct from the Manobo, pre- sumably identical with the Bukidnon of Bukid- non Subprovince, Agusan Province. Its habitat is in the mountains west of the lower part of the Agusan River, in Butuan Subprovince, Agusan Province. Words furnished by Mr. J. M. Garvan. (See Bis.- A.) Bon. C. Bontok Igorot. Clapp, W. C. A Vocabulary of the Igorot Language, ete. Pub. P. I. Bur. Sci., Div. Ethnol. (1908), 5, pt. III. Bon. J. Bontok Igorot. Jenks, A. E. The Bontoc Igorot. Pub. Phil. Ethnol. Surv. (1905), 1. Bon. S. Bontok Igorot. Schadenberg, cited by Scheerer. Btn. Batan. Scheerer, op. cit. °T have so distinguished between modern Bikol words and those taken from Lisboa because his dictionary, though first published in 1754, was written about 1590 to 1620, and forms found in it, though now perhaps antiquated or even obsolete, are for that very reason of greater interest. In this con- nection it should be remarked that not too much weight should be given to the fact that there is so large a Bikol element in the following notes. Merely to look up synonyms is easy in any book of reference, even though one have but little knowledge of the language in question, but the compilation of cognate terms having often quite different meanings is comparatively difficult except in a language with which one is fairly well acquainted. NOTES ON THE MANGYAN LANGUAGE. 161 Dmg. Dumagat of Bulakan. Simon, EH. J. Manuscript of the Ethnoiogical Survey, cited by Reed. Form. Formosan, cited by Scheerer. Gin. M. Ginaan. Meyer, H., cited by Scheerer. Gin. 8. Ginaan. Schadenberg, cited by Scheerer. Ibk. Ibanak.’? Most of the material in this language was furnished me by Mr. Valentin P. Franco, of the Bureau of Forestry, a native of Aparri, Kagayan; some words are from Scheerer, and a few from Nolasco de Medio, P. Fr. Pedro, Gramatica Ibanag- Castellana. Ifg. Ifugao. Furnished by Mr. H. Otley Beyer, divi- Sub-Ifg. Sub-Ifugao. | sion of ethnology, Bureau of Science.® "This name is given as Ibanag (abbrev. Ibg.) by Conant, but it is pronounced Ibanak. The reason for this seeming inconsistency is that in this language all original final sonants are pronounced ‘surd, resuming their original value only when a suffix is added. That is, when the com- pound analogous to katagalugan, from tagalog, is formed from ibanak, it becomes keb-banag-an. It seems to me more logical to spell each form as actually pronounced, than to use a spelling that necessitates the con- stant keeping in mind of a phonetic rule in order to pronounce correctly the written word. *Ifugao is not a native tribal name. It is the name by which the people are known to the Ibanak tribes of Nueva Vizcaya and Isabela Provinces. It is now applied to all the clans, some 60 in number, that inhabit the Ifugao Subprovince of the Mountain Province. Formerly they called themselves by their clan-names, but they have now learned to call them- selves Ifugao, though they pronounce it Ipigo or Iptigao. They under- stand it to mean “fair-complexioned.” This is confirmed by comparison with the following terms: Ilk. puidau, white; Ibk. furau, white; Bkl. L. porao, white cloth or clothes; Bkl. purau, abaka cloth with no admixture of cotton or silk; Sbn. piilau, white abaka cloth; Ting. napudau, white; Bon. J. impékau, white; Bon. C. enpokau, white; Bon. C. pulau, Spanish, Spaniard; Bon. C. pomokau-ak, to be clear; Bon. C. papokawek, to clean, make white; Ifg. ipigo, ipigao; Sub-Ifg. ipiko, ipikao, fair (of com- plexion) and a variety of white rice. If we add to this the significant fact that the Ifugao are rather fair, while their neighbors, the Ibanak, are the darkest-skinned of all Filipinos, it seems rather probable that this is the true origin of the name. It was first applied to the whole tribe by P. Buenaventura Campa, Los Maydéyaos y la Raza Ifugao. Madrid (1895). Ifugao is the language of the Kiangan-Ifugao, Western-Ifugao, and Central-Ifugao Districts; Suwb-Ifugao, of the Mayaoyao and Alimit Dis- tricts. The latter differs from pure Ifugao essentially in its phonetic system. The name is given by Conant as Ifugau, but I am informed by Mr. Beyer, who is my authority for the above facts, that the final sound is a distinct o, the a and o being pronounced clearly and almost separately. 1113104 162 SCHNEIDER. Tk. Iloko. Furnished mostly by Mr. Valentin P. Franco, with the assistance of a native of Ilocos; a number of words cited from Scheerer. IN. Indonesian. ; Inb. Inibaloi. Scheerer, O. The Nabaloi Dialect. Pub. Phil. Ethnol. Surv. (1905), 2, pt. I1.° Kim. Kalamian. Jerdnimo de la Virgen de Monserrate. Vocabulario castellano-calamiano. MS. de 1789. (Retana, Archivo II), cited by Scheerer. Knk. Kankanai. Lagasca, Mariano. Manuscript, cited by Scheerer. Lep. Lepanto, Igorot of. Schadenberg, A., cited by Scheerer. Mal. Malay. From various random notes in my posses- sion. Mda. Mandaya. Furnished by Mr. J. M. Garvan. Med. Magindanao. Juanmarti, J. Diccionario moro-ma- gindanao-espanol, cited by Scheerer. Mey. Mangyan. Mnb. Manobo. Furnished by Mr. J. M. Garvan. Pamp. Pampanga. Furnished me by Mr. Luther Parker, of the Bureau of Education, partly from his own notes, partly from: Bergano, D. Vocabulario de la lengua pampanga. The same gentleman called to my attention certain words from Wallace, A. R. The Malay Archipelago. Pan. Panay, Bisaya of. Lozano, R. Cursos de la lengua panayana, cited by Scheerer. } Pang. Pangasinan. Macaraeg, A. A. Vocabulario caste- llano-pangasinan; and Pellicer, M. Arte de la len- gua pangasinan, both cited by Scheerer. Phil. Philippine. Sbl. Sambali.° Furnished me by Mr. Tranquilino Eli- cano, a Sambali from Masinlok, Zambales, at present completing the fourth year in the Manila High School. °For the change from “Nabaloi’” to ‘“Inibaloi,” see Scheerer, Batan Dialect, p. 15. - This name is not included in the list of proposed spellings (Conant, op. cit.). In another publication [The RGH Law in Phil. Languages, Journ. Am. Oriental Soc. (1910-11), 31, pt. 1, 70 and 81] Conant gives “Sambal” abbreviated Sbl.) ; the name of the people and of the language is Sambali. NOTES ON THE MANGYAN LANGUAGE. 163 Sbl.-Ae. Sambali-Aeta. Sbl.-Bol. Sambali of Bolinao,; Reed, op. cit. Sbl.-Iba. Sambali of Iba. Sbn. Subanun, Sindangan River. ] Christie, E. B. The Su- Sbn.-Dum. Subanun, Dumankilas Bay. banuns of Sindangan Sbn.-NR. Subanun, Nueva Reus. wey Jed), 1, Ih, Tear Sci., Div. Ethnol. (1909), 6, pt. I. Sub-Ifg. See Ife. Sul. Sulu. Haynes, J. H. English, Sulu and Malay Vo- cabulary. Journ. Straits Branch R. A. S. (1885), No. 16, cited by Scheerer. Tag. Tagalog. Most of this material collected by myself, with the assistance of my family; some words from Scheerer. : Ting. Tinggian. Meyer, H., cited lay Scheerer. ine Tirurai. Bennasar, G. Diccionario tiruray-espanol, cited by Scheerer. The asterisk denotes theoretical forms. WORD LIST. 1. abdomen; a, dwak; b, pu-son; c, bung-keé. a: Bkl. hawak, body; Bis. hadwak, waist; Bon. J. dwak, body; Mnb., Mda., Sbl. dwak, waist. b: Bk. pos’6n; Bis.-A. pés’on; Ibk. futung; Ilk. pus’é6rg; Bon. J. foto; Bon. C. poto; Ifg. putu; Pamp, pusu, groin. ec: No cognate material found. 2. afternoon; a, ma-lam-bung; b, gi-ra-pu-na-ni; ¢, a: Bkl..imbaénrg, warmth (see also hot, sun); Sbn. NR. ldlabung, noon. b: BKl., Bis.-I., Pang., Tag. hdpon; Klm. apon; Bgb. mapon; Sbl. adpon, late afternoon; Pamp. gatpandpon; Bkl., Tag. hapon, to go to roost; Pamp. dpon, id. For the ending -anz see sunset, yesterday; it seems to have a sense of a definite point of time. 8. arm; a, tak-ydi; b, ba-rd-so; ¢c, tak-ydi. e: Bkl., Ilk. takydg; Ibk. takydk; Ifg. takldi or taklé; Btn. tachai; Sbl. and Ae. takidi; Ae.-Bat. tukidi; Pamp. tdkdai. b: Evidently only a corruption of Span. brazo. The same form is found in Dr. John Francis Gemelli Careri’s report of a voyage around the world, 1693-1697. (Reed op. cit., p. 29, footnote.) Mr. Scheerer says: “The etymology is doubtless: sang, particle denoting unity or totality + bali or balei, village,” which I believe to be correct. The assimilation: 7g > m before a following labial is extremely common in many Philippine languages. 164 SCHNEIDER. 4, arrow; a, ud-yung; b, 2G) a: Pamp. uwyung; perhaps also the “Fillion: Bon. J. kayydng, spear; Ifg. gai’yang, spear; Bkl. sugyang, sharpened bamboo stakes, “caltrops”. The native name of Orion, Bataan Prov., is Odvens or Udyung; there is a town named Odiongan in Tablas, a sitio of the same name in Sagnay, Camarines, and a river named Uyungan in Montalban, Rizal. 5. bad; a, da-wt; b, da-ut; c, da-ut-latt. Bk1., Bis.-L. raot, n., evil; Bis.-M., Mda. ddut, to harm; Bgb. maddat; Bnu. maldat; Mnb. madiut; Bis.-A., Mda. mdat; Sbn.-Dum. ma-lat; Dmg. malot; Sbl.-Bol. marayét; Sbl.-Ae., Ae.-SF., Ae.-Sub. malayit. The third form is an interesting case of two cognate forms, probably no longer recognized as identical, being used to make an emphatic compound. 6. bamboo; a, ka-wd-yan; b, ka-wd-yan; c, ka-wd-yan. Bkl., Bis., Bis.-A., Bnu., Mnb., Pamp., Tag., Sbl. kawdian; Ifg. kawat'yan; Bkl., Ilk., Tag. wai, rattan; Pamp. dwai, rattan. The underlying idea in kawaian seems to be the same as in the Mal. name for bamboo, rotang besar, “big rattan.” It may be though that both wai and kawaian are derived independently from a root wai, to sway. (Brandstetter, R. Gemeinindone- sisch und Urindonesisch, p. 19.) 7. banana; a, b, sagin; c, Bis., Bis.-M., Bnu., Bon. J., Mda., Mbo., Pamp., Sbn., Tag. saging. 8. bead; al, Ap ranean a2, uno; b, nD bai; c, manik. al: Bis., Bis.-M., Bkl., Mnb., Tag. tohog, tohug or tuihug, to string, whence * pa-nohég-on, ‘objects to be strung”; Bkl. L. totoghan (to-tohog-dn with elision of penult and metathesis of h and g; Bkl. has no final h, so totohgdn would be inadmissible) ; Bis.-A., Bnu., Mnb. tohogin; Bkl. torohogoén (tohog + pluralizing infix r and stemvowel + suffix on) any perforated objects that can be strung. a2: Inb. uno. b: No cognate material found. ec: Mal. manik; Tag. and prob. Sbl., maniknik, various species of Palaquium and other genera of Sapotaceae, the brilliantly polished seeds of which are used as beads. 9. bee; a, put-yu-kan; b, su-kdn; c, tabun. a, b: Bgb., Bis., Bis.-M., Bkl., Mnb., Mda., Pamp., Pang. potiokan; Sbl. pukititan; Bnu. posikan; Bon. C. yukan; Ibk. azztkan; Ik. uytkan. 2?e: Sbn. te-ndb, honey, Mgd. tanep. 10. black; a, ma-bi-ro; b, mai-tum; c, as-nung-uno. a: Bgb. bero, soot; Bkl. L. biro, soot or lamp black from smoke of pitch, used for making a kind of ink or paint; Mal., Semang, Sakai biru, blue. b: Bgb., Bkl., itom, black color; Bis., Bis.-M., Bnu., Mda., Mnb. itum; Tag. itiém; Sbn. mitum. c: No cognate material found. NOTES ON THE MANGYAN LANGUAGE. 165 11. bolo;* a, u-tak; b, pi-sdu; ¢c, pi-sdu. a: Bis.-A., Bnu., Mnb. utdk, broad-pointed bolo; Bkl., Tag. itak; Inb. atak; Ifg. 6-tak. b: Sbn. pes; Mal. pisdu. 12. bow; a, bd-yi; b, pa-na; ec, a: Bis., Bkl. bdhi’, palmwood; Tk. ba-i; Pamp. bdyi; Sbl. bayi’; Bis.-M., Bnu., Mnb. bdhi’, fishtail palm; Mda. 6bd-i, id. b: Bis., Bis.-M., Bkl, Bnu., Mda., Tag. pdna’, arrow; Sbn. pana, bow; Ifg., Pamp. pdna, bow and arrow; Sbl. pana, arrow. 13. breast (mamma); a, stisu; b, stt-su; ¢, ba-to. a, b: Ban., Bis., Bis.-M., Bkl., Bnu., Bon. J., Ilk., Inb., Knk., Lep., Mda., Mgd., Mnb., Pamp., Sbl., Tag. sdso, (su%isw), sdso’. c: No cognate material found. 14. calf of leg; al, ka-pus-gdn; a2, arudan; b, bér-rés; c, ting-ting. 2al: Bon. C., fitkin. a2: No cognate material found. b: No cognate material found, unless bérrés be a variant of bitts (see under foot), which seems scarcely probable. e: Btn. alteng, leg; Form. tintin, tingting, foot; Pamp, tintinbutit. 15. carabao; a, karabdu; b, a-nudng; c, a-nuang. a: Bnu., Mda., Tag. kalabdu; Bis. karabdu; Bis.-A. kabau; Mnb. kiabau. b, ec: Bon. C., Ibk., Uk. nuang; Bon. J. nodng; lfg. ndang; Bk. L. (now apparently obsolete) anudng. 16. carry; a, ; b, mag-ba-bd; ec, Bis.-M., Bk1., Sam, Mda., Mnb., Pamp., Tee. baba or baba, to carry on the back. 17. cat; a, ku-ti; b, mui-ning; ¢c, pi-sa. a: Bis., Pamp., Sbn.-Dum. kuting; Bkl., Sbl., Tag. kutiig, kitten; Inb. kiting nan pisa, kitten; Ibk. kitadw; Ibk. (Pamplona) kusda; Bis.-M., Mda. kuding; Bkl. ikus, vocative kus. b: No closely cognate form found, but it seems not improbable that mining is a variant of some form of the widely distributed IN root from which both a and ¢ are derived. e: Ilk., Pamp. pusa; Sbl., Tag. pusa’; Ifg. piha. (Ifg. regularly has h for gen. Phil. s.) 18. chest; a, duwb-duib; b, so-6t; c, ta-lam-bang-dn. a: Ae.-Bat., Ae.-Sub. dubdub; Bis.-M., Mda. dubdub, stomach; Sbn. gogdob le-e, breast of man, dub-dub li-bun, of woman; Sub.-NR. e-dob, breast; Sub.-Dum. gédéb; Tag. dibdib; Dmg. dibdib; Ifg. dibdib, wind. b: Perh. Inb. sosot, intestines. ce: No cognate material found, unless: Bkl. L. lamboig or yambong, tunic; the o being unaccented might be assimilated to the preceding and following a’s; other instances of parts of the body named after things worn on them are: Bkl. bahdg, loin- cloth, pagbahdgan, waist; Bkl. L. botok, bracelet, bobotkdn, wrist; Bkl. hikau, earring, hikaudn, earlobe. “The current Spanish name, adopted by all other foreigners, for “bush knife,” “machete”; no dictionary I have seen gives any explanation of it. Perhaps it is a Spanish corruption of Tag. and Bkl. gélok or giiluk, the ordinary working bolo. 166 SCHNEIDER. 19. child; a, a-ndk; b, ung-d; c, ung-d. a: Bis., Bis.-M., Bnu., Bon. C., Ilk., Mda., Mnb., Pamp., Sbl., Tag. anak, son, demanniees Ife. nak, cae Tbk. wna id.; Bkl. L. anak, unborn young of carabao. b, ec: Bon. C. ongonga, children; Bon. J. ongonga, child; Ifg. 6nga, child, ongonga, children. 20. coat; a, ba-lu-kds; b, aCe Igt. of Balangao (Jenks, p. 155) Polen, breech cloth; Inb. balikes, belt; Ilk. bartkes, belt. (See also material under pocket belt.) 21. coconut; a, ni-ug; b, ni-uig; c, ni-uig. Bis.-M., Bkl., Ilk., Mda., Mnb., Sbl., Sbn., Tag. nidg or nitig; Ife. ntug; Sub.-Ifg. liyug; Ibk. nitk, Bnu. nidiig. 22. cold; a, ma-ra-mig; b, ma-dim-la-a-ni; c, ma-lamig. a, c: Bis., Klm., Tag. malamig, Ik. nalam’ék, lammin; Ibk. lwmmin. b: Pamp. dimla, n., marimla, adj., cold. The second form is probably from the same grundwort as the other two; one of the peculiarities of Pamp. is the frequent occurrence of metathetic forms. Judging from the ending -ani (see remark under afternoon) madimlaani perhaps means not “cold,” but “cold season” or “the coolest hour (of the night).” 23. cook, to; a, ; b, mang-apui; ec, Ibk. magafut, to Conte rice; Ilk. agapwi, id. (es fire.) 24. cotton; a, bu-rak; b, si-ni-lid; c, a: Bis., Pamp., Tag. bulak. b: Pamp. sitlad, thread, sinilad, cotton thread; Tag. szlid, to twist, sinulid, cotton thread; Ifg. hinilit, fine thread. It is probable that there was between the Mangyan and the interpreter a confusion of the article “thread” with the ma- terial “cotton,” as it seems scarcely probable that the word for “cotton” should not exist in any given Phil. language or dialect. 25. day; a, si-rang; b, alddu; c, a-rau. a: Bkl. strang, to shine, to rise, sirdngan, east, orient; Tag. stlang, sildngan, id.; Pamp. aslag, to shine, sinlag, shone. (See also to-day.) b, ec: BKI., Ilk., Pamp. alddu; Bis., adldw; Bis.-M. ddlau; Bnu. adau; Mnb. ddauw (Germ. Gd); Mda. dllau; Ibk. dggau; Ifg. algo; Sbl. dulo; Tag. drau. 26. dog; a, ido; b, idu; c, kito. Bis.-M., Bis., Mda. ido; Bis. tro; BKl. ido, puppy; Tir. itu; Btn. chito; Ibk. ito, kito; Kim. kito; Sbn. gitu. 27. down; a, a-ba-bd; b, sang-a-to; c, ta-tu. a: Bis., Bkl., Ilk., Pamp., Tag. baba or baba’, down, go down, descend, put down, lower; Bnu., Mnb. dibdba, to go downstream; Mda. bdba, id. b, c: No cognate material found. 28. ear; a, tu-li; b, ta-ling-d; c, ta-ling-a. a: Bkl., Ilk. tuli, earwax; Beb. tuli, id.; Tag. tutuli, id.; Bis. atwtwli, id.; Sbl.-Bol. totorydn; Sbl.-Iba totolydn; Sbl.-Ae., Ae.-SF. tuli; Bis.-M., Bnu., Mda., Mnb., atuli. NOTES ON THE MANGYAN LANGUAGE. 167 b, ec: Bgb., Bis., Bkl., Dmg., Ibk., Sbn., talinga; Bis.-M., Bgb., Ilk., Mda., Mnb. talivga, lug, handle (talitga has this as a secondary meaning in many other languages) ; Tag. tainga. 29. elbow; a, sé-ko; b, si-ko; ¢, si-ko. Begb., Bis., Bis.-M., Bkl., Bnu., Bon., Ibk., Ilk., Lep., Mda., Mnb., Pamp., Pang., Tag. siko or siko’; Ifg. hiku; Sbl. hiko. 30. eye; a, mata; b, ma-tda; c, mata. Ae., Ban., Bgb., Bis., Bis.-M., Bnu., Bon. S. J. C., Gin. S., Ibk., Ifg., Tlk., Inb., Klm., Knk., Lep., Mda., Mgd., Mnb., Pamp., Pang., Sbl., Sul., Tag. mata or mata’ (with variable accent) ; Gin. M., Ting. ada; Tir. moto. 81. eyebrows; a, kid-sén; b, ba-lis-kég; c, idup. a: Bkl., Ibk., kirai; Bon. J. kichi; Bon. C. kichoi; Bis., Tag. kilai; Ifg. kidi; Sub-Ifg. ichém; Smb. kiloi; Bis.-M., Bnu., Mda. kildi; Mnb. kilii. b: Bk. L. bulakég, staring eyes; Bkl. L. alisdkog, eyes blazing with anger. ec: Pamp. trap, eyelashes; Bkl. L. kirapkirap, to wink rapidly or frequently. 32. eyelashes; a, ami-me-ruk; b, ki-raz; c, bul-bul. a: Bis. L. amimilik; Bkl., Sbl. pirdk; Tag. pilik-mata. b: See eyebrows. ce: Bkl., Tag. bulbul, pubic hair; Bis. bulbul, down, hair of the body; Tag. bdlo, down of fruits; Pamp. bulbul, pubescence, feather; Bis.-M. b%ibiéi, pubic and axillary hair; Bgb., Bnu. bulbiul, hair; Mda. bib, id.; Mnb. bob&é (Germ. ii), id. 33. fall, to; a, ; b, na-la-bo; e, 3 Pamp. nébo’, to throw down, overthrow; Sbl. ndbo’; Bgb. gobba; Bkl. gabd’; Ibk. givdn; Ilk. rebbd, gibdéen; Tag. gibd’; Tir. geba, reba; Bis.-M., Bnu., Mda., Mnb. guba, to destroy, to go to ruin. 34. finger, toe; a, itu-to-rd; b, sd-lo; c, su-lu. Beb. tintudo; Bis. tudlé’; Bis.-M., Bnu., Mnb., téidlo; Bkl. moro’; BkI. L. sol6, hoofs of cattle, sheep, etc.; Ik. tamudz, index f.; Klm. toldo; Mda. tullo; Med. tinduru; Pamp. turt; Pang. tamoro; Sbn. tunduh, finger, index f.; Sbl. tamoro’, index f.; Tag. hin- tutuéro’, id. All of these forms are from a widely distributed grundwort tudu=turu which means primarily “to point,’ then “direct,” “teach,” “show,” “instruct”; (See index finger.) For the change of initial t to s in b and ce, compare Mgy. sukdn, Ibk. azeukan and Bnu. posikan under bee. 35. thumb; a, i-na-i-nd; b, pa-na-kol; ce, a: Bgb. ina-ind, godmother; Ban., Bkl., Bon. S. J. C., Btn., Gin. S., Ibk., Ilk., Inb., Klm., Knk., Lep., Mgd., Pang., Sul., Tag. ind, mother; hence (?) inaind, the “little mother” of the fingers; or (2) from Bkl. ina’, to diminish, the “diminished finger’, as having one joint less than the others. b: See large. Other names for thumb meaning “big finger” are: Bis. kumaldgko; Bkl. tindardkol; Pamp. tindardagul. 168 SCHNEIDER. 86. index finger; a, tu-tu-yau; b, pan-do; c, a: Bis. téro’; Bkl. toldd’; Pamp. turu; Tag. hintuttiro’; Ifg. dmtidu; and other forms given under finger. b: Probably * panudu from grundwort tudu. 87. middle finger; a, ma-na-ld-bau; b, labis na solo; c, a: Bis.-M., Bkl. panlabau < ldbau, projecting, salient, exceeding, standing out (see sakbdw under mountain); Bnu. ilalabdu; Mda. pangukdbau. b: Bis., Tag. ldbis, excess; Bkl. labi, id. 38. ring finger; a, pa-ung; b, 3 @ : 2? Bis. paningsingan; Pamp. Miramar Bis., Bkl., Pamp., Tag. singsing, ring. 39. little finger; a, lang-gi-gis; b, pa-na-gis; c, Bis. kamalingking; Bkl. gigis; Bon. C. ikiking; Tbk. amikiky; Ik. kikit; Pamp., Tag. kalingkingan; Sbl. tangginith; * Bist -M., Bnu., Mda., Mnb. kingking. 40. fire; a, apwi; b, apui; c, ba-ya. a, b: Ae., Ban., Bgb., Bon. S. J. C., Gin. M. S., Ifg., Ik., Inb., Klm., Knk., Lep., Med., Pang., Tag., Ting. apoi or apui (with varied accent); Pamp. api; Ibk. afui. ce: Bis., Bis.-M., Bgb. G., Bkl, Bnu., Mda., Mnb., Sbn., Tag. baga, ember, glowing coal; Pamp. baya, id. 41. foot; a, rap-rap-pa; b, pd-a; c, da-la-pa. c: Ban., Bk, Ifg., Ilk., Lep. dapdn or dapan, sole; Bis.-I. dapa- dapd, id.; Bis.-L. rapadapd, id.; Ibk. dapang, id.; Gin. S. zapan; Bon. 8S. C., Inb. chapdn; Ting. dabdn; Form. dapal and rapal; Sbl. palapa, sole. b: Bgb., Sbn. pda; Tag. pad; Ae. and Sbl. (six dialects), Bis.-M., Bkl., Bnu., Mda., Mnb. pda, thigh. 42. gabi;* a, gabi; b, gabi; c, bu-tig. a, b: Tag. gabi; Ifg. dba, kdba; Ik. dba; Bis. gabi; Ibk. gabi’'; Bkl. gabi, Alocasia sp. c: Metathetic form of Ibk. gabi’‘? Bkl., beside gdbi, has biga, another species (or mere variety?) of the same genus; Lisboa gives poka=Tag. maképa, (Hugenia javanica Lam.). 43. good; al, ma-yad; a2, ma-hdl; b, pi-a; cl, kap-yan; c2, a-tug. 2al: Bis.-I. madyo; Bis.-M. madayau, marajdu; Bnu. madadiau; Mda. madaydu, madadudu; Mnb. madaddu; Ifg. maphéed. a2: Bkl, Tag. mahal, dear, precious. “ The final h in this word, it may not be superfluous to remark, does not stand for the glottal check, which throughout this paper is represented by (’); except in the region immediately about Sta. Cruz, Zambales, general Philippine s is weakened in Sbl. to h, somewhat less aspirated than ch in Germ. loch and ich. 8 The Tag. name of the taro or poi-plant (Colocasia antiquorum Schott). It is applied, in Bkl. certainly and probably also in other languages, to other plants of the same family. NOTES ON THE MANGYAN LANGUAGE. 169 bi, cl: Bis. L. madpai; Ibk. nafia; Sub.-NR. pia; Pamp. mdyap, dyap, kdyap, goodness, dppia, kdpia, nobility, wealth; makdppia, dyap, kayap, goodness, dppia, kapia, nobility, wealth; makdp- pia, good; Wallace, Malay Arch., p. 478: pia, marape, mapiah, mapyia. ce2: No cognate material found. 44, hair; a, bu-hvik; b, o-b6k; c, a-bok. Bis., Bkl., Tag. bdhok; Ae.-Bat. labuk; Ibk. vw; Ifg. buuk; Ilk. book. 45. hand; a, kamang; b, a-li-ma; c, bak-wdn. a: Bis., Bkl. kamot; Mda. kamut; Bkl. kdmot to scratch; Tag. kdmit, id; Tag. kamai; Ibk. kimang; Bkl. L. kamangkamang, to wave or flourish the arms; Mda. kdmang, to get with the hand. b: Beb., Bon. S. J. C., Ibk., Ilk., Med., Pang. lima or lima; Ik. ima; Inb. dima; Sul. limah; Bis.-M., Bnu. alima; gen. Phil. lima five. e: No cognate material found. 46. he; a, si-d; b, si-d; ¢, : Bis., Bis.-M., Bkl., Bon. C., Mda., Tag. sid; Ifg. hia; Sbl. hid; Ibk. yaya. 47. head; a, u-lo; b, 6-lo; c, v%-lu. Ae.-Bat., Ae. and Sbl. (5 dialects), Bgb., Bis., Bnu., Bon. S. J. C., Gin. M. S., Ibk., Ifg., Ilk. Lep., Mgd., Mnb., Pang., 6-lo, or u-lu; Klm. kolo; Tir. uleu; Bis.-A., Bkl. L., Mda. 6o. 48. here; a, si-tai; b, pa-ra-6i; c, in-dd. a: Ifg. hitu (Ifg. h=gen. Phil. s) ; Ik. ditoi; Sbl. itt; Tag. dito. 2b: Inb. chiai (Inb. ch=gen. Phil. d; paradi may be pa-daot). 2¢: Bon. C. isna. The relations between the equivalents of “here,” “there,” and “yonder” in the various Philippine languages are very obscure and complex; only where the resemblance between two forms is extremely close, or where such differences as may exist are clearly explained by parallels in the same languages, is it safe to assume that two such forms are closely cognate. 49. honey; a, dai-kut; b, dé-gds; c, de-kut. a, c: Bis., Bkl. dokédt, to stick; Ifg. daydkét, dumikét, sticky; Tag. dikit, to stick, malagkit, sticky; Bon. C. enlangkot, sticky; Inb. dingket, honey; Bon. C. nikot, pitch; Ilk. napigkit, sticky; Ibk. narakko’*, id; Bkl. maragk6ét, rough (i. e., apparently sticky on account of not being smooth, like sand paper). b: Bis.-L.-I. dugus; Bgb., Bnu., Mda., Mnb. diga. 50. hot; a, ma-i-nit; b, ma-i-bung; c, ka-i-bung. a: Bgb., Bis., Bkl., Tag. init, heat; Bon. C. initek, to heat; Ifg. initom, id.; Snb.-NR. minit; Snb.-Dum. mayanit. (See also sun.) b: Bk. imbung, warmth, to warm. (See also afternoon.) 51. house; a, ba-lai; b, ba-lai; c, ba-lai. Bis., Ibk., Ilk., KIm., Lep. bdlai or baldi; Tag. bahai; Inb. balez; Pamp. bale, bdlai; Ifg. bdle; Sbl. bali; Sbn.-NR baley; Btn. vahai; Bkl. baldian, watchman’s hut in field; Pang. bdlei, village. 170 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. SCHNEIDER. 1; a, a-k0; b, a-ko; c, ba-ging-yak. a, b: Bis., Bis.-M., Bkl., Btn., Mda., Tag. akd; Pamp. aku; Bon. C. saken; Ilk., sidk; Inb. sikak; Sbl. siko. c: Ilk. bagi, human body. Hence baging-ydk, “body mine”?. But see also kabutyak under thou. kaingin;™* a, tan-mdn; b, a-ga-yum; c, ga-mds. a: Bis., Bkl. tanom, plant, to plant; Ifg. tanwm, to plant; Bis.-M., Bnu., Mda., Mnb. tantim, id.; Tag. tanim, id.; Pamp. tdnam, to plant rice; Bon. C. tanim, plant, maitamnan, planting; Bkl. tatamndn, garden, plantation; Bis. tandman, garden. b: No cognate material found. c: Bis.-M., gas, to clear land; Bnu., Mda., Mnb. gayas; id.; Bkl. L. gands, nasnds, to clear a space for the purpose of felling bamboos or trees. | knee; a, tu-ai-tu-at; b1, dulang; b2, to-ol; c, utul. a, b2, c: Bis.-M., Mda. tuai-tuai, kneecap; Ibk. tuad; Bis., Bkl. Tag. tohod or tuhud; Bis.-M. tohud; Sbn. takh-tuai; Sbn.-Dum. dulud; Pamp. tud; Ifg. tiug; Sbl. todr; Klm. tood; Tir. etur; Mda. toud, kneecap; Bis.-I., Bis.-L., Bkl., Tag. lohéd or luhud, to kneel. bi: Ibk. dulung. large; a, dakda; b, la-kol-ndu; c, tung-ydan. a, b: Bgb. dakol; Bis. daké; Bis.-A. dakua; Bis.-M. malagku; Bk1., Ifg. dakol, much, many; Bkl. dakéla’; Bnu. dagdagi; Ibk. dakdl; Ik. dakkél; Mnb. daki; Pamp. dakdl, much, dagil, largeness; Sbl. lako, much; Sul. dakolah; Tag. dakila’, great, grand; Bkl., Tag. dagddg, to increase, augment, add to. 2¢e: Mal. tinggi, height; Dmg. hiunga, large. left (side); a, wald; b, ka-li-wa; ce, tag-wa-ld. Bis., Bkl., Tag. wala; Tag. kaliwa; Bis.-M., Mda. kawd; Bnu. kawaia; Mnb. kawd. leg; a, ba-lang-bang; b, pa-nd-bo; c, bi-tis. a, b: No cognate material found. ec: Bis.-M., Bnu., Mda., Mnb. bitéis, calf; Bkl., Pamp. bitis, foot; Sbl. bitih, lower leg; Tag. binté’, calf; Sbn. N. R. botis, foot. loin cloth; a, ba-ag; b, ba-ai; c, a-bdi. Bis., Bkl., Mnb., Tag. bahdag; Ibk. vag; Ilk., Mda. badg; Bkl. haba, waist band (of skirt or trousers); Bkl. L. sabdi, sash with purse at end for carrying gold-weights or other articles; Sbl. lobdi; Mda. adbai, belt (usually beaded); Mnb. hdbai, id. loom; a, hab-lin; b, bu-la-bu-la; c, Bis.-L., Bis.-M., Bkl. hdbol, weft, cloth, to weave, Bis.-L. halablda- nan; Bis.-M. hablon; Bkl. habdldn; Mda. dbol, dbui > ablon; Mnb. habui > habion; Ifg. dbol, to weave; Ik. pangablan; Sbl. pangabolan; Tag. habit, to weave; Tag. hablon. long; a, d-ba; b, ma-d-ba; c, ka-bang. Bis., Bkl. ldba’, length, haldba’, long; Tag. haba’, mahdba’, id.; Bis.-M., Mnb. mahdba; Mda. madba; Pamp. makdba; Sbn.-NR. mayaba; Sbl.-Iba. mahiban; Bkl. L. yabang, broad, spacious. “Tag., “a cultivated clearing,” a term widely known and used in the Islands. NOTES ON THE MANGYAN LANGUAGE. ila 61. man; a, la-ld-ki; b, la-la-ki; ¢, la-ki. Bis., Bis.-M., Bkl., Bon. J. C., Gin. M. S., Ibk., Ifg. Ilk., Knk., Lep., Pamp., Sbl., Tag., Ting., lalaki; Bon. S., Pang. laki; Inb. dawi. 62. milk; a, gd-tas; b, yd-tas; c, gda-tas. Bis., Bis.-M., Bkl., Bnu., Ilk., Mfa., Mnb., Pamp., Sbn., Tag. gdtas; Bon. C., Inb. kdtas; Ibk. gatto’. 68. monkey; a, a-md; b, amd; ec, ba-kis. a, b: Bis., Bis.-M., Bkl., Bnu., Mda., Mnb. amo’; Sul. amok. c: Inb. baxes; Pamp. bagis, a monkey larger than a bakulau; Sbl. bako’; Mnb. bakis, a species of snake. 64. moon; a, bu-lan; b, bu-ld-nun; c, bu-lan. Ban., Bgb., Bis., Bkl., Gin. S., Ifg., Ilk., Inb., Klm., Pamp., Pang., Sbn., Sbl.-Iba bilan; Sbl.-Bol. béran; Sbl.-Ae., Ae.-S. F. buan; Tag. budn; Ae.-Sub. béyan; Bkl. buldnon, adj., moonlit, moon- light. 65. mountain; a, ban-trd; b, dl-nan; c, sak-bdau. a: Bkl. bantztd, elevation, mound; Bkl. L. bantéd, pantud, id.; Inb. chuntuk; Ik. bantadi; Mnb. umtud; Pamp. binduk; Tag. bun- duk. ; b: Pamp. 6lo, headwaters; Tag. ulo, id. (see also head); Bis., Bkl. ulinan or ulnan, pillow (i. e. head-place); Bis.-M., Mda. unlan, id.; Mda. unan, id.; Mnb. wan, id.; Pamp. ulénan, id.; Tag. unan, id. ce: Bkl. umbau (ungbdo, Lisboa) head (on a measure of grain, etc.) ; ldbau, projecting, salient, standing out or above; and the foll., all from Lisboa: mdbau, to weave in the manner of corduroy; takébau, to be high or tall, e. g. the load in a boat, the grass on the edge of a field; taribau and tibau, id. (See also middle finger.) 66. mouth; a, bi-big; b, bi-bi; c, bi-bi. Bgb., Tag. bibig; Ibk. vivik, lips; Ilk., Sbn.-Dum., Pan. bibig, id.; Pang., Klm., Med. bibil, id.; Sbl. bobdi. 67. neck; a, li-uig; b, lo-07; ¢, ta-lau. a, b: Bis., Bis.-M., Bkl., Mda., Mnb., liog or liug; Tag. liig; Sbl. looi; Ibk., Med. lig; Sbn. lehg. ce: Bkl. L. télau, uvula; Bkl. bakldu, plaited rattan ferule on the “neck” of spear shafts, tool handles, etce.; Bkl. bukldu, goitre; Btn. lagao; Ibk. bulldu, throat; Ilk. bukldu, glutton; Inb. bukdou; Pang. bekléo; Sbl. bukldu, throat. 68. night; a, ya-bi; b, mad-lum; c, ya-bi. a, c: Bis., Tag. gab’i; Bis.-M. gabii; Ifg. labi, dark; Ibk. gavi; Ilk. rabti; Gin. S. labii; Lep., Knk., Pang., Ting. labi; Mda. gabi, gabila; Sbl. yabi. b: Bis., Bkl. dulam, darkness; Bis.-A. dum, night, madiggum, dark; Bon. C. maschém; Gin. S. madschum; Ifg. mdtdum; Mnb. madiggium, dark, madokilum, night. (See also madlumani under sunset.’°) * For a discussion of this root, see Scheerer, Batan Dialect, WL 7 and 7a, and pp. 102-3. Ue SCHNEIDER. 69. nose; a, irung; b, -0-rong; c, ngu-lung. Bis., Bis.-M., Mda., Tag. ilong or iling; Bon. C. 6réng; Bon. J. iling ; Ifg. olong; Ibk. igéng; Ilk. agong; Pamp. drung; Sbl.-Ae., Ae.-S. F., Ae.-Sub. balongo; Bkl. dongo’; Sbn. soong; Med. ngirung. 70. palm (of the hand); a, da-lu-kap; b, pd-lad; c, da-lu-kdp. a, c: Ilk. dakulap; Inb. chalikap; Sbl. dalukap, palm, sole. b: Bis., Bis.-M., Bkl., Ifg., Pamp., Sbn., Tag. pdlad; Mda. pdi-ad; Ibk. pdlak. 71. pig; a, bd-bui; b, bd-bui; c, bd-bui. Bgb., Bis., Bis.-M., Bnu., Ifg., Ilk., Klm., Mda., Mgd., Mnb., Pang., Sbl., Sbn., Sul., Tag. bdbwi or bdboi; Ibk. bavui. 72. pocket-belt; a, ig Rae b, 2 G Bkl. hagkdés (fide Lisboa, also harikés), ee band, belt; Bkl. likés, circumference; Bkl. iksdn (fide Lisboa, katiksdn), waist; Bkl. takos, diameter (?); Bis. bagkés, belt; Bis.-M. Basins. id.; Sbn. bakés, Bon. J. wakis, girdle; Bon. J. C. akésan, woman’s girdle; Bon. C. wakés, woven bark girdle; Mnb. bakus, bagakis, belt; Bkl. bugkus, Tag. bigkis, tie (piece of cord rattan, etc., used for tying a bale or bundle); Bis.-M., Mda., Mnb. buigkut, to tie in a knot. (See-also coat.) 4 73. red; a, ma-ra-ra; b, ma-pu-la; c, ka-dim-ba-hin. a: Bon., Ifg., Ting. dala, blood; Ibk. daga, id.; Tir. dara, id.; Knk. mandada; Mgd. mariga. b: Bis.-M. mapud; Bis.-L. mapurd; Bis.-I., Bkl., Tag. mapuld; Mnb. maptya; Sul. polah. ce: Beb. liba, to dye; Bis. limba, red, to dye red; Ibk. labba, red; Mda., Mnb. liba, to dye red. 74. rice; a, bi-nu-gds; b, bu-gds; c, bi-gas. BEl., Lk., bagds; Ibk. baggd’; Bis., Bis.-M., Mda., Sbn.-Dum. bugds; Sbn. bogds; Ifg. boga, bogax; Sbl. buydh; Bnu., Mnb. dugas. (See also kabuksi under white.) 75. right; a, si-kon; b, pa-ma-lang; c, tak-su-kun. a, b: Ban., Lep. awan; Ifg. wawan; Btn., Pamp. wanan; Bgb., Med. kawdnan; Tir. kuonon; Uk. kandédwan; Tag. kdnan. In these forms appears the common stem wan, frequently with prefix ka-; Tag. kan-, Tir. kuon-, and Mgy. -kon or -kun are probably all contractions of this compound; Mgy., instead of a suffix -an, has made use of a prefix, with the addition, in the last form, of another prefix, tak-. This last is probably the same as tag- in tagwala (see left) the g being changed to k by the influence of the following s. 2b: Bis. I. tadlung. 76. river; a, sd-pa; b1, sd-lug; b2, sd-pa; ¢, li-bung. a, b2: Bis., Bis.-M., Bkl., Tag. sdpa’, creek; Pamp. sdpa, id.; Sbn. sapa-sapa, id. b1: Bis., Pamp., Sbl., Tag. tlog or tlug; lk. tlog, creek; Bkl. sdlog; Bkl. L. tlog, channel, ilig, to flow. c: Ife. libéng, lébbéng, deep pool, lake, sea, ocean; Bkl., Sbl. libtong, deep pool in river; Ifg. litimg, water. See also lubung under water.) Ut 78. TS), 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. 85. NOTES ON THE MANGYAN LANGUAGE. 173 rock; a, 7-li; b, ba-to; c, ba-to. a: Bkl. L. i’%, salt as hard as rock; Ik. dili; ? Bis., Tag. bantilis, a kind of rock (Romualdez, Bis. Grammar, p. 128); Bkl. L. bantiris, rock (in poetry). b, ec: Ae. and Sbl. (six dialects), Bis., Bnu., Ibk., Ifg., Inb., Mnb., Sbn., Tag. bato or batu (with var. acc.); Bis.-M., Mda., Sbl. bato’. run; a, ———-; b, da-la-gdn; c, Bis., Bk1., Tag. dalagan; Bis.-M., aoe Mda., Sul. dégan; Bis., Bkl., Pew, ddlan, path; Bis. M., Sbl., Tag. ddan, path, road, to go, to pass; Ifg. ddlan, path, SDA to walk; Bnu., Mda., Mnb. dan, ddyan, path. (See also walk.) j Evidently a reduplicated form exactly parallel to Bis., Tag. dalaga, Bkl. dardga, Kim. darala, girl, from Mal. dara, Med. raga. [Conant, RGH Law, Journ. Am. Oriental Soc. (1910- 150), Gilg rate 1, THI salt; a, ; b, asin; ¢, asin. Ban., Bgb., Bis., Bis.-M., Bnu., Bon. S. J. C., Gin. S., Ibk., Ik., Inb., Knk., Lary Mda., Mnb., Pamp., Pane Sbl., Sbn., Sul., Tag. asin or asin; Ifg. ahin. sea; a, dd-gat; b, da-gat; c, da-gat. Bis. ddga’; Bkl., Bis.-M., Bnu., Mda., Mnb., Sbn. -NR., Sbn.-Dum., Tag. eats short; a, dag-vid; b, ka-bds-to; c, pon-dok. 2a: Ifg. hoh-ddd; Pamp. makuiyad; Sbl. maantor or maantéd. b: No cognate material found. ec: Bkl., Pamp., Sbl., Tag. panddk, short (i. e., not tall). sky; a, lang-it; b, lang-it; c, ki-wang. a, b: Pan., Bgb., Bis., Bis.-M., Bkl., Bnu., Ilk., Klm., Mda., Med., Mnb., Pang., Sbl., Sbn., Sul., Tag. langit; Ibk. langi’t; Inb. dangit; Sbl.-Bol. rangit. 2¢: Knk. kayang, sky; Inb. akayang high. sleep, to; a, ; b, a-ka-lu-kan; ¢, Bis. I., Bkl. luko’, is lie down (used of or Bkl., Pamp. likub, to lie or sit down, cover the eggs or chicks, ibawradls Sbl.-Bol. marek; Sbl.-Iba. mdlek; Sbl. alok, to sleep, kakalokan, bed, sleeping-place; Ifg. mdlok, kalokan, id., id. small; a, di-it; b, i-bon-to; c, sing-it (sing-git? H. E. S.). a: Bis.-I. didtai; Bis.-L. gutiai; Bkl. sadit; Bkl. ditt, dikit, a little; Bon. C. akit; Ibk. baddi’‘; Ik. basit; Tag. malitt. b: No cognate material found. 2e: Tag. malinggit. snake; a, u-lai; b, uitan; ¢, ta-ldu. a: Bkl. L. hélag, big snake; Ibk. irdu; Ibk. ulag, rat; Ifg. vlog; Ik. uleg; Inb. ireu, big snake, uloeg, small snake; Klm. irao; Pamp. ulai, worm; Sbl. ulai; Tag. dlai, intestinal worm. b: No cognate material found. ce: This is the same as the Nauhan word for “neck’’; probably due to interpreter understanding the question “What is ‘snake’?” as “What is ‘neck’?” This will not appear improbable to any one who has noticed the difficulty many Filipinos have in distinguishing between the English long a and short e. 174 SCHNEIDER. 86. spear; a, hu-nut; b, si-bat; c, si-bat. a: No cognate material found. b, c: Bkl. L. sibatsibat, barbs of palm wood arrow; Ifg. hibat, barb; Pamp. sibat; Sbl. hibdt, dart, lance; Sbn.-Dum. sébat, spear with detachable head; Bkl. L. hibdt, to cut on a slant. 87. spring; a, bul-bu-gan; b, tué-bu-san; c, bu-kdl. a: Bis.-M. tuburdn; Bis.-M., Bkl. tubdd, to flow, spring, bubble up; Bkl. burwburw’, to bubble; Bon. J. ibig; Bon. C. 6b6b; Ifg. ubub, 6b6b; Ik. wbbig; Mda. tubéd; Mnb. tubudén; Pamp., Tag. sibul; Sbl. hubul; Sbn. tubud. b: Perhaps this is from the same root bug=bud=bur=bul found in words under a; Bkl. has many forms where r=s, especially such reduplications as kiri’kis7’, to rub between the fingers, orokésok, the rushing sounds of water, etc.; Ae.-Bat. has sanum for danum=ranum=lanum, water. ce: Pamp., Tag. bukal; Sbn.-Dum. budl; Bkl. L. bukalbukdl, to hones Sbl. bukal-bukdl, bubbling spring. 88. star; a, pam-ga-sdn; b, ma-gi-rum; c, ga-lai-mai. a, b: No cognate material found. ce: No Phil. material found, but (?) Amblaw maralai (Wallace, Mal. Arch., p. 487). , 89. stomach; a, ti-dn; b, bo-yong; c, pu-nd. a: Bis., Ik., Sbl., Sul., Tag. tidn, belly; Bis.-M. tidn, tidyan; Pamp. atian, id. b: Bon. J. fudag, intestines; Gin. M., Ting. budng, id.; Inb. birung, bladder of fish; Ifg. bidung, bladder; Bkl. L. buyong, cor- pulence. c: No cognate material found. 90. sun; a, i-nit; b, al-ddo; c, ma-i-bing. a: See hot. b: See day. ce: See afternoon and hot. - 91. sunrise; al, mak-surip-surip; a2, mag-sing-git; b, u-ma-ga; c, u-bas-tu. al: BEI. sir’ip, to peer, peep, look out or in; Pamp., Tag. sélip, id.; Bis.-M., Mda. silib, id.; Ifg.; hilip, sunset. (See also magsdlup under sunset.) a2: Bkl. L. rivg-git, great heat of the sun. b: Bis., Bkl., Tag. dga, morning, to dawn, verbal prefix wm. c: Pamp., Tag. buéikas; Mda., Mnb. bu&kas, dawn; Inb. kabudsan, to-morrow, buast6, day after to-morrow; Bon. J. aswakus, to- morrow; Ilk. to, a demonstrative particle denoting futurity. (See also to-morrow.) 92. sunset; a, mag-sdl-up; b, mad-lum-ani; c, ba-ya-ptin. a: Bis.-M. sdlup, to set; Bis.-A., Mda., Mnb. sdup, sdyup, id.; Mda., Mnb. sayupdén, West; Bk. sulndp, to set, sulndpan, West; Sbl. hunlép, to disappear; Sbn. sindép géndau, Sbn.-NR. sindipan, West. It seems that the same root runs through the words cited here and under sunrise, a NOTES ON THE MANGYAN LANGUAGE. 175 b: See madléim under night; for the ending -ani see note under afternoon and compare kapuni under yesterday. ec: See girapunanit under afternoon. 98. there; a, d-ti; b, am-ba-sa-ta; ¢c, bal-yo. a: Bis.-M. didto, idto, sddto, yadto; Bon. J. C. ischi; Ifg. hidi; Sbl.-Bol., Sbl. Iba éti, here, Sbl. ztdw. These forms are given tentatively, as resembling somewhat the Mgy. ati. The difficulty of tracing the three common adverbs of place has already been referred to under here. In this case it is increased by the fact that it is not speci- fied whether the English word is “‘there (near the person ad- dressed)” or “there (distant from both speaker and person spoken to),” a distinction that is quite definite in most, if not all, Philippine languages. a No cognate material found, except (?) Mda. desidto. : BkI. balio, Ik. baliu, the other side, opposite bank, ete. 94. ne a, sida; b, urd-boo; c, a: Bis. sird, sila; Bkl. sinda; Ife. dida; Sbl. hila; Tag. sild. b: Ibk. ira; Inb. era; Pang. ira; Bkl. 670’, all, whole; Tag. 600’, id.; Ibk. big, all, nothing but; Ilk., Pang. bitg. This compound form is perhaps not the one commonly em- ployed, but due to the interpreter emphasizing the fact that he wanted the equivalent not of Tag. sid, “he,” but of sila lahat, “they all.” 95. thou; a, kd-wo; b, kd-wo; c, ka-but-ydk. a, b: Bis., Bis.-M., Mda. ikaw; Bkl. ika; Bon. C. sikd; Ibk. sikdu; Ik. sikd; Inb. sikam; Sbl. hikd. ec: No cognate material found; cp. bagingydk under |. 96. to-day; a, ta-ing-una-pag-si-rang; b, bang-tina; c, tak-tung. a, b: Bis., Bis.-M., HSE Bkl., Bnu., Mda., Mnb., Sul., Tag. bdvgon, to rise, “get up’; Ibk. mdngun, id.; Ifg. bargun, id.; Bon. C. fumangun, id. (for pagsirang see sirang under day). It seems scarcely probable that so long a phrase as that given under “a” should be the only way of expressing the idea “to-day,” but Dee Miller says he questioned his interpreter very insistently and was not able to obtain any other expres- sion. ec: No cognate material found. 97. to-morrow; a, al-dadu; b, gi-ra-bas; ¢c, a-lu-bds. a: The use of alddu, “day”, “sun”, for “to-morrow” is, as far as I know, unique; Bkl. has, however, nu-sdrong alddu, “on the other day” for “day after to-morrow.” b, ec: See wbastu under sunrise. 98. tooth; a, nyi-pon; b, ni-pdn; c, nyi-pin. Bgb., Bis., Bis.-M., Bkl. Sbl. mgipon; Ibk. wgipan; Ilk., Mda. rgipen; Pamp. tpan; Pang. vgipoen; Tag. ngipin; Dmg. nipon. 176 OY). 100. 101. 102. 103. 104. SCH NEIDER. tree; a, kd-yo; b, kd-yo; c, ka-yo. Bis., Bkl., Tag. kadhoi; Bis.-M. kéhwi; Ibk., Ilk., Sbl.-Bol. kayo; Bon. C., Mda. kaiu; Sbl. kdiyo, wood, poon-kdiyo, tree; Ife. kat'yu; Mnb. kddo or kajo. The distinction made in Sbl. between “tree” and “wood” is one that, where there is any danger of ambiguity, must be made in many Philippine and other IN languages, the word kayu meaning both “tree” and “wood” in perhaps a majority of the languages where it occurs. ubi; * a, whi; b, ubi; c. wbi. Bis., Bkl., Ifg., Ilk., Sbl., Tag. %b7; Mal. wbi, twber. up; a, a-budt; b, sang-a-wai; c, tag-bis. a: Bis., Bkl., Tag. buhat, to raise, lift; Pamp. buat, id. ?b: Sbl. ta’gai, up, above. c: No cognate material found. walk; a, ; b, mang-a-dan; c, See daldgan under run. water; a, da-niéim; b, sd-pa; c, lu-bung. a: Ban., Bon. S., Btn., Gin. S., Ibk., Ilk., Knk., Lep., Pamp., Pang. danim or danum; Ifg. danum, juice, liquid; Sbl. lanwm; Bon. J. chenum; Bon. C., Inb. chanum. This word for “water” is undoubtedly connected with the very general Phil. imum, inom, “to drink”. Danwm is excep- tional in its strikingly uniform geographical distribution, all the languages north of Tag., as far as I know, without excep- tion, having it, while all languages from Tag. southward have words from the root ig. Ifg., however, has the word in a different sense, “water” being liting. b: See sdpa under river. ec: See libting under river. where; a, na-dn; b, sa-ro-ba-tdi; c, ag-du. a: Bis. L. hden; Bis.-M. hain; Bis.-I. diin; Bkl. haén, saén; Ifg. ddan; Mda. wain; Tag. sadn. b: No cognate material found. 2¢e: Bon. C. ento; Shl. aité. 105. white; a, ma-lag-ti; b, ma-pu-ti; c, ka-buk-si. a,c: These two forms seem to belong to a very widely distributed and extremely variable series of words (derived from a root gas= das=ras=las?) having such meanings as: white, bleached, faded, refined, yellow, blond, pale, light, ete. More than forty such terms, not counting numerous plant names, are known to me, of which the most characteristic are cited: Pamp. das- dds, Tag. dig’ds, Bkl. dagds, Bis. dug’ds, to blanch rice; Bkl. L. bugdse’ exceeding whiteness; Tir. rasi-rasi, very white; Bis. duak, light color; Bgb. daddas, to fade; Pamp., Tag. busilak, whiteness; Tag. busdk, exceeding whiteness; Bis. busdg, white; * The Tag. name of a yam (Dioscorea alata L.), but probably applied in various regions also to other species of the same genus. NOTES ON THE MANGYAN LANGUAGE. 177 Tir. busé,“ blond, busoé, dark blond; Ting. nabwtaak, white; Bkl. lwigas?’, lungsi, pallid; Tir. melusi, menlusé, id.; Tag. bigds and cognate forms. (See rice.) b: Bis., Bis.-M., Bkl., Bnu., Mda., Mnb., Pamp., Sbl., Tag. maputi’; Inb. amputi; Ik. puti (of cloth and yarn only); Tir. futé; Sbn. gomputi. 106. woman; a, ba-bda-ye; b, ba-bdi; c, ba-t. Ban., Bis.-M., Ibk., Ilk., Bon. S., Gin. S., Klm., Knk., Lep., Med., Pamp., Sbl., Sul., Tag., Ting-. babdi, babd-i or babae; Bis., Bkl., babdye; Ifg. baba’-i; Inb., Pang. bti; Bgb. bai, bdie; Pang. bai, grandmother; Bnu. buydu; Mda. bubai; Mnb. buht. 107. work; a, ; b, pa-ma-na-win; ¢, . No cognate material found, unless from * pama-gawa-in